Skip to main content

Full text of "Spendours of the sky"

See other formats


.    I 

.  ••-*"*  r  i :  ir*  • 

:l  r;'        :ri;-:h      :^  K, 

^PB  1H-.  /JL-,/        -*^  :  I  V 


M.LEV 


THE     26-INCH     EQUATORIAL     OF     THE     UNITED     STATES     NAVAL 

OBSERVATORY    WITH    WHICH   THE    SATELLITES    OF    MARS    WERE 

DISCOVERED   IN    1877 


L. 

Splendours  of  the  Sky 


BY 

ISABEL  MARTIN  LEWIS,  A.M. 


(Connected  with  the  Nautical  Almanac  O$G9 


ofthtU.S. 


LONDON 
JOHN    MURRAY 

ALBEMARLE  STREET,  W. 
1920 


Copyright.  1919;  by 
DUFFIELD  AND  COMPANY 


Printed  in  the  U.S.  A. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.    VASSALS  OF  THE  SUN i 

II.    THE   ORIGIN   OF   THE    SOLAR   SYSTEM     .  10 

III.  EVASIVE    MERCURY      .   ,_»  , 17 

IV.  VENUS,    EARTH'S    SISTER   PLANET      .     .  24 
V.    How  OLD  Is   MOTHER  EARTH?    .,     .     .  31 

VI.    MYSTERIES    OF    MARS       .     .     .     .,«,..  39 

VII.    THE  ASTEROIDS 46 

VIII.    THE  PLANETS  JUPITER  AND  SATURN  COM- 
PARED            53 

IX.    SATURN  THE  RINGED  PLANET    ....  61 

X.    PLAIN  FACTS  ABOUT  THE  MOON     ...  66 

XI.     SOME  UNSOLVED  PROBLEMS  OF  THE  MOON  74 

XII.    SHOOTING   STARS  AND  METEORS     ...  82 

XIII.  OUR   CELESTIAL  VISITORS,   COMETS     .     .  91 

XIV.  How   CARBON   DIOXIDE  IN  THE  EARTH'S 

ATMOSPHERE  AFFECTS   CLIMATE       .     .  98 
XV.    How  A  LITTLE  SPECTROSCOPE  TELLS  THE 

SECRET    OF    LIGHT       v 106 

XVI.    SECRETS  OF  THE  SUN  REVEALED  BY  THE 

SPECTROSCOPE       115 

XVII.    THE  SPOTS  ON  THE  SUN 124 

XVIII.    SOLAR  EXPLOSIONS 132 

XIX.    SOME    RECENT    ECLIPSES — THEIR    VALUE 

TO  ASTRONOMY 140 

XX.    ARE  THERE  OTHER  PLANET  WORLDS?     .  157 

XXL    DRIFT  OF  THE  STAR  STREAMS     ....  165 

XXII.    THE   MILKY   WAY 172 

XXIII.  Do  DARK  STARS  EXIST  IN  THE  HEAVENS?  179 

XXIV.  THE    BRILLIANT    NOVA    OF    1918,    NOVA 

AQUIL^E  No.  3 186 


PREFACE 

THE  following  book  has  been  compiled  from  a 
series  of  articles  written  by  the  author  during  the 
past  three  years  for  * '  The  New  York  Evening  Sun ' ' 
upon  astronomical  subjects  of  general,  popular 
interest^. 

Requests  from  a  number  of  readers  for  copies  of 
these  articles  have  led  to  the  publication  of  a 
selection  and  arrangement  of  them,  including  some 
revisions  and  changes,  which  form  a  connected  and 
comprehensive  treatment  of  the  astronomy  of  the 
present  day. 

Diagrams,  formulae  and  mathematical  proofs 
have  been  entirely  omitted  as  unsuitable  to  a 
popular  treatment  of  the  subject.  It  is  not  the 
desire  of  the  author  to  attempt  to  enter  into  a 
detailed  scientific  exposition  of  astronomical  truths, 
but  simply  to  tell  in  non-technical  terms  something 
about  the  wonderful  progress  tfe#  astronomers  are 
now  making  in  delving  into  the  mysteries  of  time 
and  space ,  and  in  solving  problems  concerning  the 
heavenly  bodies  that  a  few  years  ago  appeared  to  be 
beyond  solution. 


CHAPTER  I 

VASSALS  OP  THE  SUN 

TTTHO  has  not  admired  the  brilliant  and  beau- 
tiful planets,  members  of  our  own  solar 
system — glorious  Venus,  fiery  Mars,  ringed  Saturn 
and  magnificent  Jupiter  ?  Possibly  some  of  us  have 
also  spied  in  the  twilight  hour  following  sunset 
or  preceding  sunrise  elusive  Mercury,  closest  at- 
tendant of  the  sun. 

From  remotest  antiquity  these  five  planets  have 
been  observed  apparently  wandering  among  the 
fixed  stars,  though  in  truth  separated  from  them 
by  inconceivable  immensities  of  space.  Eight  plan- 
ets in  all,  including  our  own  little  planet  earth, 
with  their  attendant  moons,  unceasingly  encircle 
the  sun  in  obedience  to  the  universal  and  myste- 
rious law  of  gravitation.  To  modern  astronomers 
we  owe  the  discovery  of  the  two  outermost  planets, 

s 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Uranus,  just  at  the  limit  of  visibility  of  the  un- 
aided eye,  and  Neptune,  barely  showing  in  small 
telescopes  the  planetary  disk  that  distinguishes  it 
from  the  fixed  stars  far  beyond. 

Of  the  nearer  planets,  Mercury  is  by  far  the 
most  difficult  to  observe,  for  it  is  lost  in  the  solar 
rays  most  of  the  time.  In  less  than  three  months, 
eighty-eight  days  to  be  exact,  Mercury  completes 
one  trip  around  the  sun.  During  a  considerable 
portion  of  this  time  the  planet  is  either  hidden  be- 
hind the  sun  or  passing  between  us  and  the  sun. 
It  is  only  when  farthest  to  the  east  or  west  of  the 
sun,  at  elongations,  that  it  is  observable.  As  Mer- 
cury can  never  depart  more  than  twenty-eight  de- 
grees from  the  sun,  even  under  the  most  favorable 
circumstances,  it  usually  escapes  detection.  At 
eastern  elongations  Mercury  sets  after  the  sun  and 
is  evening  star.  At  western  elongations  it  may  be 
seen  in  the  twilight  hours  just  preceding  sunrise  as 
morning  star,  and  when  found  delights  us  by  ap- 
pearing as  a  beautiful  star  about  as  bright  as  bril- 
liant Vega.  Mercury  is  the  nearest  to  the  sun  of  all 
the  planets,  also  the  smallest,  the  hottest  and  the 
fleetest.  Its  orbit  departs  more  from  the  circular 
shape  than  does  the  orbit  of  any  other  planet,  so  that 

2 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  planet's  distance  from  the  sun  varies  as  much 
as  fifteen  million  miles.  The  diameter  of  Mercury 
is  only  three  thousand  miles  and  both  Jupiter  and 
Saturn  have  satellites  that  surpass  Mercury  in  size. 
It  is  almost  a  certainty  that  Mercury  always  turns 
the  same  face  toward  the  sun.  The  temperature, 
therefore,  is  torrid  on  one  side,  frigid  on  the  other, 
and  the  temperature  differences  are  made  all  the 
more  extreme  from  the  fact  that  Mercury  has  no 
atmosphere,  probably,  as  is  the  case  with  the  moon, 
because  it  has  not  sufficient  gravitational  force  to 
hold  one. 

In  Venus  we  behold  our  sister  planet.  The 
diameter  of  this  planet  is  about  two  hundred  miles 
less  than  that  of  our  own  planet.  Venus  far  sur- 
passes all  the  other  planets  in  brilliancy,  even  Jupi- 
ter, the  giant  among  them  all,  cannot  rival  her  in 
splendor.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  she  is  nearer 
to  us  than  any  other  planet,  at  nearest  approach 
only  26,000,000  miles  away.  In  strong  contrast 
to  Mercury,  Venus  is  surrounded  by  a  dense  atmos- 
phere. The  surface  of  the  planet  is  hidden  by 
clouds  and  no  surface  markings  can  be  distin- 
guished with  certainty,  and  so  it  is  still  undecided 
whether  Venus  rotates  on  its  axis  in  a  day  about 

3 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


never  allowed  to  take  form,  due  to  the  disruptive 
effect  of  Jupiter's  mighty  mass. 

The  major  planets  are  distinguished  from  the 
terrestrial  group  by  their  great  size,  enormous  dis- 
tances from  the  sun  and  extremely  low  density, 
not  much  exceeding  that  of  water — in  the  case  of 
Saturn  even  less.  The  density  of  the  terrestrial 
group  is  extremely  high.  Our  own  planet,  which 
possesses  the  highest  density  of  all  the  planets,  has 
5.5  times  the  density  of  water. 

This  low  density  of  the  outer  planets  implies 
they  are  still  mostly  in  a  gaseous  condition. 

Jupiter,  the  largest  of  the  planets,  has  a  mass 
two  and  one  half  times  as  great  as  all  the  other 
planets  combined.  He  is  also  the  centre  of  a  large 
satellite  system  of  nine  moons,  two  of  which 
surpass  the  planet  Mercury  in  size.  Four  of  these 
moons  have  been  known  from  the  days  of  Galileo 
and  can  be  observed  even  with  an  opera  glass. 

Saturn,  next  beyond  Jupiter,  is  noted  for  its 
wonderful  system  of  concentric  rings,  composed  of 
countless  tiny  moonlets,  and  its  large  satellite  fam- 
ily of  nine  moons.  Titan,  the  largest,  has  a  diam- 
eter of  3,500  miles,  which  places  it  between  Mer- 
cury and  Mars  in  size.  Saturn  is  also  remarkable 

6 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


for  the  fact  that  its  density  is  less  than  water.  It 
is  the  only  planet  in  the  solar  systems  that  would 
float  in  water. 

It  is  almost  impossible  for  the  human  mind  to 
grasp  the  immensity  of  this  solar  system  of  ours 
and  realize  as  well  that  even  the  solar  system  is 
but  one  of  millions  of  systems  that  form  the  stellar 
universe. 

If  we  should  try  to  represent  our  solar  system  to 
scale  and  should  choose  for  the  sun  a  globe  two  and 
a  half  feet  in  diameter,  Jupiter  would  be  a  ball 
three  inches  in  diameter.  Saturn  would  be  a  little 
over  two  and  a  half  inches  in  diameter,  Uranus  and 
Neptune  balls  of  nearly  equal  size,  a  little  more 
than  one  inch  in  diameter,  Uranus  exceeding  Nep- 
rtme  in  diameter  by  about  one-tenth  of  an  inch, 
while  the  terrestrial  group  would  appear  insignifi- 
cant beside  these  larger  members  of  our  system. 
Venus  and  our  own  Earth  on  this  scale  would  be 
but  one-quarter  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  while  Mars 
and  Mercury  would  have  diameters  one-seventh  and 
one-tenth  of  an  inch  respectively.  Placed  at  the 
distance  of  the  nearest  star  our  largest  telescopes 
would  fail  to  reveal  the  existence  of  Jupiter,  the 
largest  of  all  tbe  planets. 

7 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


To  form  some  idea  of  the  relative  distances  of 
the  planets  from  the  sun,  let  us  consider  the  time 
that  it  takes  a  ray  of  sunlight  to  reach  each  of  the 
planetary  orbits  travelling  outward  from  the  sun 
at  a  speed  of  186,000  miles  per  second.  Three  min- 
utes after  leaving  the  sun  it  crosses  the  orbit  of 
Mercury,  at  the  end  of  six  minutes  it  passes  the 
orbit  of  Venus,  eight  and  a  fraction  minutes  it 
requires  to  reach  the  earth's  orbit,  and  nearly 
thirteen  minutes  after  leaving  the  sun  it  arrives  at 
the  orbit  of  Mars.  Darting  into  the  vast  abyss 
lying  beyond  Mars'  orbit,  it  travels  fully  thirty 
minutes  longer  before  it  comes  to  the  orbit  of  Jupi- 
ter. Thirty-six  more  minutes  pass  before  it  comes 
to  Saturn's  orbit.  It  takes  more  than  two  and  a 
half  hours  for  this  ray  of  sunlight  to  travel  from 
the  sun  to  the  orbit  of  Uranus.  More  than  four 
hours  after  the  time  it  started  it  finally  comes  to 
the  orbit  of  Neptune  at  a  distance  of  nearly  2,800,- 
000,000  miles  from  the  sun.  From  here  it  speeds 
onward  to  the  stars  beyond  and  reaches  the  nearest 
in  four  and  a  half  years. 

The  periods  of  revolution  of  the  planets  around 
the  sun  differ  as  widely  as  their  masses  and  dis- 
tances from  the  sun.  In  eighty-eight  days  Mer- 

8 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


cury  completes  its  rapid  journey.  Venus  requires 
seven  and  one-half  months,  Mars  six  hundred  and 
eighty-seven  days.  Twelve  years  pass  by,  however, 
before  Jupiter  makes  one  trip  around  the  sun.  Sat- 
urn requires  twenty-nine  and  one-half  years,  Ur- 
anus eighty-four  years,  and  nearly  one  hundred  and 
sixty-five  years  elapse  before  Neptune  sweeps  en- 
tirely around  his  mighty  path  through  the  heavens. 


CHAPTER  II 

THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  SOLAE  SYSTEM 


the  material  of  which  the  sun  and  plan- 
ets  are  fashioned  originally  existed  in  the 
form  of  a  nebulous  mass  practically  all  astrono- 
mers believe;  but  the  process  by  which  our  solar 
system  developed  from  a  chaotic  nebula  into  an 
orderly  and  well-regulated  family  of  planets  re- 
volving around  a  central  sun  is  one  of  the  fascinat- 
ing and  puzzling  problems  of  astronomy. 

Near  the  end  of  the  eighteenth  century  the  fam- 
ous mathematician  and  astronomer  La  Place,  ad- 
vanced his  noted  nebular  hypothesis  of  the  origin 
of  the  solar  system  which  gained  universal  ac- 
ceptance almost  immediately  and  held  undisputed 
sway  for  nearly  an  entire  century.  Modifications 
and  changes  had  to  be  made  at  times,  however,  to 
adapt  the  theory  to  later  discoveries,  and  finally  in 
10 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  light  of  more  recent  researches  an  almost  com- 
plete abandonment  of  the  theory  has  resulted. 

According  to  the  nebular  hypothesis,  a  vast  gas- 
eous nebula  originally  extended  beyond  the  present 
orbit  of  the  outermost  planet,  Neptune,  and  slowly 
rotated  in  the  direction  in  which  the  planets  now 
revolve  around  the  sun.  Such  a  great  mass  would 
lose  heat  by  radiation  into  space  and  would  con- 
tract. As  the  rotating  mass  contracted  it  would 
of  necessity  rotate  faster  and  faster,  and  as  a  re- 
sult equatorial  rings  of  nebulous  matter  would  be 
abandoned,  which  would  have  a  tendency  to  break 
unless  perfectly  uniform  and  circular.  Excess  of 
material  at  any  one  point  in  the  ring  would  draw 
to  itself  the  remaining  material  in  the  ring.  The 
result  would  be  the  formation  of  a  planet  which 
would  continue  to  revolve  around  the  central  con- 
tracting nebula  at  the  distance  at  which  the  ring 
was  abandoned.  Other  rings  left  behind  at  vari- 
ous stages  as  the  central  nebulous  mass  continued 
to  contract,  would  form  additional  planets.  The 
globular  masses  formed  when  the  abandoned  rings 
broke  up  might,  in  the  same  manner,  contract  and 
leave  behind  rings  which  would  go  to  form  the 
satellites  by  which  most  of  the  planets  are  at- 

11 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tended.  The  rings  of  Saturn  were  supposed  to  be 
rings  abandoned  by  the  contracting  mass  of  that 
planet,  which,  for  some  reason,  had  kept  their  orig- 
inal form.  The  earth,  according  to  the  nebular 
hypothesis,  was  once  in  a  gaseous  condition  and 
gradually  cooled  down  to  its  present  form  of  sur- 
face crust  and  molten  interior.  The  theory  of  La 
Place  was  in  accord  with  all  the  facts  then  known 
concerning  the  solar  sj^stem.  It  seemed  to  explain 
satisfactorily  why  the  planets  move  in  orbits  that 
are  almost  perfect  circles  and  why  they  all  turn 
on  their  axes  and  revolve  around  the  sun  in  the 
same  direction,  namely  from  west  to  east,  and  also 
why  they  all  revolve  around  the  sun  in  nearly  the 
same  plane. 

The  asteroids  or  planetoids,  however,  furnish 
notable  exceptions  to  these  laws.  At  the  time  La 
Place  advanced  his  theory  they  had  not  been  dis- 
covered. These  small  members  of  our  systems  are 
now  numbered  by  hundreds.  The  diameter  of  the 
largest  does  not  exceed  five  hundred  miles,  and 
most  of  them  are  much  smaller.  Their  orbits  lie 
between  the  orbits  of  Mars  and  Jupiter  and  are 
remarkably  different  from  the  orbits  of  the  major 
planets,  for  they  vary  in  shape  from  almost  per- 
12 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


feet  circles  to  ellipses  as  elongated  as  some  comet- 
aiy  orbits.  Instead  of  lying  in  nearly  the 
same  plane  as  is  the  case  with  the  major  planets, 
they  intersect  the  common  plane  at  all  angles  from 
zero  to  thirty-five  degrees,  and  could,  therefore, 
never  have  been  formed  from  an  abandoned  ring 
of  the  contracting  solar  nebula. 

Moreover,  it  has  been  discovered  that  certain 
satellites  of  the  outer  planets  do  not  share  the  com- 
mon direction  of  revolution  of  the  planets  from 
west  to  east,  but  move  in  a  retrograde  motion 
around  their  primaries  from  east  to  west.  Also, 
according  to  the  nebular  hypothesis,  no  satellite 
could  revolve  around  its  primary  in  less  time  than 
its  primary  takes  to  turn  on  its  axis;  but  Phobos, 
the  inner  satellite  of  Mars,  finishes  three  revolu- 
tions and  starts  on  a  fourth  before  Mars  has  turned 
once  on  its  axis.  The  moonlets  composing  the  inner 
ring  of  Saturn  also  complete  circuits  in  between 
five  and  six  hours,  although  Saturn  requires  ten 
and  a  half  hours  to  rotate  on  its  axis.  Other  in- 
stances might  be  cited  to  show  the  failure  of  the 
nebular  hypothesis  to  explain  all  the  facts  now 
known  concerning  our  solar  system.  This  noted 
hypothesis  served  as  a  good  working  hypothesis  in 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


its  day,  nevertheless,  and  greatly  stimulated  inves- 
tigations in  the  allied  sciences  of  geology,  zoology 
and  biology  in  the  nineteenth  century.  It  is  far 
easier  to  tear  down  a  theory  than  to  build  up  a  new 
one  that  will  fit  in  with  all  the  observed  facts.  Sev- 
eral new  theories  of  the  origin  of  the  solar  system 
have  been  advanced,  but  no  one  theory  seems  satis- 
factory in  all  respects.  Astronomical  discoveries 
of  recent  years  have  shown  our  solar  system  to  be.  a 
more  complicated  mechanism  than  was  at  first  sus- 
pected. 

The  idea  that  the  nebula  from  which  the  solar 
system  was  evolved  was  originally  spiral  in  form 
is  now  quite  generally  held.  Chamberlin  and 
Moulton  have  developed  a  theory  of  the  origin  of 
the  solar  system  along  these  lines,  known  as  the 
Planetesimal  Theory.  It  can  be  shown  that  a  spiral 
nebula  might  arise  through  the  close  approach  of 
two  stars,  or  from  the  approach  of  two  nebulous 
streams  and  their  curling  together  by  mutual  at- 
traction, or  by  the  curling  up  of  a  single  nebulous 
stream,  due  to  its  own  gravitation.  There  are 
probably  close  to  two  billion  luminous  stars  in  our 
stellar  system,  all  in  motion,  and  we  can  reasonably 
assume  that  collisions  or  close  approaches  will  oc- 

14 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


cur  despite  the  fact  that  enormous  distances  sepa- 
rate the  stars  from  one  another.  When  we  admit, 
as  actual  discovery  forces  us  to,  the  existence  of 
dark  stars  and  dark  star  systems  and  dark  nebu- 
lous matter,  as  well  as  bright,  the  likelihood  of  oc- 
casional collisions  or  close  approaches  increases.  It 
has  also  been  found  that  the  nebula  from  which  a 
solar  system  evolves  need  not  necessarily  be  gas- 
eous or  at  high  temperature,  since  a  nebulous 
swarm  of  meteoric  particles  would  act  in  the  same| 
way  as  the  molecules  of  gas  in  a  gaseous  nebula. 

In  favor  of  the  belief  that  the  original  solar  neb- 
ula was  spiral  in  form,  it  can  be  shown  that,  while 
no  nebula  of  the  form  required  by  the  nebular  hy- 
pothesis of  La  Place  is  known  to  exist,  the  spiral 
form  of  nebula  abounds  throughout  the  universe. 
Even  the  stellar  universe  itself  may  consist  of  stars 
streaming  in  obedience  to  the  laws  governing  a 
spiral  formation.  Although  we  are  still  uncertain 
as  to  the  exact  manner  of  the  evolution  of 
our  solar  system  from  the  primitive  nebula,  proofs 
of  the  fact  that  suns  evolve  from  nebulae  and  pass 
through  all  the  stages  from  youth  to  old  age  are 
written  in  the  heavens  themselves.  A  careful  sur- 
vey of  the  heavens  shows  stars  not  yet  freed  of 

15 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


its  day,  nevertheless,  and  greatly  stimulated  inves- 
tigations in  the  allied  sciences  of  geology,  zoology 
and  biology  in  the  nineteenth  century.  It  is  far 
easier  to  tear  down  a  theory  than  to  build  up  a  new 
one  that  will  fit  in  with  all  the  observed  facts.  Sev- 
eral new  theories  of  the  origin  of  the  solar  system 
have  been  advanced,  but  no  one  theory  seems  satis- 
factory in  all  respects.  Astronomical  discoveries 
of  recent  years  have  shown  our  solar  system  to  be  a 
more  complicated  mechanism  than  was  at  first  sus- 
pected. 

The  idea  that  the  nebula  from  which  the  solar 
system  was  evolved  was  originally  spiral  in  form 
is  now  quite  generally  held.  Chamberlin  and 
Moulton  have  developed  a  theory  of  the  origin  of 
the  solar  system  along  these  lines,  known  as  the 
Planetesimal  Theory.  It  can  be  shown  that  a  spiral 
nebula  might  arise  through  the  close  approach  of 
two  stars,  or  from  the  approach  of  two  nebulous 
streams  and  their  curling  together  by  mutual  at- 
traction, or  by  the  curling  up  of  a  single  nebulous 
stream,  due  to  its  own  gravitation.  There  are 
probably  close  to  two  billion  luminous  stars  in  our 
stellar  system,  all  in  motion,  and  we  can  reasonably 
assume  that  collisions  or  close  approaches  will  oc- 

14 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


cur  despite  the  fact  that  enormous  distances  sepa- 
rate the  stars  from  one  another.  When  we  admit, 
as  actual  discovery  forces  us  to,  the  existence  of 
dark  stars  and  dark  star  systems  and  dark  nebu- 
lous matter,  as  well  as  bright,  the  likelihood  of  oc- 
casional collisions  or  close  approaches  increases.  It 
has  also  been  found  that  the  nebula  from  which  a 
solar  system  evolves  need  not  necessarily  be  gas- 
eous or  at  high  temperature,  since  a  nebulous 
swarm  of  meteoric  particles  would  act  in  the  same| 
way  as  the  molecules  of  gas  in  a  gaseous  nebula. 

In  favor  of  the  belief  that  the  original  solar  neb- 
ula was  spiral  in  form,  it  can  be  shown  that,  while 
no  nebula  of  the  form  required  by  the  nebular  hy- 
pothesis of  La  Place  is  known  to  exist,  the  spiral 
form  of  nebula  abounds  throughout  the  universe. 
Even  the  stellar  universe  itself  may  consist  of  stars 
streaming  in  obedience  to  the  laws  governing  a 
spiral  formation.  Although  we  are  still  uncertain 
as  to  the  exact  manner  of  the  evolution  of 
our  solar  system  from  the  primitive  nebula,  proofs 
of  the  fact  that  suns  evolve  from  nebulae  and  pass 
through  all  the  stages  from  youth  to  old  age  are 
written  in  the  heavens  themselves.  A  careful  sur- 
vey of  the  heavens  shows  stars  not  yet  freed  of 

15 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


their  nebulous  appendages,  and  even  whole  clusters 
of  stars  wrapped  in  nebulous  matter.  All  stages 
of  evolution  are  represented  from  the  blue  stars  of 
youth  to  the  feebly  flickering  red  stars  of  old  age 
and  the  cold,  dark  stars  that  have  lived  their  lives 
and  speed  onward  through  space  until  the  time 
comes,  when  they  may  start  perchance,  upon  a  new 
life,  through  some  celestial  catastrophe. 


16 


CHAPTER  III 

EVASIVE   MERCURY 

Tl  .TERCURY  is  the  most  difficult  to  observe  of 
*•**•  all  the  satellites  of  the  sun,  because  it  never 
departs  more  than  twenty-eight  degrees  from  its 
ruler,  even  under  the  most  favorable  circumstances, 
and  is  usually  entirely  concealed  by  the  blinding 
rays  of  the  sun. 

Spring  is  the  best  time  to  view  this  planet  as 
evening  star,  and  autumn  the  most  favorable  time 
to  search  for  it  as  morning  star,  since  the  ecliptic, 
the  path  of  the  sun,  near  which  the  moon  and  the 
planets  are  always  to  be  found,  then  rises  most 
sharply  along  the  horizon. 

Mercury  can  only  be  seen  for  about  two  weeks  at 
a  time  near  the  dates  of  its  elongations.  The  planet 
is,  of  course,  found  with  great  difficulty  in  high 
latitudes  and  is  rarely  seen  in  northern  Europe. 

17 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


In  fact,  comparatively  few  people  have  ever  seen 
this  closest  attendant  of  the  sun.  Copernicus,  so 
we  are  told,  never  saw  it. 

When  seen  at  time  of  elongation,  near  the  hori- 
zon, Mercury  usually  has  a  slightly  reddish  tinge, 
due  to  the  fact  that  its  rays  are  travelling  through 
the  denser  lower  strata  of  the  atmosphere.  It  will 
also  appear  to  twinkle  somewhat  for  the  same  rea- 
son. Mercury  is,  in  fact,  sometimes  referred  to  as 
"the  twinkler." 

All  the  other  planets  shine  with  calm,  steady 
light,  and  it  is  interesting  to  compare  Mercury,  if 
it  can  be  found,  with  the  other  bright  planets  when 
they  are  visible  at  the  same  time. 

Most  astronomical  observations  of  Mercury  are 
made  in  full  daylight  by  screening  off  the  light  of 
the  sun.  Sunlight  is  less  disturbing  to  observations 
made  with  large  telescopes  than  the  dense  haze  of 
sunset  and  sunrise  skies.  It  is  due  largely  to  the 
difficulties  of  observing  this  planet  that  the  period 
of  its  rotation  on  its  axis  and,  therefore,  the  length 
of  its  day  and  night  has  not  been  settled  beyond 
question. 

It  is  virtually  certain,  though,  that  the  planet's 
rotation  period  is  equal  to  the  period  of  its  revolu- 

18 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tion  around  the  sun,  or  eighty-eight  days,  and  that 
it  always  keeps  the  same  face  turned  toward  the 
sun.  If  this  is  the  case  there  are  two  longitudinal 
zones  on  the  planet's  surface  forty-seven  degrees 
in  width  that  experience  a  rising  and  setting  of  the 
sun  and  have  forty-four  days  of  light,  followed  by 
an  equal  period  of  darkness.  This  is  due  to  the 
great  ellipticity  of  the  planet's  orbit,  which  departs 
more  from  a  circular  form  than  that  of  any  other 
planet  in  the  solar  system. 

The  planet's  rate  of  rotation  on  its  axis  is  uni- 
form, but  its  rate  of  revolution  around  the  sun, 
due  to  the  high  eccentricity  of  its  orbit,  varies  from 
thirty-six  miles  a  second  at  perihelion  to  twenty- 
three  miles  a  second  at  aphelion.  So  there  are 
times  when  Mercury  falls  behind  its  mean  position 
by  as  much  as  twenty-three  and  one-half  degrees, 
and  times  when  it  darts  ahead  of  its  mean  position 
by  an  equal  amount. 

As  a  result  the  sun's  rays  fall  first  twenty-three 
and  one-half  degrees  beyond  the  point  on  the  plan- 
et's surface  where  they  would  fall  if  the  orbit  were 
circular,  and  then  twenty-three  and  one-half  de- 
grees short  of  this  position.  This  gives  rise  to  the 
two  zones  forty-seven  degrees  wide  and  diametric- 

19 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ally  opposite  each,  other  that  have  an  alternate  day 
and  night,  each  equal  in  length  to  forty-four  ter- 
restrial days.  Between  these  two  lie  the  two  zones, 
each  one  hundred  and  thirty-three  degrees  wide, 
one  of  perpetual  day  and  the  other  of  perpetual 
night. 

On  the  daylight  side  of  the  planet  the  sun  ap- 
pears to  oscillate  backward  and  forward  through 
an  angle  of  forty-seven  degrees,  and  the  lowest  tem- 
perature is  higher  than  that  of  the  boiling  point 
of  water  upon  the  earth.  Upon  the  night  side  the 
only  light  is  that  furnished  by  the  stars  that  shine 
with  a  radiance  and  glory  unknown  to  us  who  dwell 
in  a  world  that  is  always  surrounded  by  a  dense, 
obscuring  atmosphere.  Mercury  has  no  appreci- 
able atmosphere  and  the  terrible  cold  of  space  pre- 
vailing upon  the  night  side  of  the  planet  is  un- 
tempered  by  warm  air  currents,  such  as  would  flow 
from  the  hot  to  the  cold  side  if  the  planet  possessed 
an  atmosphere. 

Here  exists  a  world  of  extremes,  scorched 
on  one  side,  frozen  on  the  other,  while  in 
the  zones  of  alternate  day  and  night  that  lie 
between  is  to  be  found  all  the  range  of  temper- 
ature that  lies  between  the  two  extremes.  Lack  of 

20 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


atmosphere  on  Mercury  prohibits  the  existence  of 
life. 

The  planet  reflects  about  fourteen  per  cent,  of 
the  sunlight  it  receives,  which  is  slightly  less  than 
the  amount  reflected  by  the  moon's  surface  and  it 
is  believed  that  its  surface  resembles  that  of  our 
satellite  in  being  barren  and  mountainous. 

The  axis  of  the  planet  is  probably  perpendicular 
to  its  orbit,  and  it  has,  for  this  reason,  no  seasons, 
though  its  greatly  varying  distance  from  the  sun 
produces  the  same  effect.  The  average  distance  of 
the  planet  from  the  sun  is  36,000,000  miles.  At 
perihelion  its  distance  is  7,500,000  miles  less  than 
this  amount  and  at  aphelion  7,500,000  miles  greater. 
The  heat  and  light  received  from  the  sun  while  in 
these  two  positions  vary  in  the  ratio  of  nine  to 
four.  A  marked  increase  in  the  apparent  size  of 
the  sun  would  be  noticed  in  passing  from  aphelion 
to  perihelion  and  a  corresponding  decrease  in  pass- 
ing from  perihelion  back  to  aphelion. 

Mercury  is  not  only  the  smallest  of  all  the  plan- 
ets, but  it  is  even  surpassed  in  size  by  Titan,  one 
of  the  satellites  of  Saturn  and  Ganymede,  the  third 
satellite  of  Jupiter. 

The  fact  that  the  perihelion  of  Mercury  moves 
21 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


faster  than  it  would  move  if  acted  upon  only  by 
known  laws  has  long  been  a  subject  for  astronomi- 
cal investigation,  and  many  theories  have  been  ad- 
vanced in  explanation,  among  them  the  theory  of 
the  existence  of  an  intra-mercurial  planet.  Ac« 
cording  to  Leverrier,  the  noted  French  mathema- 
tician, the  mass  of  such  a  planet  would  need  to  be 
one-half  the  mass  of  Mercury  itself  in  order  to  ac- 
count for  the  actual  discrepancy  existing  between 
the  observed  and  computed  values. 

It  is  virtually  certain  as  a  result  of  careful  ex- 
amination of  many  photographs  taken  at  the  time 
of  total  eclipses  of  the  sun  that  no  object  exists 
within  the  orbit  of  Mercury  with  a  diameter  ex- 
ceeding thirty  or  forty  miles.  There  is  the  possi- 
bility that  a  number  of  minute  bodies  of  asteroidal 
size  may  revolve  around  the  sun  within  the  orbit 
of  Mercury,  but  it  is  very  improbable  that  their 
combined  mass  would  total  half  the  mass  of  Mer- 
cury. 

So  we  may  assume  that  Mercury  enjoys  the 
distinction  of  being  the  smallest  of  all  the  plan- 
ets, and  also  the  nearest  to  the  sun.  It  is,  in  fact, 
distinctive  in  many  ways.  Its  orbit  is  the  most 
elliptical  and  the  most  highly  inclined  to  the  eclip- 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tic  of  all  the  planetary  orbits.  The  planet  itself 
is  the  most  rarely  seen  of  all  planets  visible  to  the 
naked  eye,  and  the  only  one  that  does  not  possess 
an  atmosphere. 


23 


CHAPTER  IV 


VENUS,  EARTH'S  SISTER  PLANET 

THE  silvery  radiance  of  Earth's  sister  planet, 
Venus,  attracts  the  attention  of  all  whenever 
she  appears  in  the  western  sky,  since  she  is  then 
the  most  beautiful  and  conspicuous  stellar  object 
in  the  heavens.  Though  fully  as  beautiful  when 
she  is  visible  as  "morning  star"  before  sunrise, 
few  of  us  are  up  at  that  time  to  admire  her. 

Half  way  between  the  horizon  and  the  zenith 
marks  the  limit  of  her  departure  from  the  sun. 
Since  the  orbit  of  Venus  lies  between  us  and  the 
sun  we  may  never  see  her  in  opposition  to  the  sun 
or  upon  the  meridian  at  midnight,  as  we  do  the 
outer  planets,  Mars,  Jupiter  and  Saturn,  and,  un- 
like these  planets,  Venus  does  not  show  a  circular 
disk  in  the  telescope,  but  exhibits  all  the  phases 
of  the  moon  and  when  at  her  greatest  brilliancy 

24 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


appears  like  a  crescent  moon  in  the  telescope. 
Although  Venus  approaches  nearer  the  earth 
than  any  other  celestial  body  except  the  moon,  the 
asteroid  Eros,  and  a  chance  comet,  she  is,  unfortu- 
nately, entirely  invisible  at  the  time  of  closest  ap- 
proach. The  phase  she  then  exhibits  corresponds 
to  that  of  new  moon.  Her  illuminated  face  is 
turned  toward  the  sun,  her  night  side  toward  the 
earth.  She  is  then  but  26,000,000  miles  away  and 
between  the  earth  and  sun.  Just  before  and  after 
this  time,  which  is  spoken  of  as  the  time  of  inferior 
conjunction,  she  appears  as  a  very  thin  crescent 
in  the  telescope,  resembling  the  moon  a  day  or  two 
before  and  after  new  moon.  Near  the  time  of 
nearest  approach  of  the  two  planets  some  astrono- 
mers have  observed  a  faint,  ashy  light  upon  the 
darkened  disk  of  the  planet.  As  Venus  has  no  sat- 
ellite, this  cannot  be  attributed  to  reflected  moon- 
light, though  some  have  believed  it  to  be  due  to 
earth  shine  or  the  light  from  our  own  planet  re- 
flected from  the  surface  of  Venus.  It  is  extremely 
doubtful  that  earth  shine  could  be  appreciable 
when  a  distance  of  fully  26,000,000  miles  separates 
the  two  bodies,  though  our  planet  presents  to 
Venus  at  this  time  the  phase  of  the  full  moon  and 

25 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


appears  much  larger  and  more  brilliant  to  Venus 
than  Venus  ever  does  to  us.  That  it  may  be  due 
to  some  electrical  manifestation  in  the  planet's  at- 
mosphere similar  to  auroral  displays  in  our  own 
seems  more  reasonable.  It  is  also  near  the  time  of 
closest  approach  that  a  very  faint  ring  of  light  may 
be  observed  outlining  the  disk  of  the  planet.  This 
is  caused  by  the  reflected  sunlight  from  the  dense 
atmosphere  that  surrounds  the  planet  and  fur- 
nishes one  of  many  proofs  of  the  existence  of  such 
an  atmosphere. 

If  higher  forms  of  life  exist  upon  our  sister 
planet  and  dense  clouds  do  not  always  completely 
hide  the  heavens,  we  may  imagine  with  what  in- 
terest our  own  little  earth-moon  system  would  be 
observed  at  this  time  of  closest  approach  of  the  two 
bodies.  A  most  beautiful  and  interesting  double 
star  our  earth-moon  system  must  appear  from 
Venus.  Our  satellite,  of  course,  would  be  plainly 
visible  to  the  naked  eye  from  Venus  and  its  con- 
stantly varying  positions  with  reference  to  our 
planet  would  soon  reveal  the  fact  that  it  is  in  rev- 
olution around  the  earth.  How  intelligent  beings 
there  might  puzzle  over  the  earth's  continents  and 
seas,  changing  vegetation,  polar  snow  caps,  clouds, 

26 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


daily  rotation  and  sensational  changes !  Just  as  we 
puzzle  over  Mars  and  its  baffling  surface  markings 
may  not  another  world  be  puzzling  over  our  pe- 
culiarities? This  may  be  most  unlikely,  but  it  is 
a  possibility.  About  the  planet  Venus  we  know 
very  little  except  that  its  age  may  be  very  nearly 
that  of  our  own  planet  and  that  it  is  more  suited  to 
the  development  of  forms  of  life  such  as  we  have 
upon  the  earth  than  any  other  planet  in  the  sun's 
family,  provided  it  rotates  upon  its  axis  once  in 
about  twenty-four  hours.  Upon  this  point  we  are 
still  in  doubt,  for  observations  of  Venus  are  always 
made  at  a  disadvantage,  owing  to  the  density  of  its 
atmosphere  and  the  fact  that  it  is  always  more  or 
less  unfavorably  situated  for  observation. 

Many  markings  have  been  observed  upon  Venus, 
but,  unfortunately,  they  do  not  appear  the  same 
to  all  observers,  and  it  is  still  impossible  to  say 
with  certainty  whether  the  actual  surface  of  the 
planet  or  cloud  formations  are  seen.  Even  deter- 
minations of  the  planet's  period  of  rotation  by 
means  of  the  spectroscope  contradict  each  other 
flatly.  After  years  of  observations  we  do  not  yet 
know  whether  Venus  rotates  on  its  axis  in  twenty- 
four  hours  or  in  two  hundred  and  twenty-five  days, 

37 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  period  of  its  revolution  around  the  sun.  In 
the  latter  case  it  would  always  turn  the  same  face 
toward  the  sun  just  as  our  satellite  always  turns 
the  same  face  toward  the  earth.  If  this  state  of 
affairs  exists  on  Venus  one  side  never  sees  the  sun, 
the  other  side  never  sees  the  heavens  studded  with 
myriads  of  stars,  but  feels  the  torrid  heat  of  a 
sun  immovable  in  the  sky,  possibly  screened  from 
view  by  friendly  clouds.  The  planet 's  dense  atmos- 
phere would  tend  to  mitigate  the  two  extremes  of 
temperature  found  on  opposite  sides  of  the  planet 
by  a  constant  flow  of  air  currents  between  the  two 
sides.  In  fact,  there  would  be,  under  such  circum- 
stances, storms  of  frightful  intensity  continually 
raging  over  the  planet's  surface.  If,  on  the  other 
hand,  Venus  turns  on  its  axis  in  approximately 
twenty-four  hours  no  other  planet  in  the  solar  sys- 
tem so  closely  resembles  the  earth. 

The  diameters  of  the  two  planets  differ  by  about 
200  miles,  and  in  mass,  density  and  surface  gravity 
they  are  nearly  the  same.  A  man  weighing  170 
pounds  upon  the  earth  would  weigh  145  pounds 
upon  Venus.  We  could  move  about  a  little  more 
easily  upon  Venus  than  we  do  upon  our  own  planet. 
We  would  probably  find  the  atmosphere  very  much 

28 


£ 


13  5 

CO  +" 

M  <*-» 

s  | 

8  I 


w 

II 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  same.  The  reflecting  power  of  the  atmosphere 
of  Venus  is  very  nearly  the  same  as  that  of  the 
thunder  heads  we  often  observe  in  our  summer 
skies,  which  seems  to  indicate  a  cloud  laden  at- 
mosphere for  our  sister  planet.  Though  some  ob- 
servers have  placed  the  density  of  the  atmosphere 
of  Venus  at  twice  the  density  of  the  earth 's  at- 
mosphere, others  believe  they  are  virtually  the 
same.  It  is  in  the  amount  of  light  and  heat  re- 
ceived from  the  sun  that  we  note  the  greatest 
difference  between  the  two  planets.  Venus  receives 
nearly  twice  as  much  light  and  heat  from  the  sun 
as  we  do.  This  may  seem  to  us  a  rather  uncomfort- 
able amount,  and  we  wonder  how  the  inhabitants 
stand  it,  but  possibly  they  may  wonder  how  we 
exist  upon  a  planet  that  is  so  poorly  lighted  and  so 
cold.  Upon  our  own  planet  we  find  life  flourishing 
under  conditions  of  great  diversity.  Countless 
forms  of  life  exist  under  the  sea  and  upon  the 
surface  of  our  planet,  in  the  torrid  heat  of  the 
tropics  and  the  frigid  cold  of  the  polar  regions. 
So  life  upon  Venus  does  not  seem  so  improbable 
unless  it  shall  be  determined  eventually  that  the 
planet  always  keeps  the  same  face  turned  toward 
the  sun.  In  case  it  shall  be  found  that  Venus 

29 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


rotates  on  its  axis  once  in  about  twenty-four  hours 
we  can  hardly  escape  the  conclusion  that  the  life 
process  must  be  running  its  course  there  as  well  as 
here.  Given  all  the  essentials  for  the  development 
of  life, — air  and  water,  heat  and  light  in  abund- 
ance,— it  seems  almost  too  much  to  assume  that  such 
a  world  is  devoid  of  life. 


30 


CHAPTER  V 

HOW  OLD  IS   MOTHER  EARTH? 

THE  age  of  Mother  Earth  is  a  perplexing  ques- 
tion, not  only  for  astronomers  but  for  geol- 
ogists and  biologists  as  well. 

There  are  many  different  methods  of  attacking 
the  problem,  but  all  agree  that  the  long  series  of 
evolutionary  changes  that  have  taken  place  upon 
our  planet  could  not  have  been  brought  about  in 
any  period  of  time  less  than  tens  of  millions  of 
years.  This  applies,  moreover,  simply  to  the  dur- 
ation of  the  life  process  upon  the  earth  and  does  not 
include  the  ages  that  must  have  elapsed  from  the 
earth's  beginning  to  the  time  when  it  was  in  a  con- 
dition suitable  for  the  production  of  life. 

Geologists  and  biologists  find  their  evidence  of 
the  earth's  age  in  the  condition  of  its  crust,  in  the 
stratification  of  its  rocks  and  the  fossil  remains  of 

31 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


various  forms  of  life  formerly  existing  upon  it, 
while  for  the  astronomer  the  solution  of  the  prob- 
lem is  dependent  upon  how  long  the  sun's  light  and 
heat  have  been  supplied  at  the  present  rate.  Bar- 
ring outside  interference,  such  as  the  close  approach 
of  a  passing  sun,  the  duration  of  life  within  the 
solar  system  depends  entirely  upon  how  long  the 
sun's  supply  of  radiant  energy  can  be  maintained. 

Considering,  first,  the  evidence  furnished  by  the 
biologist  for  the  duration  of  life  upon  our  planet, 
through  examination  of  fossil  remains  in  rocks  of 
different  geological  formations,  it  has  been  found 
that  the  earliest  and  most  primitive  forms  of  life 
appeared  in  rocks  of  earliest  formation  and  a  chain 
of  increasingly  higher  and  higher  forms  of  life  ap- 
peared as  the  age  of  the  geological  formations  de- 
creased. In  rocks  of  the  latest  formation  the  fossil 
remains  of  the  highest  forms  of  life  appeared. 
Noted  biologists  have  placed  the  period  necessary 
for  this  excessively  slow  process  of  evolution  as  high 
as  two  billions  of  years,  and  though  some  feel  this 
is  too  high,  none  can  see  how  such  a  long  chain  of 
evolution  could  have  been  completed  in  less  than 
some  hundreds  of  millions  of  years. 

The  time  required  for  the  disintegration  of  the 
32 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


original  earth  material,  its  deposition  on  the  bot- 
tom of  lakes  and  oceans,  stratification  and  the  num- 
berless repetitions  of  the  process  that  are  known 
to  have  taken  place  could  not  be  less  than  one 
hundred  millions  of  years,  according  to  the  most 
conservative  estimates  of  geologists. 

Another  geological  method  of  determining  the 
age  of  the  arth  is  to  compute  the  time  required  for 
the  oceans  to  acquire  their  present  salinity.  Since 
the  rivers  carry  to  the  oceans  various  salts  in  sol- 
ution and  the  water  evaporated  from  the  oceans 
leaves  the  minerals  behind  the  salinity  of  the  oceans 
is  continually  increasing.  There  is  of  course  some 
divergence  of  opinions  as  to  how  rapidly  the  salts 
were  carried  down  to  the  oceans  in  the  earliest 
ages,  but  no  computation  makes  the  time  since  the 
oceans  first  started  to  form  less  than  sixty  millions 
of  years  and  some  estimates  run  as  high  as  one 
hundred  and  forty  millions  of  years. 

The  most  recent  geological  method  of  determin- 
ing the  earth's  age  followed  upon  the  discovery  of 
radio-active  substances.  Uranium  degenerates  by 
the  gradual  breaking  up  of  its  atoms  and  radium, 
lead  and  helium  are  evolved. 

The  relative  amounts  of  these  elements  in  some 
33 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


rocks  show  how  long  the  process  has  been  going  on 
in  them.  This  method  appears  to  give  a  greater 
age  for  the  earth  than  that  obtained  by  any  other 
method.  Those  who  have  made  a  special  study  of 
this  method  have  arrived  at  the  conclusion  that 
some  of  these  rocks  may  be  two  billion  years  old, 
and  that  their  age  at  least  must  be  measured  by 
hundreds  of  millions  of  years. 

For  the  astronomer  the  vital  question  is,  How 
long  has  the  sun  kept  up  its  present  rate  of  radia- 
tion ?  Manifestly  all  life  processes  upon  our  earth 
are  dependent  upon  the  light  and  heat  furnished 
by  our  sun.  As  soon  as  the  supply  begins  to  appre- 
ciably and  continually  diminish  life  will  begin  a 
rapid  decline.  The  ruler  of  our  solar  system  is 
radiating  heat  and  light  into  space  at  an  extrava- 
gant rate.  The  apparent  area  of  the  earth  as  seen 
from  the  sun  is  about  one-fifteenth  the  greatest 
apparent  area  of  Venus  as  seen  from  the  earth. 
From  the  sun  the  earth  would  appear  as  a  small 
point  upon  the  celestial  sphere.  And  yet  how 
much  heat  does  our  small  planet  intercept  at  a 
distance  of  ninety-three  million  miles  from  the 
sun?  It  has  been  estimated  that  the  rate  at  which 
solar  energy  is  intercepted  by  the  whole  earth 

34 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


is  230,000,000,000,000  horse-power.  The  total 
amount  of  the  sun's  radiant  energy  must  therefore 
be  inconceivably  great,  for  less  than  one  two- 
billionth  of  the  total  amount  given  forth  is  inter- 
cepted by  the  earth.  Except  for  the  amount  inter- 
cepted by  the  other  planets,  placed  at  ten  times 
the  amount  the  earth  receives,  the  boundless  supply 
of  radiant  energy  given  forth  by  our  sun  is  wasted, 
according  to  the  ideas  of  man.  It  travels  onward 
through  interstellar  space  at  the  rate  of  186,000 
miles  per  second  to  the  stars  beyond. 

The  theories  that  the  sun's  heat  is  kept  up  by 
the  combustion  of  the  materials  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed, or  that  it  is  simply  cooling  off  without  any 
replenishment  of  its  loss  of  heat,  lead  to  absurd 
results  and  receive  no  consideration  from  astrono- 
mers. In  neither  case,  under  the  most  favorable 
suppositions,  could  its  present  rate  of  radiation  be 
kept  up  for  more  than  two  or  three  thousand  years. 

A  theory  that  is  more  plausible  than  either  of 
the  preceding  considers  that  the  sun's  heat  is  main- 
tained by  the  impact  of  meteoric  matter.  Astrono- 
mers have  estimated  that  if  a  meteor  should  fall 
into  the  sun  from  the  distance  of  the  earth  its 
velocity  would  be  about  380  miles  a  second  and  the 

35 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


heat  produced  by  the  impact  would  be  about  23,000 
times  the  amount  produced  by  the  combustion  of 
an  equal  amount  of  carbon  and  oxygen.  The 
strongest  objection  to  this  theory  is  that  it  would 
require  a  much  larger  total  mass  of  meteors  than 
actually  exists.  Not  a  sufficient  amount  of  meteor- 
ic matter  could  possibly  exist  within  the  earth's 
orbit  for  this  purpose,  and  if  it  came  from  beyond 
the  earth's  orbit  the  earth  would  also  receive  suf- 
ficient amounts  to  materially  affect  its  tempera- 
ture. As  a  matter  of  fact  the  amount  of  heat  that 
the  earth  actually  does  receive  from  meteoric 
matter  is  negligible. 

The  theory  that  the  sun's  heat  is  kept  up  by  its 
own  contraction  is  the  only  one  that  at  all  fits  in 
with  the  requirements,  and  there  are  serious  ob- 
jections to  regarding  contraction  as  the  only  source 
of  supply  of  the  sun's  heat.  Nevertheless,  it  can 
be  shown,  following  the  methods  of  Helmholtz  and 
using  the  most  recent  data  for  the  sun's  rate  of 
radiation,  volume  and  mass  that  a  contraction  of 
120  feet  a  year  in  the  sun's  radius  would  produce 
as  much  heat  as  the  sun  now  radiates  annually. 
This  amount  of  contraction  is  so  small  that  ten 
thousand  years  would  elapse  before  the  resulting 

36 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


change  in  the  apparent  diameter  of  the  sun  could 
be  detected  from  the  distance  of  the  earth  with  the 
assistance  of  our  most  powerful  telescopes.  So 
whether  the  sun  actually  is  contracting  cannot  be 
determined  observationally.  A  weak  point  of  the 
contraction  theory  is  that  the  present  rate  of  radia- 
tion of  the  sun  could  not  have  been  maintained  by 
contraction  alone  for  more  than  twenty-five  mill- 
ion years  at  the  most.  This  would  imply  that  all 
the  great  series  of  changes  that  geologists  and 
biologists  have  every  reason  to  believe  extended 
over  tens  if  not  hundreds  of  millions  of  years  were 
crowded  into  a  period  of  approximately  twenty- 
five  million  years.  Most  astronomers  consider  it 
more  reasonable  to  assume  that  the  contraction  of 
the  sun  does  not  supply  all  of  its  heat,  than  to 
assume  that  all  the  evidence  of  other  scientists 
collected  from  a  variety  of  independent  sources 
is  wrong. 

With  the  discovery  of  radioactivity  it  was  be- 
lieved that  the  sun's  supply  of  heat  might  be  sus- 
tained partly  by  disintegration  of  uranium  and 
radium,  inasmuch  as  such  disintegration  is  accom- 
panied by  the  evolution  of  an  enormous  amount 
of  heat.  Although  it  is  not  known  definitely  that 

37 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

these  substances  are  found  in  the  sun,  helium,  one 
of  the  products  of  the  disintegration  of  uranium 
and  radium,  occurs  in  great  abundance  in  the  sun, 
and,  in  fact,  was  first  discovered  there.  Investi- 
gations showed  that  if  one  part  in  eight  hundred 
thousand  of  the  sun  were  radium,  heat  would  be 
produced  from  this  source  alone  as  fast  as  the  sun 
is  radiating  it  at  present>but  that  in  two  thousand 
years  hence  half  the  radium  would  be  gone  and  the 
production  of  heat  would  be  diminished  one-half, 
or  that  two  thousand  years  ago  the  amount  was 
twice  the  present  amount  and  the  production  of 
heat  was  twice  as  fast.  Since  this  is  not  in  accord 
with  the  factb  we  can  conclude  that  the  sun's  heat 
is  not  due  to  the  disintegration  of  radium  to  any 
great  extent.  Uranium  yields  results  just  as  un- 
satisfactory. 

Of  one  fact  we  are  certain,  that  an  unbroken 
chain  of  life  has  existed  upon  our  planet  for  tens 
of  millions  of  years  at  least  and  in  this  period  there 
has  been  no  great  temperature  change  and  no  signs 
of  a  steady  progressive  cooling  of  the  sun.  Glacial 
epochs  and  warmer  eras  have  alternated  with  each 
other,  but  no  sudden  [or  gradual  change  great 
enough  to  destroy  the  chain  of  life  has  ever  arisen, 

38 


CHAPTER  VI 

MYSTERIES  OF   MARS 

THE  ruddy  planet  Mars,  always  an  object  of 
special  interest  to  the  inhabitants  of  our 
planet,  Earth,  because  of  its  nearness  and  the  still 
unexplained  mystery  of  its  surface  markings,  is  best 
studied  when  it  is  in  opposition  to  the  sun. 

It  is  then  on  the  meridian  at  midnight  and  visible 
throughout  the  entire  night,  rising  in  the  east  at 
sunset  and  setting  in  the  west  at  sunrise. 

At  a  near  opposition,  which  occurs  once  in  fifteen 
or  seventeen  years,  Mars  is  a  most  striking  object 
because  of  its  fiery  red  color.  These  near  opposi- 
tions always  occur  in  August,  and  the  next  one 
will  take  place  in  1924,  when  Mars  will  be  only 
34,000,000  miles  from  the  earth.  Mars  will  also  be 
in  opposition  to  the  sun  in  April,  1920,  and  in 
June,  1922,  since  oppositions  of  Mars  are  separated 

39 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


by  intervals  of  two  years  and  two  months.  The 
next  three  oppositions  will  be  particularly  favor- 
able for  observations  of  the  surface  markings  of 
this  planet. 

Owing  to  the  rarity  of  the  atmosphere  of  Mars 
it  is  possible  to  observe  actual  surface  markings  on 
this  planet.  Mars  has  no  vast  oceans  such  as  exist 
upon  our  own  planet.  Extensive  desert  tracts  pre- 
dominate and  give  the  planet  its  characteristic 
reddish  color.  The  comparatively  few  dark  spots 
that  are  visible  lie  in  the  Southern  Hemisphere 
and  are  generally  believed  to  be  due  to  vegetation. 
The  atmosphere  of  the  planet  is  so  rare  that  the 
climate  is  one  of  extremes,  with  a  great  daily  range 
of  temperature.  The  seasons  resemble  those  found 
upon  the  earth,  for  the  two  planets  have  nearly  the 
same  inclination  to  the  ecliptic,  but  the  Martian 
year  is  nearly  two  of  our  years  in  length  and  the 
Martian  seasons  last  twice  as  long  as  our  own.  The 
planet  turns  on  its  axis  in  a  little  more  than  twenty- 
four  hours,  so  the  Martian  day  and  night  nearly 
equal  the  terrestrial  day  and  night  in  length. 

In  addition  to  the  extensive,  reddish,  desert 
patches  and  the  dark  patches  due  to  vegetation  the 
north  and  south  polar  snow  caps  are  distinctive 

40 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


features  of  the  Martian  surface,  and  their  appear- 
ance and  disappearance  with  the  seasons  is  well 
known.  It  is  only  when  we  come  to  a  consideration 
of  the  Martian  ' '  canals ' '  that  we  meet  with  a  diver- 
gence of  opinions  among  astronomers.  Though 
there  are  still  astronomers  who  have  never  seen  the 
canals  and  astronomers  who  deny  their  existence, 
there  seems  to  be  fully  as  many  who  have  observed 
them  and  are  firmly  convinced  of  their  actuality. 

The  theory  of  the  late  Prof.  Lowell  concerning 
the  much  disputed  canals  was  that  they  were  chan- 
nels of  water  bordered  by  strips  of  vegetation  and 
were  built  by  intelligent  beings  for  the  purpose 
of  directing  the  water  from  the  melting  polar  caps 
through  the  desert  tracts  to  the  opposite  hem- 
isphere. According  to  this  theory  we  see  not  the 
water  channels  but  the  strips  of  vegetation  grow- 
ing upon  the  banks.  More  recently  Prof.  W.  H. 
Pickering  has  advanced  a  theory  concerning  the 
nature  of  the  larger  and  more  important  canals 
which  he  speaks  of  as  the  "The  Theory  of  Aerial 
Deposition. " 

According  to  this  theory  the  major  canals  are 
marshes  or  natural  reservoirs  fed  by  storm  ladened 
air  currents  that  are  constantly  passing  from  re- 

41 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


gions  of  high  pressure  surrounding  the  melting 
polar  cap  to  the  equatorial  regions  of  low  pressure. 
The  rotation  of  the  planet  upon  its  axis  from  west 
to  east  and  the  resistance  of  the  atmosphere  en- 
countered by  these  air  currents  in  their  passage 
toward  the  equator  would  give  them  a  curving 
tendency.  Therefore  the  marshes  or  canals  fed  by 
these  air  currents  through  precipitation  of  their 
moisture  during  the  chill  Martian  nights  would  also 
show  the  same  curvature.  By  measuring  the  radius 
of  curvature  for  the  more  important  north  polar 
canals  Prof.  Pickering  arrived  at  a  determination 
of  the  velocity  with  which  the  moisture  ladened 
air  currents  blow  and  he  found  that  the  highest  ve- 
locity of  the  wind  over  any  of  the  southward  lead- 
ing canals  was  about  230  miles  per  hour.  This  was 
the  velocity  found  for  the  northern  portions  of  one 
of  the  longest  canals  shortly  after  the  storm  had 
started  from  the  polar  regions. 

At  the  southern  end  of  its  course  the  velocity  was 
reduced  to  about  nineteen  miles  per  hour. 

Prof.  Pickering  concluded  from  an  extensive 
study  of  the  curvatures  of  various  canals  that  it  is 
reasonable  to  assume  that  the  wind  in  the  northern 
hemisphere  of  Mars  does  at  time  reach  a  velocity  of 

42 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


230  miles  per  hour  and  that  the  maximum  theo- 
retical velocity  cannot  be  much  less  than  324  miles 
per  hour  nor  the  corresponding  pressure  of  the 
atmosphere  less  than  one-quarter  of  the  pressure 
of  the  terrestrial  atmosphere.  This  conclusion  is 
borne  out,  he  believes,  by  other  considerations  such 
as  the  small  force  of  gravity  on  Mars,  the  trans- 
parency of  its  atmosphere  and  the  lack  of  perma- 
nent oceans.  Upon  this  assumption  the  boiling 
point  of  water  upon  Mars  comes  out  as  150  degrees 
F.  approximately. 

As  the  north  polar  cap  melts  and  diminishes  in 
size,  the  amount  of  moisture  carried  southward 
by  the  air  currents  should  also  diminish,  and  there- 
fore the  atmospheric  pressure  and  consequently  the 
velocity  of  the  wind.  As  a  result  the  curvature  of 
the  canals  should  change  slightly  and  they  should 
shift  with  the  season.  The  greater  the  velocity  of 
the  wind  the  less  it  will  be  deflected  in  its  south- 
ward journey.  A  slight  shifting  of  the  polar  canals 
has  been  noted  at  previous  opposition  of  Mars,  and 
it  is  particularly  desired  to  investigate  this  ques- 
tion of  the  shifting  of  the  canals  at  favorable  oppo- 
sitions. 

According  to  the  theory  of  Prof.  Pickering  the 
43 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


major  Martian  canals,  those  leading  from  the  north 
polar  cap  southward  to  the  torrid  zone,  are  not 
necessarily  the  work  of  intelligent  beings,  but  they 
do  serve  the  purpose  of  furnishing  the  northern 
hemisphere  with  a  supply  of  water  in  the  form  of 
natural  marshes  or  reservoirs  during  the  long 
northern  summer  until  the  south  polar  cap  starts  to 
melt  at  the  coming  of  the  autumnal  equinox.  Since 
Mars  has  no  great  oceans  these  marshy  tracts  are 
most  essential  for  the  maintenance  of  vegetable  and 
possibly  animal  life  upon  the  planet. 

In  addition  to  these  larger  and  more  important 
canals  there  are  many  faint,  narrow  canals  of  a 
secondary  type.  About  500  canals  of  the  faint  type 
have  been  located  and  named  at  the  Lowell  Ob- 
servatory. They  are  characterized  by  great  uni- 
formity and  straightness  and  by  the  fact  that 
they  appear  late  in  the  season  and  in  great  num- 
bers. 

Prof.  Pickering,  who  is  one  of  the  leading  ob- 
servers of  Mars,  considers  that  the  question  of  their 
origin  is  still  unsettled.  It  is  unknown  whether 
they  are  artificial  or  an  illusion,  or  mark  the  path 
of  occasional  local  storms.  As  to  the  visibility  of 
the  canals  of  Mars,  this  depends,  according  to  Prof. 

44 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Pickering,  largely  upon  the  conditions  of  our  own 
atmosphere.  Under  excellent  "  seeing "  conditions, 
it  is  possible,  he  believes,  to  see  all  of  the  more 
prominent  canals  with  a  four-inch  telescope. 


45 


CHAPTER  VII 

THE  ASTEROIDS 

IN  the  vast  expanse  of  space  that  separates  the 
orbit  of  the  outermost  member  of  the  terrestrial 
group  of  planets,  Mars,  from  the  nearest  and  larg- 
est of  the  major  planets,  Jupiter,  is  found  that 
numerous  host  of  tiny  bodies  known  as  the  planet- 
oids or  asteroids. 

Lawful  members  of  the  solar  system  they  must 
be  considered,  although  they  are  distinguished  from 
the  eight  large  planets  not  only  by  their  extreme 
minuteness,  which  renders  the  largest  of  them  in- 
visible without  telescopic  aid,  but  also  by  a  greater 
range  in  the  shape  of  their  orbits  and  in  the  in- 
clination of  these  orbits  to  the  earth's  path  around 
the  sun.  The  paths  of  the  eight  principal  planets 
can  hardly  be  distinguished  from  perfect  circles 
and  they  lie  very  nearly  in  the  same  plane.  The 

46 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


asteroids  move  in  paths,  that  vary  from  almost  per- 
fect circles  to  highly  elongated  ellipses  and  these 
paths  are  sometimes  inclined  at  an  angle  of  nearly 
35  degrees  to  the  planetary  orbits,  though  the 
average  is  much  less.  It  is  truly  remarkable,  how- 
ever, that  all  of  the  asteroids  so  far  discovered, 
more  than  eight  hundred  in  number,  move  in  the 
same  direction  around  the  sun  as  do  the  eight  chief 
members  of  the  solar  system,  from  west  to  east. 
This  cannot  be  the  result  of  chance  but  points  to  a 
common  origin  with  the  other  members  of  the 
system.  According  to  the  planetesimal  theory  of 
the  origin  of  our  solar  system  the  asteroids  may  be 
regarded  as  particles  of  the  original  nebula  that  es- 
caped fusion  into  one  greater  planetary  mass,  due 
either  to  an  absence  of  a  planetary  nucleus  in  their 
immediate  neighborhood  or  to  the  nearness  of  the 
huge  Jovian  mass  under  whose  disruptive  influences 
they  have  been  kept  apart.  So  interwoven  are  the 
paths  of  the  planetoids  that  if  they  were  made  of 
wire  not  one  could  be  lifted  without  drawing  the 
others  with  it.  That  they  have  so  far  escaped  col- 
lisions is  due  to  the  fact  that  their  paths  lie  in 
planes  inclined  at  different  angles.  The  noted  little 
asteroid  Eros  has  escaped  collision  with  the  planet 

47 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Mars  only  because  of  the  inclination  of  its  orbit. 
At  the  time  of  the  discovery  of  the  first  asteroid, 
January  1,  1801,  the  first  day  of  the  nineteenth 
century,  astronomers  were  making  preparations  to 
search  for  a  planet  in  the  enormous  gap  existing 
between  the  orbits  of  Mars  and  Jupiter.  Accord- 
ing to  Bode's  law,  to  which  is  also  due,  indirectly, 
the  discovery  of  the  planet  Neptune,  a  planet  was 
to  be  looked  for  at  about  2.8  times  the  earth's  dis- 
tance from  the  sun.  This  peculiar  law,  which  has 
no  scientific  foundation,  gives  a  rough  approxima- 
tion to  the  relative  distances  of  the  first  seven 
planets  from  the  sun,  as  well  as  the  average  posi- 
tion of  the  asteroids.  According  to  this  relation- 
ship noted  by  Bode,  if  the  number  4  is  added  to 
each  number  in  the  series  0,  3,  6,  12,  24,  48,  96,  the 
resulting  series,  4,  7,  10,  16,  28,  52,  100,  repre- 
resents  roughly  the  relative  distances  of  the  planets 
Mercury,  Venus,  Earth,  Mars,  Jupiter  and  Saturn 
from  the  sun,  with  no  planet  to  correspond 
to  the  number  28.  It  was  this  gap  in  the  distances 
that  led  the  astronomers  of  that  day  to  suspect  the 
existence  of  another  planet  at  2.8  times  the  earth's 
distance  from  the  sun.  The  first  asteroid  discov- 
ered was  at  approximately  2.8  times  the  earth's 

48 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


distance  from  the  sun.  It  was  found  later  that  the 
planet  Uranus,  undiscovered  at  the  time  Bode's 
law  was  first  advanced,  continued  the  series,  since 
its  distance  from  the  sun  corresponds  to  the  num- 
ber 196.  The  law  fails,  however,  for  Neptune.  The 
planetoids  are  scattered  throughout  the  entire 
space  between  the  orbits  of  Mars  and  Jupiter.  A 
few  of  them  even  come  within  the  orbit  of  Mars 
and  a  few  others  are  found  beyond  the  orbit  of 
Jupiter,  but  they  occur  in  greatest  numbers  at  the 
distance  corresponding  to  the  number  28  in  Bode's 
series,  or  2.8  times  the  distance  from  the  earth  to 
the  sun. 

The  first  asteroid  was  discovered  by  Piazzi  at 
Palermo  and  was,  by  his  wish,  named  Ceres,  for  the 
tutelary  goddess  of  Sicily.  A  year  later  the  astro- 
nomical world  was  surprised  by  the  discovery  of  a 
second  small  planet  at  almost  the  same  distance  as 
the  first.  This  was  named  Pallas.  In  1804  a  third, 
Juno,  was  discovered;  in  1807  a  fourth,  Vesta. 
These  four  are  the  largest  of  the  asteroids  and  their 
diameters  are  respectively  485,  304,  118  and  243 
miles,  as  determined  by  Barnard  with  the  36-inch 
telescope  of  the  Lick  Observatory.  Most  of  the 
asteroids  are  much  smaller.  Many  do  not  exceed 

49 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


five  or  ten  miles  in  diameter.  After  the  discovery 
of  Vesta  in  1807  no  other  asteroid  was  discovered 
until  1845,  when  Hencke's  long  search  of  fifteen 
years  was  rewarded  by  the  discovery  of  Astrsea.  In 
1847  three  more  were  discovered  and  from  that 
time  to  the  present,  no  year  has  passed  without  the 
discovery  of  at  least  one  asteroid.  Since  1891, 
when  photography  was  first  used  for  the  purpose, 
planetoids  have  been  discovered  in  great  numbers. 
The  telescope  with  photographic  plate  exposed  in 
place  of  an  observer  is  made  to  follow  the  stars 
for  several  hours.  In  this  time  the  planetoid  will 
move  an  appreciable  distance.  When  the  plate  is 
developed  the  star  images  appear  as  clearly  defined 
dots,  but  the  asteroid  has  left  a  telltale  trail  upon 
the  plate  about  a  twentieth  of  an  inch  in  length. 
Following  the  discovery  a  provisional  designation 
is  given  to  the  object  until  it  can  be  determined 
definitely  whether  it  is  a  new  asteroid  or  simply 
one  rediscovered,  or  possibly  a  new  comet.  Wolf's 
comet,  discovered  photographically  in  this  way,  was 
at  first  mistaken  for  an  asteroid.  New  plates  must 
be  exposed  or  old  plates  reexamined  to  get  addi- 
tional positions  of  the  object  from  which  its  orbit 
is  computed.  Peculiarities  of  motion  soon  show 

50 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


whether  it  is  asteroid  or  comet  or  possibly  a  faint 
satellite  of  Jupiter  or  Saturn. 

In  1898,  when  astronomers  were  growing  weary 
of  their  large  and  ever  increasing  family  of  aster- 
oids, already  numbered  by  hundreds,  and  when  it 
was  becoming  a  perplexing  question  as  to  how  they 
were  to  be  named  and  how  time  could  be  spared 
from  more  urgent  work  to  compute  their  trouble- 
some orbits,  asteroid  No.  433,  known  as  Eros,  was 
discovered.  This  tiny  asteroid,  less  than  twenty 
miles  in  diameter,  has  more  than  repaid  all  the 
work  and  trouble  occasioned  by  the  other  members 
of  the  family  and  has  furnished  astronomers  with 
probably  the  best  method  they  possess  for  deter- 
mining the  solar  parallax  and  the  dimensions  of 
the  solar  system  in  miles  and  the  distances  of  the 
stars  and  the  dimensions  of  our  whole  stellar  sys- 
tem as  well.  It  is  possible  to  determine  the  rela- 
tive distances  of  the  members  of  the  solar  system 
without  knowing  the  actual  distance  between  any 
two  of  them,  but  we  can  form  no  idea  of  the  extent 
of  the  solar  system  in  miles  and  of  the  universe  in 
light  years  until  we  actually  measure  the  distance 
between  two  of  the  bodies.  Eros  comes  nearer  to 
the  earth  than  any  other  known  celestial  body  with 

51 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  exception  of  the  moon.  At  nearest  approach 
it  is  only  13,500,000  miles  away,  and  its  nearness 
and  clear,  staiiike  image  make  it  an  ideal  object 
for  the  determination  of  the  important  constant  of 
the  solar  parallax  and  the  distance  from  the  earth 
to  the  sun,  the  astronomical  unit  of  distance.  Eros 
was  in  a  particularly  favorable  position  for  obser- 
vation in  the  winter  of  1900-1901,  and  a  series  of 
valuable  observations  were  obtained.  Thirty  years 
must  pass  before  it  will  be  as  favorably  located. 
Eros  aroused  still  further  interest  in  1901  when 
it  was  observed  to  vary  rapidly  in  light.  During 
February  and  March  of  that  year  its  period  of 
light  variations  was  2  hours  38  minutes.  Its  light 
at  minimum  was  less  than  one-third  that  of  maxi- 
mum. By  May  of  the  same  year  this  peculiar 
variability  had  ceased.  It  was  suggested  that  it 
might  be  explained  by  assuming  that  the  planetoid 
consisted  of  two  bodies  revolving  close  together  so 
that  one  body  would  appear  to  eclipse  the  other  in 
certain  positions  of  the  orbit.  According  to  an- 
other view  the  asteroid  has  a  surface  that  is  very 
rugged  and  uneven  and  reflects  light  unequally. 
In  other  words,  like  most  of  the  asteroids,  it  may 
be  considered  to  be  simply  a  huge  rock. 

52 


CHAPTER  VIII 

THE  PLANETS  JUPITER  AND  SATURN  COMPARED 

WHEN  the  two  largest  planets  in  the  sun's 
family,  Jupiter  and  Saturn,  appear  in  the 
heavens  at  the  same  time,  as  frequently  happens, 
they  can  be  readily  distinguished  from  each  other 
since  Jupiter  far  surpasses  Saturn  in  brightness, 
not  only  because  it  is  much  larger,  but  also  because 
it  is  much  nearer  to  the  earth.  On  the  date  of  its 
opposition  to  the  sun,  the  giant  planet  Jupiter  is 
approximately  400,000,000  miles  away,  while  Sat- 
urn is  nearly  twice  as  far  from  the  earth. 

The  two  planets  closely  rival  each  other  in  pop- 
ular interest.  Saturn's  vast  system  of  three  con- 
centric rings,  more  than  170,000  miles  in  outer 
diameter,  composed  of  swarms  of  minute  moonlets 
of  meteoric  dimensions  revolving  each  independ- 
ently around  the  planet,  makes  it  absolutely  unique 

53 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


in  the  solar  system.  Jupiter,  on  the  other  hand, 
on  account  of  his  satellites  and  belts,  is  by  far 
the  most  interesting  to  observe  of  all  the  planets, 
as  well  as  the  largest  and  most  imposing,  and  the 
one  most  subject  to  constant  change  and  variety  of 
color  and  markings.  Though  Saturn  is  also,  beyond 
doubt,  the  scene  of  wildest  tumult,  its  surface 
changes  are  rendered  more  blurred  and  indistinct 
by  an  additional  400,000,000  miles  of  intervening 
space. 

There  is  much  similarity  in  the  surface  markings 
of  the  two  planets,  which  are,  in  reality,  phenom- 
ena of  the  dense  enveloping  gaseous  strata  of  their 
atmospheres.  Belts  or  bands  of  gaseous  vapors  are 
always  to  be  seen  in  the  atmospheres  of  both  plan- 
ets, though  the  belts  of  Saturn  are  far  more  indis- 
tinct than  those  of  Jupiter.  They  vary  contin- 
ually in  shade,  numbers  and  position,  but  always 
lie  in  a  direction  parallel  to  the  planet's  Equator, 
being  drawn  into  this  position  by  the  extremely 
rapid  peripheral  motion  of  the  outer  gaseous  en- 
velopes of  these  planets. 

Both  Jupiter  and  Saturn  rotate  on  their  axes  in 
approximately  ten  hours,  less  than  half  the  period 
that  the  earth  requires  to  turn  on  its  axis,  though 

54 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


its  diameter  is  only  about  one-tenth  that  of  the 
outer  planets. 

It  is  an  interesting  and  significant  fact  that  the 
general  color  of  the  planet  Jupiter  fluctuates  with 
the  sun  spot  period,  appearing  palest  when  spots 
are  most  plentiful  on  the  sun  and  more  reddish  as 
the  frequency  of  sun  spots  decreases.  This  is  due 
to  the  fact  that  the  solar  activity  that  produces 
sun  spots  also  produces  certain  atmospheric  effects 
upon  the  planets.  It  is  known  that  high  clouds, 
such  as  the  cirrus  clouds  in  the  earth's  atmosphere, 
form  more  readily  under  the  solar  influences  that 
produce  sun  spots  and  similarly  it  is  believed 
atmospheric  changes  are  produced  in  the  dense 
gaseous  envelope  of  the  giant  planet. 

Marked  changes  are  also  noted  at  times  in  the 
color  of  the  ringed  planet.  According  to  observa- 
tions made  at  the  Lowell  Observatory  at  the  op- 
position of  1916  the  planet  was  at  that  time  of  a 
pinkish  brown  color  and  conspicuously  darker  than 
its  rings. 

The  great  distance  of  Saturn  makes  it  very 
difficult  to  observe  the  finer  details  of  its  surface 
changes.  It  is  for  the  same  reason  that  Saturn's 
interesting  satellite  family  of  nine  members, 

55 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


exactly  equal  in  number  to  that  of  Jupiter  and 
fully  as  impressive  in  the  actual  size  of  its  various 
members,  arouses  less  interest  than  the  family  of 
the  giant  planet. 

Titan,  the  largest  of  Saturn's  satellites,  a  world 
in  itself,  fully  three  thousand  miles  in  diameter, 
can  be  seen  readily  enough  with  the  smallest  tele- 
scopes as  an  eighth  magnitude  star.  Rhea,  Dione 
and  Tethys,  whose  diameters  are  between  twelve 
hundred  and  fifteen  hundrd  miles,  may  also  be 
seen  fairly  well  with  a  four-inch  telescope,  which 
will  also  show  the  rings  beautifully. 

Japetus,  the  most  distant  of  the  satellites  of 
Saturn,  with  the  exception  of  tiny  Phoebe  retro- 
grading at  a  distance  of  eight  million  miles,  is 
almost  the  twin  of  our  own  moon  in  size.  It  lies 
at  a  distance  of  two  and  a  quarter  million  miles 
from  Saturn  and  requires  seventy-nine  days  to 
make  one  revolution  around  the  planet.  It  is  of 
special  interest  to  astronomers,  owing  to  the  fact 
that  its  light  is  conspicuously  variable.  When  on 
the  western  side  of  Saturn  it  is  always  brighter 
than  when  it  is  on  the  eastern  side,  and  this  is 
believed  to  be  due  to  the  fact  that  it  always  keeps 
the  same  face  turned  toward  Saturn  just  as  our 

56 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


own  moon  always  keeps  the  same  face  turned 
toward  the  earth.  The  variability  of  light  prob- 
ably arises  from  a  difference  in  the  reflecting  power 
of  the  two  sides,  different  sides  of  the  satellite's 
surface  being  turned  toward  the  earth  in  the  two 
positions. 

Observations  made  of  the  first  two  satellites, 
Mimas  and  Enceladus,  by  E.  C.  Slipher  of  the 
Lowell  Observatory  seem  to  show  that  these  satel- 
lites also  keep  the  same  side  turned  toward  the 
planet.  They  are  both  small  bodies  between  500 
and  1,000  miles  in  diameter  that  skirt  rapidly 
around  the  outer  edge  of  the  ring  system  distant 
from  its  outer  edge  30,000  and  70,000  miles  re- 
spectively. 

The  possessor  of  a  small  telescope  will  find  the 
four  largest  satellites  of  Jupiter  easier  and  more 
interesting  objects  to  observe  than  Saturn's  satel- 
lites. A  few  extremely  sharp-eyed  persons  have 
glimpsed  these  four  satellites  with  the  naked 
eye,  and  the  least  optical  aid  will  reveal  them. 
Their  journey  ings  around  the  giant  planet  and 
all  the  varied  phenomena  of  the  eclipses,  occul- 
tations,  shadows  and  transits  can  be  observed  with 
interest  and  profit  by  means  of  a  three-inch  tele- 

57 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


scope.  The  five  fainter  satellites  are  beyond  the 
reach  of  all  but  the  most  powerful  telescopes,  as 
are  also  the  four  smallest  satellites  of  Saturn. 

Jupiter  and  Saturn  resemble  each  other  not  only 
in  the  size  of  their  satellite  families  and  the  nature 
of  their  surface  markings  but  also  in  the  fact  that 
they  are  both  composed  almost,  if  not  entirely,  of 
matter  in  a  gaseous  state.  The  extremely  low 
density  of  the  two  planets,  less  than  that  of  the 
sun  in  both  cases,  and  in  the  case  of  Saturn  only 
sixty-three-hundredths  that  of  water,  the  lowest  for 
any  planet  in  the  solar  system,  contrasts  sharply 
with  the  great  density  of  the  terrestrial  planets. 
Our  own  planet  Earth,  with  its  surface  crust  and 
rigid  interior,  possesses  a  density  five  and  one-half 
times  that  of  water. 

The  two  planets,  Jupiter  and  Saturn,  are  there- 
fore as  different  in  physical  constitution  from  our 
own  world  as  it  is  possible  for  one  to  imagine. 
They  possess  no  stable  surface  crust,  though  liquid 
and  solid  particles  of  matter  may  occur  locally  or 
be  suspended  in  dense  gaseous  vapors.  All  is  a 
whirling,  seething,  tumultuous  mass,  characterized 
no  doubt  by  great  heat,  in  the  deeper  strata  at 
least,  where  the  pressure  of  overlying  gases  must 

58 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


be  tremendous.  A  small  solid  or  liquid  core  may 
exist  in  each  planet,  but  the  general  belief  is  that 
both  planets  are  almost  entirely  gaseous.  Though 
the  two  planets  may  emit  a  certain  amount  of  heat 
to  their  satellites,  the  complete  disappearance  of 
the  satellites  of  Jupiter  when  they  pass  into  his 
shadow  shows  that  they  receive  no  appreciable 
light  from  the  huge  planet  other  than  reflected 
sunlight. 

A  marked  difference  between  these  two  planets 
that  have  so  many  characteristics  in  common  is 
found  in  the  positions  of  their  axes  of  rotation  with 
respect  to  their  paths  around  the  sun.  The  equator 
of  Jupiter  is  inclined  only  three  degrees  to  its  orbit. 
As  a  result  it  has  no  change  of  seasons.  Saturn's 
equator,  on  the  other  hand,  as  well  as  its  ring 
system,  which  lies  nearly  in  the  same  plane,  is  tip- 
ped twenty-seven  degres  to  the  plane  of  its  orbit. 
This  inclination  of  equator  to  orbit  is  the  greatest 
for  any  planet  in  the  solar  system,  exceeding  that 
of  the  Earth  by  several  degrees.  As  a  result  season- 
al changes  on  Saturn  would  be  more  pronounced 
than  they  are  on  the  Earth  were  the  effect  not  modi- 
fied to  a  great  extent  by  the  very  great  distance  of 
Saturn  from  the  sun. 

59 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


In  these  two  largest  members  of  the  sun's  family 
we  see  much  that  is  similar  and  much  that  is  dis- 
tinctive. No  two  planets  of  the  solar  system  are 
modeled  exactly  along  the  same  lines.  This  indi- 
viduality among  the  various  members  of  the  same 
planet  family  is  but  a  reflection  of  the  infinite 
variety  that  characterizes  all  the  wonderful  form- 
ations far  beyond  that  form  a  part  of  the  same  uni- 
verse to  which  our  sun  and  his  family  belongs. 


60 


CHAPTER  IX 

SATURN   THE   RINGED  PLANET 

OF  all  the  brighter  planets  Saturn  is  the  least 
interesting  to  observe  with  the  naked  eye  and 
one  of  the  most  interesting  viewed  through  the  tele- 
scope. 

It  shines  with  a  dull  leaden  light,  very  different 
from  the  fiery  red  of  Mars,  the  sparkling  beauty 
of  Venus,  or  the  splendor  of  Jupiter. 

Saturn  is  usually  spoken  of  as  the  ringed  planet 
and  is  unique  in  the  solar  system  for  several  rea- 
sons. It  is  the  only  planet  that  is  lighter  than 
water,  the  only  one  that  would  float  if  thrown 
into  a  body  of  water  large  enough  to  contain  it, 
and  it  is  surrounded  by  a  system  of  rings  of  mar- 
velous appearance. 

There  are  three  of  these  thin,  flat,  concentric 
rings,  two  bright  ones  and  a  third  called  the  dusky 

61 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

or  crepe  ring.  The  outer  ring,  which  is  called 
"A,"  has  an  exterior  diameter  of  173,000  miles 
and  a  width  of  11,000  miles.  It  is  separated  from 
"B,"  which  is  much  brighter,  by  a  division  of 
2,200  miles  of  uniform  width  all  around  known  as 
Cassini  's  Division.  The  third  or  dusky  ring,  ' '  C, " 
was  discovered  in  this  country  in  1850  and  is  com- 
paratively hard  to  see.  Its  width  is  equal  to  that 
of  the  outer  ring  and  its  inner  edge  is  only  6,000 
miles  from  the  surface  of  the  planet.  The  ring*  *  B  " 
is  about  18,000  miles  wide.  The  thickness  of  the 
ring  system  is  less  than  100  miles  and  its  weight 
is  next  to  nothing.  "Immaterial  light "  the  rings 
have  been  called  by  the  astronomer  Struve.  They 
are  of  perfect  symmetry  and  when  seen  in  a 
telescope  fill  the  observer  with  admiration  and 
awe. 

As  to  composition,  they  are  now  known  to  be 
swarms  of  tiny  satellites  or  moons,  nothing  more 
than  meteors  in  size,  and  they  are  in  constant 
revolution  around  Saturn.  Every  15  or  17  years 
the  rings  entirely  disappear  from  view  for  a 
short  time  even  in  the  most  powerful  telescopes. 
This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  once  every  15  or  17 
years  the  earth  is  exactly  in  the  plane  of  the  rings 

62 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


and  the  edge  of  the  rings  is  directly  in  the  line  of 
sight.  This  causes  the  entire  disappearance  of 
the  rings  from  our  point  of  view.  The  next  dis- 
appearance wiil  occur  in  1922. 

For  the  remaining  time  the  earth  is  either  above 
or  below  the  plane  of  the  rings  and  we  either 
look  down  upon  them  from  above  or  up  from  be- 
neath, as  the  case  may  be,  and  so  see  them  at  vary- 
ing widths. 

In  addition  to  the  rings  Saturn  has  nine  satel- 
lites, and  the  outermost  is  at  a  distance  of  about 
8,000,000  miles  from  Saturn.  So  extensive  is  this 
vast  system,  truly  a  solar  system  in  miniature !  The 
names  of  the  satellites  in  order  of  distance  outward 
from  Saturn  are  Mimas,  Enceladus,  Tethys,  Dione, 
Rhea,  Titan,  Hyperion,  Japetus  and  Phoebe.  By 
far  the  largest  of  these  is  Titan,  which  is  of  the 
same  size  as  the  planet  Mercury. 

The  most  remarkable  of  the  satellites  is  Phoebe, 
because,  while  all  the  other  satellites  of  Saturn 
follow  the  usual  direction  of  revolution  in  the  solar 
system  and  revolve  from  west  to  east  around  their 
primary,  Phoebe  revolves  from  east  to  west  or 
retrogrades,  as  it  is  called. 

The  periods  of  revolution  of  the  satellites  around 
63 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


their  primary  show  great  diversity,  ranging  from 
22y2  hours  for  Mimas,  which  skirts  along  the  outer 
ring,  to  16  months  for  Phoebe,  the  most  distant 
of  all.  In  shape  Saturn  is  the  most  flattened  at 
the  poles  of  any  of  the  planets.  It  is  decidedly 
oval  in  appearance.  This  is  very  noticeable  at  the 
time  of  disappearance  of  the  rings,  when  we  get  an 
unobstructed  view  of  Saturn's  globe.  Saturn  also 
has  belts,  similar  to  those  of  Jupiter,  but  fainter  in 
color  and  more  indistinct. 

Both  of  these  planets  are  apparently  in  a  much 
earlier  stage  of  development  than  the  earth.  Saturn 
is  a  world  in  a  state  of  chaos,  and  the  dense  can- 
opy of  clouds,  with  which  it  is  surrounded,  points  to 
a  surface  of  intense  heat,  for  Saturn  is  too  far  from 
the  sun  to  have  its  clouds  raised  by  solar  heat. 
They  must  be  the  product  of  its  own  seething  heat. 
This  is  a  world  in  the  making  and  the  dense 
clouds  with  which  it  is  surrounded  will  probably 
settle  down  upon  its  surface  as  oceans  in  ages 
to  come. 

It  is  hard  for  us  to  realize  as  we  look  upon  this 
planet  of  leaden  hue,  not  so  much  brighter  than  a 
first  magnitude  star,  so  great  is  its  distance  from 
us,  that  in  size  our  earth  compares  with  it  as  a 

64 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


pea  with  an  orange,  and  that,  as  the  celebrated 
French  astronomer  Flammarion  has  said,  the  earth 
might  roll  upon  the  ring  system  like  a  ball  upon 
a  road. 


CHAPTER  X 

PLAIN  FACTS  ABOUT  THE  MOON 

A  LL  the  planets  in  the  solar  system,  with  the 
•**•  exception  of  Mercury  and  Venus,  are  at- 
tended by  satellites.  Saturn  has  nine,  in  addition 
to  his  ring  system,  composed  of  numberless  tiny 
moonlets. 

Jupiter  also  has  nine  moons,  Uranus  four,  Mars 
two  and  Neptune  one,  while  our  own  planet,  Earth, 
has  a  satellite  which  is  in  one  respect  unique  in  the 
solar  system.  The  ratio  of  its  size  to  that  of  its 
primary  far  exceeds  that  of  any  other  satellite. 
Its  dimensions  are  quite  comparable  with  those  of 
the  earth.  Its  diameter  is  about  2,160  miles.  The 
earth's  diameter  is  about  7,900  miles. 

Fifty  moons  would  equal  the  earth  in  volume, 
although  it  would  take  eighty-one  times  the  mass 
of  the  moon  to  equal  the  mass  of  our  planet,  as 

ftt 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  lunar  density  is  only  six-tenths  that  of  the 
earth.  The  entire  surface  of  the  moon  about  equals 
North  and  South  America  in  area,  though  about 
forty  per  cent,  of  its  surface  we  can  never  see,  since 
our  satellite  always  turns  the  same  face  toward  us. 

Titan,  the  largest  satellite  of  Saturn,  has  a 
diameter  of  3,500  miles,  and  is  larger  than  the 
planet  Mercury,  but  it  would  take  4,600  Titans  to 
equal  Saturn  in  mass.  Ganymede,  the  largest 
satellite  of  Jupiter,  is  almost  exactly  of  the  same 
size  as  Titan,  but  its  mass  must  be  increased  11,000 
times  to  equal  that  of  Jupiter. 

Neptune's  moon  about  equals  our  own  in  size,  but 
is  a  very  tiny  object  compared  with  its  primary, 
which  has  a  diameter  of  35,000  miles.  The  largest 
of  the  satellites  of  Uranus  is  only  1,000  miles  in 
diameter  and  the  two  tiny  moons  of  Mars  average 
about  ten  miles  in  diameter. 

Our  own  satellite  is  a  most  beautiful  and  inter- 
esting telescopic  object  and  even  when  viewed  with 
an  opera  glass,  its  apparent  distance  is  reduced 
one-half.  With  moderate  sized  instruments  we 
may  view  it  at  an  apparent  distance  of  about  1,000 
miles.  The  greatest  telescopes  make  it  appear  only 
sixty  miles  away,  but  we  must  remember  such  a 

67 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


view  is  by  no  means  clear  and  distinct,  for  atmos- 
pheric imperfections  are  magnified  as  well. 

Even  with,  moderate  sized  instruments,  how- 
ever, any  lunar  object  a  mile  or  so  in  diameter 
is  readily  discernible,  and  with  large  instruments 
and  a  trained  eye  and  good  atmospheric  condi- 
tions, any  object  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  diameter 
could  be  detected.  If  large  cities  existed  upon  the 
moon  very  moderate  instruments  would  show  them. 

The  question  of  life  upon  the  moon  is  readily 
disposed  of,  for  we  know  that  there  is  neither  air 
nor  water  there.  The  moon's  period  of  rotation 
upon  its  axis  is  equal  to  its  period  of  revolution 
around  the  earth.  In  other  words,  it  always  turns 
the  same  face  toward  the  earth  and  its  day  is  two 
weeks  long.  Fourteen  days  of  light  are  followed 
by  fourteen  days  of  darkness. 

During  the  lunar  day  the  barren  surface  of  the 
moon  is  exposed  to  the  intensity  of  the  solar  rays, 
unmitigated  by  any  protecting  atmosphere.  The 
temperature  must  rise  during  this  scorching  period 
as  high  as  the  boiling  point,  to  fall  during  the  long, 
dark  night  that  follows  nearly  to  the  absolute  zero 
of  interplanetary  space. 

Because  of  the  absence  of  an  atmosphere  upon 
68 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  moon  there  is  no  diffusion  of  light.  Shadows 
are  inky  black  and  the  stars  above  shine  by  day 
and  by  night,  in  an  inky  sky.  Stars  that  we  need 
a  field  glass  to  see  upon  the  earth  would  be  readily 
seen  with  the  naked  eye  upon  the  moon.  The 
Milky  Way,  so  dimly  seen  by  us,  is  a  gorgeous 
spectacle  in  the  lunar  heavens.  The  solar  corona 
and  prominences  are  always  visible,  as  is  also  the 
zodiacal  light.  The  planet  Mercury,  so  elusive  to 
our  eyes,  is  easily  observed  from  the  moon.  Both 
stars  and  planets  shine  far  more  brilliantly  there 
against  a  background  that  is  always  black. 

As  regards  the  lunar  landscape,  even  the  small- 
est telescope  shows  us  many  features  not  visible  to 
the  naked  eye.  Extensive  dark  and  light  regions 
give  our  satellite  its  spotted  appearance.  The  light 
portions  are  always  rough  and  the  dark  ones  com- 
paratively smooth.  The  latter  have  been  incor- 
rectly termed  maria  or  seas  ever  since  the  time  of 
Galileo,  who  believed  these  grayish  patches  were 
really  vast  expanses  of  water.  They  are  designated 
by  such  fanciful  names  as  Sea  of  Clouds.  Sea  of 
Serenity,  Lake  of  Dreams,  etc. 

The  most  distinctive  lunar  features  are  the 
craters,  numbered  by  the  thousands,  and  possibly  in- 

69 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


correctly  named,  for  we  naturally  think  of  a  crater 
as  formed  by  volcanic  action  and  it  is  by  no 
means  certain  that  the  craters  of  the  moon  are 
of  volcanic  origin,  though  this  belief  is  still  held 
by  some  astronomers. 

The  larger  craters,  which  are  often  from  fifty 
to  one  hundred  miles  in  diameter,  are  usually  com- 
paratively shallow,  about  three  miles  or  less  in 
depth.  Frequently  a  single  mountain  a  mile  or  so 
in  height  rises  from  the  centre  of  the  crater,  or 
ringed  plain,  as  it  is  often  called.  It  has  been 
estimated  that  there  must  be  fully  100,000  craters, 
ringed  plains  and  craterlets  upon  the  surface  of 
our  satellite.  It  is  these  formations  that  make  its 
face  appear  so  pockmarked  and  scarred. 

A  conspicuous  crater,  visible  even  to  the  naked 
eye,  is  Tycho,  often  called  "the  metropolitan  crater 
of  the  moon."  It  lies  near  the  south  pole  of  the 
moon,  has  a  diameter  of  over  fifty  miles  and  is 
nearly  17,000  feet  deep.  It  has  a  central  hill  6.000 
feet  high  and  is  a  typical  lunar  crater. 

The  moon  is  also  remarkable  for  its  systems  of 
rays  or  streaks  radiating  from  prominent  craters. 
These  extend  for  vast  distances,  nearly  2,000  miles 
in  one  instance.  Those  surrounding  Tycho  emanate 

70 


THE    MOON — AGE,    %%   DAYS 

(Photographed  by  Ritchey  at  the  Yerkes  Observatory) 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


from  it  like  brilliant  lines  of  longitude.  They 
appear  to  be  neither  elevated  nor  depressed,  but 
run  in  remarkably  straight  lines  over  hill  and  plain 
interrupted  by  no  feature  of  the  lunar  landscape. 

These  rays  still  remain  one  of  the  riddles  of  the 
moon,  though,  according  to  those  who  believe  in 
the  meteoric  origin  of  the  moon  they  were  caused 
by  the  splashing  of  some  light  colored  material 
when  an  unusually  large  meteor  struck  the  lunar 
surface.  Supporters  of  this  belief  point  also  to 
the  fact  that  large  deposits  of  sulphur  upon  the 
moon's  surface  have  been  photographed  in  ultra- 
violet light. 

A  number  of  craters  are  surrounded  by  these 
streaks.  Copernicus,  a  crater  a  little  northeast  of 
the  centre  of  the  moon's  disk,  has  a  remarkable 
system  of  feathery  streaks. 

Clefts,  or  rills,  as  they  are  called,  are  also  seen 
in  large  numbers  upon  the  moon.  They  are  often 
more  than  100  miles  long,  but  are  usually  extremely 
narrow,  often  mere  cracks  in  the  surface,  half  a 
mile  or  so  wide.  Mountain  chains  also  exist  upon 
the  moon  similar  to  mountain  chains  upon  the 
earth.  There  are  the  lunar  Alps  and  Appenines, 
with  peaks  running  up  to  20,000  feet  in  height. 

71 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


On  the  extreme  southern  edge  of  the  disk  are  two 
mountain  chains  spoken  of  by  the  French  astrono- 
mer Flammarion  as  the  "mountains  of  eternal 
light/'  for  the  sun  never  sets  upon  these  peaks, 
one  of  which  is  7,000  feet  higher  than  Mount 
Everest. 

From  the  moon  the  earth  appears  about  thirteen 
times  as  large  as  the  moon  does  to  us.  Seen  from 
any  point  upon  the  visible  lunar  disk  it  would 
appear  practically  immovable  in  the  sky,  its  alti- 
tude varying  for  different  positions  on  the  moon's 
surface.  The  diurnal  rotation  of  the  earth  would 
be  clearly  seen,  as  would  also  its  continents  and 
seas,  polar  caps,  mountains  and  plains,  its  clouds 
and  storms.  It  would  exhibit  all  the  phases  that 
the  moon  does  to  us  in  reverse  order. 

Many  theories  of  the  origin  of  the  moon  have 
been  advanced,  but  all  seem  to  present  some  diffi- 
culties. Our  satellite  furnishes  us  many  unsolved 
problems.  A  belief  in  the  meteoric  origin  of  the 
moon  is  now  quite  general.  According  to  this  be- 
lief the  earth  was  surrounded  in  the  early  stages 
of  its  existence  by  a  ring  of  meteoric  matter.  The 
material  forming  the  ring  gradually  gathered  into 
one  mass,  our  present  moon,  whose  pitted  face  gives 

72 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


evidence   of  the  bombardment  it   received  from 
meteoric  masses  within  the  ring. 

According  to  this  theory  our  satellite  has  always 
been  a  dead  world,  a  cold  and  lifeless  mass  of 
meteoric  rock.  It  has  never  felt  the  pulse  of  life 
or  undergone  the  mighty  changes  that  have  passed 
over  its  ruling  planet,  the  Earth.  It  has  remained 
a  cold  and  silent  witness  to  vast  evolutionary  proc- 
esses going  on  upon  a  neighboring  world  such  as  it 
could  never  experience  for  itself. 


73 


CHAPTER  XI 

SOME  UNSOLVED  PROBLEMS  OF  THE  MOON 

A  MOST  troublesome  little  member  of  the  sun's 
•*  *•  family  is  our  satellite,  the  moon.  The  nearest 
to  the  earth  of  all  the  heavenly  bodies  and  the  most 
easily  observed,  the  moon  presents  as  many  un- 
solved problems  as  the  stars  themselves. 

There  are  more  theories  advanced  to  explain 
the  origin  of  the  lunar  craters  than  there  are  to 
explain  the  nature  of  the  "canals"  of  Mars.  "We 
hear  many  conflicting  theories.  First  there  is  the 
theory  of  a  terrific  explosion  from  within  and  the 
resulting  deluge  of  the  lunar  surface  with  an  out- 
flow of  highly  heated  material  of  spongy  consist- 
ency with  its  bursting  bubbles  of  gas,  to  be  fol- 
lowed later  by  secondary  explosions  and  more 
deluges.  Then  there  is  the  opposite  theory  of  in- 
tense bombardments  by  meteoric  masses  from  with- 

74 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


out  that  have  disfigured  and  pitted  the  face  of  our 
satellite. 

There  is  also  the  theory  that  the  moon  was  once 
a  part  of  the  earth  and  that  the  two  gradually 
separated  and  the  distance  between  them  increased 
slowly  under  the  complicated  action  of  tidal  forces 
exerted  by  the  sun  as  well  as  by  the  earth  and 
moon.  And  there  is  another  theory  that  the  moon 
never  was  a  part  of  the  earth  but  has  been  captured 
by  our  planet. 

There  is  one  problem  presented  by  irregularities 
in  the  motion  of  the  moon  that  transcends  all  other 
lunar  problems  in  importance.  Indeed,  it  may 
lead  to  discoveries  bearing  on  the  nature  of  gravi- 
tation itself.  It  has  long  been  known  that  the 
motion  of  the  moon  is  not  in  keeping  with  the 
theory.  The  observed  positions  of  the  moon  are  not 
in  good  agreement  with  the  computed  positions  and 
since  the  theory  has  been  carried  to  a  high  degree 
of  accuracy  it  is  now  suspected  that  the  difference 
is  due  to  the  action  of  some  unknown  law  that  may 
be  as  fundamental  as  the  law  of  gravitation. 

The  positions  of  most  of  the  members  of  the 
solar  system  can  be  computed  over  an  interval  of 
a  number  of  years,  according  to  the  law  of  gravi- 

75 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

tation,  with  such  a  high  degree  of  accuracy  that  the 
observed  and  computed  positions  are  practically 
identical.  The  same  cannot  be  said  of  the  moon, 
however.  For  half  a  century  or  a  century  the  moon 
will  revolve  around  the  earth  a  little  ahead  of  its 
regular  rate  and  then  for  another  long  period  of 
time  will  gradually  fall  behind.  Empirical  cor- 
rections are  constantly  being  applied  to  the  moon's 
position  in  order  to  bring  the  observed  and  pre- 
dicted positions  into  agreement. 

So  complicated  is  the  theory  of  the  moon  that 
only  astronomers  possessing  the  highest  mathe- 
matical ability  are  fitted  to  cope  with  it.  Noted 
mathematicians  and  astronomers  have  spent  years 
of  effort  in  trying  to  discover  the  cause  of  the  large 
and  continually  increasing  discrepancies  between 
the  predicted  and  observed  positions  of  the  moon. 

New  tables  for  computing  the  position  of  the 
moon  have  recently  appeared.  They  are  the  result 
of  years  of  work  by  Prof.  E.  W.  Brown  of  Yale 
University,  one  of  the  best  known  theoretical 
astronomers  of  the  present  day,  and  a  number  of 
assistants.  It  is  believed  that  these  tables  give  the 
moon's  position  with  as  high  a  degree  of  accuracy 
as  it  is  possible  to  obtain  it  by  taking  account  of 

76 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


all  known  factors  affecting  the  motion  of  our  satel- 
lite. Nevertheless,  positions  of  the  moon  computed 
with  the  new  tables  do  not  agree  with  the  ob- 
served positions,  and  it  is  evident  that  there  is  some 
unknown  factor  in  operation  that  is  affecting  the 
motion  of  the  moon. 

Comparisons  of  the  observed  with  the  predicted 
times  of  beginning  and  ending  of  totality  in  total 
eclipses  of  the  sun  by  the  moon  show  the  amount 
of  error  in  the  computed  position  of  the  moon  at 
the  time  of  the  eclipse. 

It  was  found  in  1900  that  the  predicted  time  of 
the  beginning  of  the  total  eclipse  was  seven  seconds 
too  early  and  the  path  of  the  moon's  shadow  upon 
the  earth  was  consequently  a  mile  or  two  in  error. 
In  1905  astronomers  were  surprised  to  find  the 
difference  had  increased  to  twenty  seconds,  and  in 
the  total  eclipse  of  June  8, 1918,  the  predicted  time 
would  have  been  in  error  eighteen  seconds  if  a  cor- 
rection had  not  been  applied  shortly  beforehand, 
which  reduced  the  amount  of  the  error  almost  to 
zero. 

This  correction  was  found  from  recent  observa- 
tions of  occultations  of  stars  by  the  moon.  Since 
the  positions  of  the  stars  can  be  obtained  with  a 

77 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


high  degree  of  accuracy  the  true  position  of  the 
moon  can  be  found  for  the  time  when  the  star  is 
occulted  or  hidden  behind  the  disk  of  the  moon. 
Observations  of  eclipses  and  occultations  are  used 
to  correct  the  tables  that  are  used  to  predict  the 
moon's  position  from  year  to  year,  but  these  cor- 
rections are  empirical  and  it  is  not  known  yet  to 
what  they  are  due. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  an  unexplained 
error  in  the  computed  positions  of  Uranus  finally 
led  to  the  discovery  of  the  planet  Neptune,  which 
was  producing  the  deviations  in  the  predicted  places 
of  this  planet.  The  irregularities  in  the  moon's  mo- 
tion cannot  be  attributed  to  an  undiscovered  planet, 
however,  and  there  is  a  strong  possibility  that  there 
may  be  something  in  the  nature  of  gravitation  itself 
that  is  producing  the  discrepancies. 

According  to  a  theory  that  has  been  recently  ad- 
vanced by  Prof.  See  of  the  Naval  Observatory  at 
Mare  Island,  Cal.,  gravitation  is  to  be  considered 
as  an  electro-magnetic  force.  He  believes  that  the 
unexplained  deviations  in  the  moon's  position  are 
caused  by  the  refraction,  dispersion  and  absorption 
of  some  of  the  magnetic  forces  of  the  sun  by  the 
earth  at  the  time  of  full  moon  and  more  especially 

78 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

at  the  time  of  the  eclipse  of  the  moon  by  the  earth. 
It  appears  that  this  explanation  may  account  for 
one  of  the  unknown  terms  but  it  does  not  account 
for  all  of  them. 

It  may  happen  that  when  the  cause  of  the  errors 
in  the  moon 's  computed  positions  is  found  a  funda- 
mental law  of  the  universe  will  be  discovered  as 
well.  It  is  in  just  this  way  that  many  valuable  and 
important  discoveries  are  made.  The  velocity  of 
light  was  discovered  while  attempts  were  being 
made  to  explain  errors  in  the  computed  times  of  the 
eclipses  of  Jupiter's  satellites.  Bradley  made  sev- 
eral very  important  discoveries,  such  as  the  aberra- 
tion of  light  and  the  nutation  or  wabbling  of  the 
earth's  axis  that  affects  the  positions  of  all  the 
stars,  while  he  was  attempting  to  measure  the  dis- 
tances of  the  stars.  So  it  will  be  by  no  means  sur- 
prising if  our  troublesome  little  moon  some  day 
figures  in  a  very  far  reaching  discovery. 

The  moon's  attraction  for  the  earth  gives  rise 
to  the  tides  so  familiar  to  every  one.  The  sun  also 
produces  tides  upon  the  earth,  but  as  the  sun  is  so 
much  further  away  its  tide  raising  forces  are 
inferior  to  those  of  the  moon. 

A  small  amount  of  light  and  heat  is  reflected 
79 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

from  the  moon  to  the  earth  and  there  are 
minute  variations  in  the  position  of  the  magnetic 
needle  to  be  attributed  to  the  moon's  influence, 
as  well  as  some  minor  changes  in  the  earth's  motion. 
Aside  from  this  the  moon  does  not  affect  in  the 
least  conditions  existing  upon  the  earth,  though 
there  is  no  other  heavenly  body  that  is  associated 
with  more  superstitious  beliefs. 

To  follow  the  course  of  the  moon  through  the 
heavens  during  one  month,  the  period  of  its  revo- 
lution around  the  earth,  and  to  explain  the  cause 
of  its  various  phases  is  a  very  elementary  matter, 
yet  it  appears  to  be  a  most  perplexing  problem  for 
nearly  every  one.  In  the  present  age,  when  astro- 
nomical knowledge  is  so  easily  obtained,  artists  still 
delight  in  placing  the  crescent  moon  overhead  at 
midnight,  an  astronomical  blunder  as  serious  as 
picturing  the  sun  in  the  west  early  in  the  morning. 
Less  frequently  the  horns  of  the  crescent  moon  are 
turned  toward  the  horizon,  though  a  moment's 
thought  would  demonstrate  the  absurdity  of  this 
position  if  the  cause  of  the  moon's  phases  is  at  all 
understood.  A  most  woeful  lack  of  knowledge, 
either  of  the  cause  of  the  phases  of  the  moon  or  of 
the  relative  distances  of  the  stars  and  the  moon, 

80 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


is  evidenced  when  a  star  is  pictured  between  the 
horns  of  the  crescent  moon. 

A  knowledge  of  the  elementary  facts  concerning 
the  moon  and  its  motion  is  as  easily  acquired  as  is 
the  knowledge  of  the  cause  of  the  rising  and  setting 
of  the  sun  and  the  changing  seasons,  and  it  seema 
quite  unbelievable  that  there  should  be  widespread 
ignorance  of  such  simple,  yet  fundamental,  matters. 


81 


CHAPTER  XII 

SHOOTING  STARS  AND  METEORS 

UNTIL  the  beginning  of  the  nineteenth  century 
it  was  deemed  an  absurdity  to  believe  that 
stones  fell  to  earth  from  the  heavens.  Such  rumors 
had  persisted  for  centuries,  but  they  were  attrib- 
uted to  the  ignorant  and  superstitious. 

Finally,  in  the  year  1803  man  was  compelled  to 
change  his  views  somewhat  suddenly;  not  in  some 
far  away  corner  of  the  earth,  but  over  an  extent  of 
many  miles  in  thickly  populated  districts  of  France 
thousands  of  such  stones  fell  in  a  single  day. 
Their  appearance  was  accompanied  by  the  sharp 
reports  and  detonations  now  known  to  be  always 
attendant  upon  the  passage  of  meteorites  through 
the  earth's  atmosphere. 

Scientists  sent  to  the  district  by  the  French  In- 
stitute heard  accounts  of  the  phenomenon  as  seen 

82 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


by  hundreds  of  eye  witnesses  and  brought  back 
many  of  the  stones. 

After  man's  mind  was  open  to  conviction  it  was 
found  that  the  fall  of  meteoric  stones  from  the 
heavens  was  by  no  means  a  rare  occurrence,  though 
their  appearance  in  such  large  numbers  as  had 
been  observed  in  France  in  1803  was  unusual.  It 
has  been  concluded  from  a  conservative  estimate 
that  the  number  of  large  meteorites  or  aerolites  that 
reach  the  earth  yearly  must  approximate  fully  one 
hundred  in  number. 

This  estimate  includes  also  those  that  fall  in  un- 
inhabited lands  or  into  the  large  bodies  of  water 
that  cover  three-fourths  of  the  earth's  surface.  In 
addition  to  the  meteorites  that  weight  anywhere 
from  a  few  pounds  to  several  tons,  it  has  been  esti- 
mated from  extensive  observations  that  between 
ten  and  twenty  million  meteors  or  shooting  stars 
enter  the  earth's  atmosphere  daily.  Their  average 
weight  is  considerably  less  than  an  ounce  and  they 
are  usually  consumed  by  the  friction  produced  by 
their  rapid  flight  through  the  air.  The  resulting 
dustlike  particles  float  in  the  air  or  gradually  settle 
to  the  earth's  surface,  adding  to  its  mass  a  few 
tons  daily. 

83 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Though  this  seems  to  be  a  considerable  amount, 
it  is  so  small  in  proportion  to  the  earth's  total  mass 
that  it  would  not  become  appreciable  for  many 
hundreds  of  thousands  of  years.  These  meteors 
are  believed  to  be  the  debris  of  comets  encoun- 
tered by  the  earth  in  its  journey  around  the  sun. 
If  the  earth  is  continually  encountering  meteoric 
dust,  so,  doubtless,  are  all  the  other  planets  as 
well,  and  the  total  amount  within  the  solar  system 
must  be  very  considerable. 

Astronomers  are  now  giving  a  good  deal  of  at- 
tention to  the  question  of  the  scattering  of  light 
by  cosmical  dust  throughout  the  universe  at  large 
and  there  are  indications  of  the  presence  in  our 
own  solar  system  of  appreciable  quantities  of  finely 
divided  matter. 

Interplanetary  space  is  by  no  means  a  void. 
Tails  of  comets  appear  at  times  to  be  brushed  aside 
or  cut  off  in  a  manner  quite  unaccountable,  unless 
we  assume  that  some  resisting  medium  has  been  en- 
countered such  as  would  present  no  difficulty  to 
a  larger  mass,  satellite  or  planet,  but  becomes  very 
disturbing  to  such  tenuous  matter  as  the  tails  of 
comets. 

The  motion  of  Mercury  is  not  just  as  it  would  be 
84 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


if  affected  only  by  the  attraction  of  the  known 
planets.  This  has  led  to  the  suspicion  that  there 
may  be  one  or  two  small  intra-mercurial  planets, 
and  they  have  been  searched  for  diligently  at  times 
of  total  eclipse  of  the  sun,  so  far  unsuccessfully. 
Some  astronomers  believe,  however,  that  finely  di- 
vided particles  of  matter  existing  in  the  Zodiacal 
Light  may  account  for  the  peculiar  behavior  of  the 
innermost  planet. 

After  sunset  in  the  spring  or  before  sunrise  in 
the  fall,  when  the  ecliptic  rises  most  sharply  from 
the  horizon,  the  careful  watcher  may  see  a  faint 
wedge  of  light,  about  equal  in  brightness  to  the 
Milky  Way,  extending  from  the  horizon  to  the 
zenith.  Near  the  horizon  it  is  fully  twenty  degrees 
wide,  but  it  rapidly  narrows  to  a  width  of  three 
degrees  or  four  degrees  overhead.  Under  favor- 
able conditions  it  can  be  traced  far  beyond  the 
zenith.  This  is  called  the  Zodiacal  Light  and  ex- 
actly opposite  the  sun  also  appears  at  times  a  faint 
oval  patch  of  light  covering  an  area  about  the  size 
of  the  bowl  of  the  Big  Dipper.  This  is  the  Counter- 
glow,  and  it  is  so  excessively  faint  that  few  have 
ever  observed  it. 

Both  Zodiacal  Light  and  Counter-glow  are  un- 
85 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


observable  if  there  is  any  moonlight.  It  is  be- 
lieved that  the  Zodiacal  Light  is  due  to  reflected 
sunlight  from  a  great  number  of  finely  divided 
particles  circulating  around  the  sun  in  the  plane 
of  the  earth's  orbit  and  extending  even  beyond  the 
earth.  The  Counter-glow  is  not  so  easily  explained, 
but  it  probably  represents  a  condensation  of  these 
particles  at  some  point  beyond  the  earth's  orbit  at 
a  point  about  930,000  miles  from  the  earth  and 
just  beyond  the  reach  of  its  shadow  where  the  com- 
bined forces  of  the  earth  and  sun  would  cause  mat- 
ters to  be  drawn  into  a  sort  of  whirlpool  of  mo- 
tion. Sunlight  shining  upon  these  particles  makes 
them  visible  to  us  when  directly  opposite  the 
sun. 

So  it  appears  that  cosmical  dust  and  fragment- 
ary matter  is  fairly  plentiful  within  our  solar 
system.  Probably  a  large  amount  of  such  meteoric 
dust  is  swept  up  by  the  larger  planets  as  they  jour- 
ney around  the  sun,  but  the  supply  is  also  replen- 
ished by  the  escape  of  particles  of  matter  from  the 
atmospheres  of  sun  and  planets. 

The  sun  is  the  seat  of  intense  activity  and  ex- 
plosive agents  are  at  work  there  that  cause  flames 
of  the  lighter  gases  to  shoot  forth  at  times  to 

86 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


heights  of  more  than  300,000  miles  with  velocities 
of  about  two  hundred  miles  or  more  per  second.  A 
velocity  of  more  than  three  hundred  and  eighty 
miles  per  second  would  enable  particles  of  matter  to 
permanently  escape  from  the  control  of  the  sun  and 
pass  to  space  beyond.  Light  pressure  acting  upon 
small  particles  of  matter  may  also  overbalance  the 
sun's  attraction  and  drive  cosmical  dust  away  from 
the  vicinity  of  the  sun.  The  corona,  we  know,  is 
partly  composed  of  dust  particles  and  liquid  glob- 
ules shining  by  reflected  sunlight  as  well  as  light 
of  incandescence. 

Most  interesting  of  all  fragmentary  matter  ex- 
isting within  our  solar  system  are  the  meteorites 
previously  mentioned.  There  are  several  theories 
concerning  the  origin  of  these  peculiar  stones.  The 
idea  that  they  are  simply  larger  portions  of  dis- 
rupted comets  is  quite  generally  held,  and  yet 
these  stones  rarely  appear  when  showers  of  meteors 
are  experienced.  They  almost  invariably  appear 
singly. 

The  fact  that  they  contain  no  unknown  elements 
and  in  some  respects  resemble  lava  from  deep  vol- 
canoes led  to  the  old  belief  that  they  were  expelled 
from  the  interior  of  the  earth  or  other  planets  by 

87 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


intense  volcanic  activity  in  the  past  and  after  re- 
ceding to  great  distances  returned  and  fell  once 
more  within  reach  of  the  earth's  attraction.  This 
belief  leaves  unexplained  many  of  the  characteris- 
tics of  meteorites.  Volcanic  action  intense  enough 
to  overcome  the  effect  of  the  earth's  attraction 
would  cause  a  fusion  of  the  material  of  which  the 
meteorites  consist  such  as  does  not  appear. 

In  some  few  instances  meteorites  are  composed 
of  nearly  pure  iron,  but  usually  they  are  frag- 
ments of  stone  with  peculiar  crystals  and  consid- 
erable quantities  of  gases  that  are  sometimes  com- 
bustible, hidden  in  their  crevices.  They  usually 
show  none  of  the  results  of  the  action  of  water  and 
very  little  oxidation.  Some  show  veins  where  for- 
eign substances  have  been  slowly  deposited  and 
signs  of  fracture  and  sliding  of  one  surface  on  an- 
other. 

The  most  interesting  theory  respecting  these  vis- 
itors from  the  heavens  is  that  they  are  fragments 
of  disrupted  bodies,  possibly  of  planetary  dimen- 
sions, that  at  some  time  chanced  too  near  a  larger 
mass  and  were  torn  asunder  under  tidal  stress  and 
strain. 

It  is  even  a  possibility  that  the  solar  nebula, 
88 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


from  which  we  believe  our  present  solar  system 
was  fashioned,  originated  in  the  close  approach  of 
two  suns  and  that  around  one  or  both  of  these  suns 
at  that  time  planets  were  circling.  The  tremendous 
tidal  reaction  between  the  two  suns  would  result 
in  streams  of  matter  being  ejected  and  the  forma- 
tion of  a  spiral  nebula. 

If  planets  encircled  these  suns  they  would  be 
completely  shattered  and  scattered  as  meteoric 
fragments.  The  larger  nuclei  of  ejected  matter 
would  gradually  increase  in  size  by  sweeping  up 
other  fragments  of  matter  and  become  the  chief 
planets  of  another  system.  Smaller  nuclei  in  the 
vicinity  of  larger  ones  would  form  the  satellites 
attendant  upon  the  planets.  The  eight  hundred  or 
more  asteroids  may  represent  smaller  independent 
masses  that  have  avoided  collisions,  while  comets 
and  meteors  are  the  debris  remaining  when  order 
has  finally  been  brought  out  of  chaos. 

During  the  course  of  millions  of  years  all  frag- 
ments of  considerable  size  would  be  captured  by 
the  major  planets  and  satellites.  In  fact,  the  scan* 
on  the  face  of  our  satellite,  many  believe,  are  due 
to  terrific  meteoric  bombardment  in  the  past.  Ac- 
cording to  this  latest  theory  of  the  possible  origin 

89 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

of  meteorites,  fragments  of  worlds  antedating  our 
own  may  fall  to  the  earth's  surface  every  year  by 
scores,  and  in  a  few  cases  find  their  way  into  our 
museums. 


90 


CHAPTER  XIII 

OUR  CELESTIAL  VISITORS,  COMETS 

THE  number  of  comets  that  are  observed  and 
recorded  is  enormous,  but  most  of  these  are 
telescopic  and  conspicuous  comets  are  few.  Hardly 
a  year  passes  without  the  appearance  of  several  of 
these  mysterious  visitors.  Some  of  these  comets 
are  old  friends  returning,  periodic  comets  that  ar- 
rive more  or  less  on  schedule  time,  while  others 
that  travel  in  greatly  elongated  ellipses  only  ap- 
proach the  sun  once  in  hundreds  or  even  thousands 
of  years.  Donati's  great  comet  of  1858  takes  2,000 
years  to  complete  its  circuit.  It  is  a  question 
whether  some  comets  ever  return  to  the  solar  re- 
gions again,  for  their  orbits  appear  to  be  parabolic 
rather  than  elliptical.  Since,  however,  we  can  ob- 
serve only  a  very  small  portion  of  the  orbits  of 
some  comets  that  penetrate  far  into  the  depths  of 

91 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


space  beyond  the  orbit  of  Neptune  and  since  the 
arc  of  both  ellipse  and  parabola  are  nearly  coin- 
cident for  the  short  interval  of  observation  we  are 
left  in  doubt  as  to  whether  all  comets  return  or  not. 

Some  may  speed  forth  into  the  immensity  of 
space  that  separates  our  solar  system  from  the 
stars  beyond  never  to  return,  but  there  are  com- 
ets in  great  numbers  that  are  known  to  be  per- 
manent members  of  the  solar  system,  and  that  ac- 
company it  on  its  onward  journey  through  space. 
They  encircle  the  sun  in  orbits  that  are  greatly 
elongated  ellipses  markedly  different  from  the 
nearly  circular  orbits  of  the  planets. 

If  a  comet  on  its  journey  around  the  sun  passes 
close  to  one  of  the  major  planets,  it  may  come 
under  the  gravitational  influence  of  that  planet  to 
such  an  extent  that  its  path  will  be  entirely 
changed  and  its  aphelion  or  the  point  of  its  orbit 
furthest  away  from  the  sun  will  afterward  lie  close 
to  the  orbit  of  that  planet.  Jupiter  has  a  family 
of  about  thirty  comets.  His  family  is  the  largest 
because  his  mass  is  greater  than  that  of  all  the  other 
planets  combined.  All  the  aphelia  of  these  cap- 
tured comets,  of  course,  lie  near  Jupiter's  orbit. 
Neptune  has  a  family  of  six  comets. 

92 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


There  are  two  or  three  groups  of  comets  whose 
aphelia  lie  at  distances  several  times  as  great  as 
Neptune's  distance  from  the  sun,  and  possibly  fu- 
ture investigations  of  cometary  orbits  of  long  pe- 
riod may  lead  to  the  discovery-  of  several  trans- 
Neptunian  planets.  There  is  no  reason  to  suppose 
that  Neptune  is  the  farthest  planet  from  the  sun, 
for  the  gravitational  influence  of  the  sun  extends 
enormously  beyond  it. 

Comets  of  short  period  are  usually  spoken  of  as 
periodic  comets.  The  shortest  period,  three  and 
one-third  years,  is  that  of  Encke's  comet,  which, 
when  furthest  from  the  sun,  never  gets  beyond  the 
orbit  of  Jupiter,  while  Halley's  noted  comet,  which 
made  its  last  return  in  1910,  has  the  longest  period 
of  comets  classed  as  periodic.  No  great  or  con- 
spicuous comet  belongs  to  this  class. 

Though  comets  are  the  bulkiest  of  all  heavenly- 
bodies,  they  are  also  possessed  of  the  least  mass  of 
any  known  bodies  that  travel  through  space.  Com- 
ets usually  consist  of  a  nucleus,  coma  or  head,  and 
tail.  The  nucleus,  which  in  great  comets  fre- 
quently appears  as  bright  as  first  magnitude  stars, 
is  no  more  than  a  swarm  of  meteoric  particles.  Of 
the  actual  size  of  the  particles  we  can  form  no 

93 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


idea,  but  they  are  evidently  held  together  by  a 
very  loose  bond  of  gravitation.  The  entire  nucleus 
is  enwrapped  in  a  gaseous  envelope  that  forms  the 
head  of  the  comet.  This  coma  or  head  is  often  of 
enormous  dimensions.  The  head  of  Donati's  comet 
was  250,000  miles  in  diameter,  while  the  head  of 
the  comet  of  1811  measured  over  1,000,000  miles 
at  one  time.  As  the  comet  approaches  close  to  the 
sun  the  head  is  observed  to  contract  or  diminish  in 
size. 

The  tail,  which  is  the  most  noticeable  and  dis- 
tinctive feature  of  a  comet,  does  not  develop  until 
it  draws  in  toward  the  sun.  It  then  becomes,  in 
many  cases,  millions  of  miles  in  length.  The  Great 
Comet  of  1843  had  a  tail  more  than  200,000,000 
miles  in  length  and  the  comet  of  1882  had  a  head 
200,000  miles  in  diameter  and  a  tail  100,000,000 
miles  long.  These  two  comets,  as  well  as  the  great 
comet  of  1880,  pursued  nearly  identical  paths.  All 
three  were  noted  for  their  close  approach  to  the 
sun.  The  comet  of  1843,  in  fact,  passed  through 
the  corona  and  within  32,000  miles  of  the  sun's 
surface,  and  only  its  enormous  velocity  of  several 
hundred  miles  per  second  saved  it  from  actually 
falling  into  the  sun.  Its  enormous  tail  appeared 

94 


BROOKS'   COMET 

(Photographed  by  Barnard  at  the  Lick  Observatory) 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


to  be  whirled  around  the  sun  in  about  two  hours 
and  this  fact  proved  conclusively  that  the  tail  could 
not  be  an  actual  appendage,  but  must  be  a  series 
of  emanations  from  the  head  due  either  to  the  elec- 
tric repulsion  of  the  sun  acting  upon  highly  rare- 
fied material  in  the  head  of  the  comet  or  to  light 
pressure  which  overbalances  the  effect  of  gravity 
in  the  case  of  particles  of  extremely  small  mass. 

Comets  shine  not  only  by  reflected  sunlight,  but 
by  inherent  light  as  well,  and  the  spectroscope 
shows  that  they  are  composed  chiefly  of  gaseous 
compounds  of  hydrogen  and  carbon,  though  when 
near  the  sun  metallic  lines  of  sodium  and  iron  fre- 
quently appear.  So  highly  rarefied  is  the  material 
composing  the  heads  and  tails  of  comets  that  faint 
stars  are  often  observed  to  shine  through  them 
undimmed,  even  when  close  to  the  nucleus.  The 
fact  that  the  earth  has  many  times  been  involved 
in  the  tails  of  comets  with  no  disastrous  conse- 
quences— in  fact,  without  our  knowing  it  until 
later — shows  the  flimsy  nature  of  these  appendages. 
If  the  earth  should  meet  a  comet  head  on,  how- 
ever, it  would  doubtless  experience  a  more  or  less 
severe  meteoric  shower,  depending  upon  the  size 
of  the  meteoric  stones  within  the  nucleus. 

95 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Continued  returns  of  periodic  comets  to  the  vi- 
cinity of  the  sun  tend  to  reduce  them  greatly  in 
size  and  brilliancy  and  it  is  for  this  reason  that 
none  of  the  short-period  comets  are  as  striking  or 
conspicuous  objects  as  the  great  comets  of  long 
periods  and  infrequent  returns.  Even  Halley's 
comet,  the  largest  and  most  noted  of  periodic  com- 
ets, was  a  decided  disappointment  as  a  "show" 
comet  upon  its  return  in  1910.  Meteoric  showers 
are  composed  of  the  debris  of  comets  that  have  be- 
come disintegrated,  and  comets  have  been  seen  to 
separate  into  two  or  more  branches.  Many  comets 
travel  in  groups  along  the  same  curve.  The  great 
comets  of  1843,  1880  and  1881  belong  to  such  a 
group.  They  follow  practically  the  same  path  and 
may  have  even  formed  one  enormous  comet  at  some 
time  in  the  past. 

It  is  not  so  many  years  since  the  visits  of  these 
mysterious  strangers  were  received  with  dread  and 
fear,  for  it  was  believed  that  they  predicted  evil, 
either  war,  famine,  pestilence  or  death  of  royalty. 
Needless  to  say,  such  fears  were  entirely  without 
foundation,  but  so  superstitious  are  the  masses  that 
even  to  the  present  day  traces  of  these  beliefs  still 
linger.  In  1910  when  Halley's  comet  made  its 

96 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


predicted  return,  Chinese  mobs  attempted  to 
frighten  away  the  unwelcome  visitor  with  flaring 
torches.  If  a  great  and  conspicuous  comet  had 
made  a  sudden  appearance  just  prior  to  August, 
1914,  we  might  have  found  that  "  civilized "  west- 
ern nations,  even  in  this  age,  are  not  so  entirely 
free  from  superstitious  fear  concerning  unusual 
heavenly  phenomena  as  we  might  like  to  believe. 


97 


CHAPTER  XIV 

HOW  CARBON  DIOXIDE  IN  THE  EARTH'S  ATMOSPHERE 
AFFECTS  CLIMATE 

\  CCORDING  to  the  scientists,  man's  extra va- 
-**•  gant  consumption  of  coal  may,  in  the  course 
of  a  very  few  centuries,  materially  affect  the  com- 
position of  the  atmosphere  and  thereby  the  average 
yearly  temperature  at  the  earth's  surface  and  cli- 
matic conditions. 

Carbon  dioxide,  which  is  the  product  of  the  com- 
bustion of  coal,  is  one  of  the  constituents  of  the 
atmosphere.  The  amount  of  this  compound  found 
in  the  atmosphere  is  extremely  small,  three-hun- 
dredths  of  one  per  cent,  by  volume,  five-hundredths 
of  one  per  cent,  by  weight.  Although  the  percent- 
age of  carbon  dioxide  is  so  small  it  has  an  appreci- 
able effect  upon  the  earth's  climate. 

The  amount  of  coal  mined  and  burned  annually 
98 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


is  approximately  one  billion  tons,  and  as  a  result 
of  this  combustion  a  little  over  three  and  a  half 
billion  tons  of  carbon  dioxide  are  added  yearly  to 
the  present  amount  of  carbon  dioxide  in  the  earth's 
atmosphere,  which  is  approximately  three  trillion 
tons. 

A  simple  computation  will  show  that  the  amount 
of  carbon  dioxide  in  the  atmosphere  will  be  doubled 
in  about  eight  hundred  years  if  the  present  rate 
of  combustion  of  coal  is  maintained. 
.  The  absorbing  properties  of  carbon  dioxiae  are 
practically  the  same  as  those  of  water  vapor.  The 
intensely  hot  rays  of  the  sun  of  shortest  wave 
length,  those  from  the  blue  end  of  the  spectrum, 
pass  through  the  carbon  dioxide  and  water  vapor 
in  the  air  as  readily  as  through  nitrogen  and  oxy- 
gen, the  chief  constituents  of  the  atmosphere,  but 
the  longer  heat  rays,  as  they  are  called,  from  the 
red  end  of  the  spectrum  suffer  strong  absorption 
by  the  carbon  dioxide  and  water  vapor  in  the 
earth's  atmosphere. 

The  radiations  from  the  earth's  surface  are  com- 
posed almost  entirely  of  the  rays  of  longer  wave 
lengths  and  are,  therefore,  largely  absorbed  by 
these  compounds.  The  blanketing  effect  of  the  at- 

99 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


mosphere  is  greatly  increased  by  the  presence  of 
water  vapor  and  carbon  dioxide.  It  has  been  esti- 
mated that  fully  thirty-five  per  cent,  of  the  sun's 
rays  that  enter  the  atmosphere  of  the  earth  per- 
pendicularly are  absorbed  before  they  reach  the 
surface  of  the  earth. 

At  night  the  heat  absorbed  by  the  atmosphere 
during  the  daytime  is  radiated  in  all  directions  and 
portions  of  it  strike  the  earth's  surface  directly 
and  warm  it,  while  other  portions  are  reflected 
back  to  the  earth  from  the  upper  atmosphere.  Also 
the  heat  rays  radiated  from  the  earth's  surface 
during  the  night  are  trapped  by  the  water  vapor 
and  carbon  dioxide  in  the  atmosphere  and  raise 
the  temperature  of  the  air. 

As  a  result  the  extremes  of  temperature  be- 
tween day  and  night  are  greatly  reduced  by  the 
presence  of  these  two  compounds  in  the  atmos- 
phere. 

Every  one  is  aware  of  the  fact  that  on  the  moun- 
tain heights  where  the  atmosphere  is  less  dense  the 
days  are  hotter  and  the  nights  colder  than  they 
are  at  sea  level.  It  is  also  well  known  that  the 
early  autumn  frosts  occur  only  when  the  air  is 
clear  and  the  amount  of  water  vapor  in  the  atmos- 
100 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


phere  small.  An  increase  in  the  amount  of  carbon 
dioxide  in  the  air  would  have  the  same  effect  on 
the  temperature  as  an  increase  in  the  amount  of 
water  vapor,  since  the  heat  absorbing  properties 
of  the  two  are  the  same. 

Certain  geologists  believe  that  the  amount  of  car- 
bon dioxide  in  the  earth's  atmosphere  has  varied 
periodically  over  long  intervals  of  time  and  that 
the  glacial  periods  and  the  warm  periods  that  have 
occurred  alternately  in  the  past  have  been  due  to 
this  variation  in  the  composition  of  the  atmosphere. 
The  effect  of  an  increase  in  the  amount  of  carbon 
dioxide  in  the  earth's  atmosphere  is  to  increase  the 
general  temperature  of  the  air,  while  a  decrease 
in  the  amount  of  carbon  dioxide  lowers  the  sur- 
face temperature  of  the  earth. 

The  enormous  amount  of  coal  burned  by  the 
human  race  yearly  will,  therefore,  in  the  course  of 
time,  increase  the  earth's  temperature  and  affect 
the  climate  throughout  the  world.  Whatever  af- 
fects the  nature  or  direction  of  the  air  currents 
that  flow  over  the  earth's  surface  will  possess  the 
greatest  influence  over  the  general  temperature  of 
the  world,  for  to  the  air  currents  and  their  equal- 
izing effect  upon  the  climate  is  to  be  attributed  the 
101 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

habitability  of  both  the  polar  and  tropical  regions 
of  the  earth. 

The  composition  of  the  atmosphere  has  the  great- 
est influence  over  the  forms  of  life  existing  upon  a 
planet,  and  in  considering  the  question  of  life  on 
other  planets  the  nature  and  composition  of  the 
atmosphere  is  first  in  importance. 

It  is  extremely  difficult  to  speculate  concerning 
the  forms  of  life  one  would  meet  on  Mars  or  Venus 
until  we  know  something  definite  about  what  ele- 
ments and  compounds  occur  in  the  atmosphere  of 
these  planets  and  in  what  proportions.  Even  small 
variations  in  the  amount  of  carbon  dioxide  in  the 
earth's  atmosphere  can  seriously  affect  its  climate. 
A  slightly  greater  percentage  of  this  compound  in 
the  atmosphere  of  Mars  might  go  far  toward  over- 
coming the  greater  extremes  of  temperature  be- 
tween day  and  night  arising  from  a  rarer  atmos- 
phere and  greater  distance  from  the  sun. 

Then,  too,  the  relative  amounts  of  nitrogen  and 
oxygen  in  a  planet's  atmosphere  would  have  to  be 
taken  into  consideration  in  speculating  on  the  pos- 
sibility of  the  existence  of  red-blooded  organisms 
that  require  a  large  percentage  of  oxygen  for  their 
development 

102 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


The  elements  that  enter  into  the  composition  of 
the  earth's  atmosphere  and  the  percentage  of  these 
elements  in  a  given  volume  are :  Nitrogen,  seventy- 
eight  per  cent. ;  oxygen,  twenty-one  per  cent. ;  ar- 
gon, ninety-four  hundredths  of  one  per  cent.  There 
are,  in  addition,  extremely  small  amounts  of  kryp- 
ton, helium,  neon,  xeon  and  other  rare  elements. 
The  amount  of  water  vapor  in  the  air  is,  of 
course,  variable  and  can  never  exceed  a  certain 
amount,  and  the  amount  of  carbon  dioxide,  as  we 
stated  before,  is  only  three-hundredths  of  one  per 
cent. 

There  are  in  addition  to  these  elements  and  com- 
pounds a  number  of  impurities,  such  as  ammonia, 
Hoot  and  dust  particles  that  occur  in  extremely 
Kmall  amounts  as  a  rule.  We  might  also  include  the 
poisonous  gases  and  compounds  that  man  has  em- 
ployed during  the  present  war,  though  their  sum 
total  is  infinitesimal  and  probably  surpassed  in 
1otal  volume  by  the  gases  arising  from  a  single 
volcanic  eruption. 

The  height  of  the  earth 's  atmosphere  can  be  de- 
termined by  observing  the  flight  of  shooting  stars 
or  meteors  and  the  altitude  of  the  auroral  stream- 
ers from  two  different  positions  on  the  earth's  sur- 
103 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


face,  observations  being  made  simultaneously  at 
the  two  stations,  or  it  can  be  determined  from  the 
duration  of  twilight.  The  results  vary  according 
to  the  method  used,  since  the  density  of  the  atmos- 
phere decreases  rapidly  with  increased  distance 
from  the  earth  and  the  different  phenomena  occur 
at  different  densities. 

The  atmosphere  extends  fifty  miles  above  the 
earth  in  quantities  sufficient  to  produce  twilight. 
It  has  been  found  that  it  is  sufficiently  dense  to 
offer  resistance  to  meteors  at  a  height  of  100  miles 
from  the  earth.  The  southern  ends  of  auroral 
streamers  are  usually  more  than  100  miles  in 
height;  and  they  sometimes  reach  a  height  of  500 
miles. 

The  aurorae  are  electrical  phenomena  of  the  rare 
upper  atmosphere  and  the  density  required  for 
their  display  is  very  slight.  It  is  usually  consid- 
ered that  the  atmosphere  does  not  occur  in  ap- 
preciable-amounts to  more  than  100  miles  from  the 
earth's  surface. 

The  weight  of  a  column  of  air  reaching  from 

the  earth's  surface  to  the  limits  of  the  atmosphere 

and  one  square  inch  in  cross  section  weighs  fifteen 

pounds,  and  from  the  known  area  of  the  surface  of 

104 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  earth  it  is  possible  to  find  the  weight  of  the 
earth's  atmosphere,  which  is  approximately  six 
quadrillion  tonst  or  one-millionth  of  the  mass  of 
the  earth. 


105 


CHAPTER  XV 

HOW  A  LITTLE  SPECTROSCOPE  TELLS  THE  SECRET 
OF  LIGHT 

TT  IS  rightly  considered  one  of  the  greatest 
•••  achievements  of  science  that  a  tiny  ray  of  light 
coming  to  us  from  the  immeasurable  depths  of 
space  can  be  made  to  unfold  the  secrets  of  the  com- 
position and  nature  of  the  body  from  which  it 
emanates,  whether  it  is  gaseous  or  solid,  highly 
heated  or  comparatively  cool,  new  or  far  advanced 
in  evolution,  and  even  the  amount  and  direction  of 
its  motion. 

The  little  instrument  that  accomplishes  such 
wonderful  results  is  known  as  the  spectroscope  and 
the  field  of  study  that  it  has  opened  to  us  is  known 
as  spectrum  analysis.  The  essential  part  of  the 
spectroscope  is  simply  a  glass  prism,  or  chain  of 
prisms  in  some  cases,  or  it  may  be  a  piece  of  plane 
106 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY, 


glass  or  speculum  metal  closely  ruled  with  fine 
lines,  sometimes  as  many  as  20,000  lines  to  the  inch, 
known  as  a  diffraction  grating.  In  each  case  the 
object  is  to  separate  white  light  into  the  various 
colors  that  enter  into  its  composition.  When  a  ray 
of  white  light  such  as  sunlight  is  passed  through  a 
transparent  medium  denser  than  air,  such  as  glass 
or  water,  it  is  split  up  into  its  component  parts, 
which  are  rays  of  different  colors  and  wave  lengths. 
We  have  then  what  is  known  as  the  spectrum.  This 
principle  we  have  all  seen  illustrated  in  the  rain- 
bow, which  is  formed  when  rays  of  white  light  or 
sunlight  pass  through  falling  drops  of  water,  which 
act  as  tiny  prisms  and  split  white  light  into  the 
rays  of  different  wave  lengths  and  color  that  com- 
pose it.  All  the  colors  of  the  rainbow  are  familiar 
to  every  one  and  they  are  the  colors  of  the  spec- 
trum. If,  as  in  the  spectroscope,  a  ray  of  sunlight 
is  passed  through  a  glass  prism  we  see  a  ribbon  of 
variegated  colors  blending  into  each  other  grad- 
ually. If  the  prism  is  so  turned  that  the  red  will 
appear  at  our  left  hand  we  shall  see  in  order  from 
left  to  right — red,  orange,  yellow,  green,  blue,  in- 
digo and  violet,  arranged  according  to  their  respec- 
tive wave  lengths.  The  red  rays  have  the  greatest 
101 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


wave  length  and  are  the  least  bent  from  their  course 
and  the  violet  are  the  shortest  and  so  the  most  re- 
fracted. The  wave  lengths  of  the  visible  spectrum 
vary  from  .0008  millimeter  for  the  red  to  .0004  for 
the  violet.  When  we  consider  that  .0001  millimeter 
is  equivalent  to  1-250,000  of  an  inch  and  that  we 
can  measure  a  displacement  of  this  amount  in  the 
spectrum  the  wonderful  accuracy  of  measurements 
by  this  method  is  apparent. 

Beyond  the  visible  red  rays  we  have  the  "infra 
red"  rays  and  beyond  the  violet  rays  the  "ultra 
violet"  rays.  The  human  eye  is  not  sensitive  to 
these  colors,  but  their  presence  has  been  detected 
by  photography,  in  the  case  of  the  ultra  violet  rays, 
and  by  the  heat  produced  by  infra  red  rays,  which 
are  sometimes  spoken  of  as  "heat  rays."  The  pho- 
tographic plate  is  particularly  sensitive  to  the  violet 
end  of  the  spectrum.  Very  much  can  be  accom- 
plished in  spectrum  analysis  by  means  of  the 
photographed  spectrum. 

An  examination  of  the  spectrum  produced  by  a 
ray  of  sunlight,  which  is  known  as  the  solar  spec- 
trum, shows  a  great  number  of  fine  dark  lines 
crossing  the  solar  spectrum  vertically.  These  are 
the  absorption  lines,  sometimes  called  the  Frauen- 
108 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


hofer  lines,  and  it  is  these  dark  lines  that  tell  us 
so  much  of  the  temperature  and  constitution  of 
the  sun. 

Every  chemical  element  when  heated  to  vapori- 
zation and  every  gas  heated  to  incandescence  has 
its  own  characteristic  spectrum,  certain  bright  lines 
that  essentially  belong  to  it  alone  and  that  always 
appear  in  exactly  the  same  position  in  the  spec- 
trum. The  greater  the  heat  the  more  intense  the 
lines  appear,  so  the  spectroscope  can  detect  tem- 
perature changes.  No  two  elements  can  have  the 
same  lines  in  the  spectrum  nor  any  lines  in  com- 
mon. When  a  compound  of  sodium,  for  instance,  is 
heated  to  vaporization,  two  lines  characteristic  of 
sodium  appear  in  the  yellow  of  the  spectrum  al- 
ways in  exactly  the  same  position.  They  are  the 
characteristic  lines  of  sodium,  and  if  they  appear 
in  the  spectrum  of  a  certain  star  we  know  that 
sodium  occurs  in  that  star  in  a  state  of  vaporiza- 
tion. If,  however,  a  still  hotter  source  of  light  is 
placed  behind  the  vapor  of  sodium  so  as  to  shine 
through  it  the  sodium  lines  appear  as  dark  lines 
in  the  spectrum  of  the  hotter  light.  Any  other  ele- 
ment, of  course,  acts  in  the  same  way  when  placed 
before  a  brighter  light  and  the  dark  lines  of  the 
109 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


substance  are  then  spoken  of  as  absorption  lines. 
Take  away  the  source  of  light  beyond  and  they  ap- 
pear as  bright  lines  again. 

The  dark  lines  that  appear  in  the  solar  spectrum 
are  the  lines  of  vaporized  elements  that  surround 
the  hotter  surface  of  the  sun,  and  it  has  been 
through  comparison  of  these  lines  with  the  bright 
lines  produced  by  known  terrestrial  elements  in  the 
laboratory  that  we  have  found  that  the  sun  con- 
tains many  elements  that  occur  on  the  earth.  It  is 
an  interesting  fact  that  at  the  time  of  total  solar 
eclipse,  after  the  surface  of  the  sun  has  been  en- 
tirely hidden  by  the  moon  and  before  the  surround- 
ing gaseous  envelope  has  been  covered,  the  dark 
lines  of  the  solar  spectrum  suddenly  flash  forth  as 
bright  lines.  This  is  what  we  should  expect,  for 
when  the  hotter  source  of  light  beyond  is  removed, 
the  absorption  lines  appear  as  the  bright  lines  of 
vaporized  elements  shining  by  their  own  light. 

There  is  a  principle  of  spectrum  analysis  the 
value  of  which  can  hardly  be  overestimated  in  con- 
nection with  the  study  of  the  heavens,  for  it  has 
opened  an  entirely  new  field  of  discovery  only 
secondary  in  importance  to  that  opened  up  by  the 
discovery  of  the  telescope.  That  is,  if  a  body  emit- 
110 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ting  light,  such  as  a  star  or  nebula,  is  in  motion 
either  toward  us  or  from  us,  this  motion  will  show 
in  its  spectrum.  If  the  body  approaches  us  the 
wave  lengths  of  the  ray  of  light  entering  the  spec- 
troscope are  of  greater  frequency  and  therefore 
shortened  in  length  and  all  the  lines  of  the  spec- 
trum show  a  shifting  toward  the  violet  end  of  the 
spectrum,  and  if  the  body  is  receding  from  us  the 
wave  lengths  are  of  less  frequency  and,  so,  longer 
and  all  lines  are  shifted  toward  the  red  end  of  the 
spectrum,  and  the  amount  of  the  shift  measures 
the  velocity  of  the  motion.  This  fact  enables  us 
to  confirm  the  time  of  rotation  of  different  portions 
of  the  sun's  disk  formerly  determined  by  means  of 
sun  spots.  It  also  tells  us  that  the  stars  are  moving 
and  that  the  motion  of  a  star  in  the  line  of  sight 
varies  from  a  few  miles  a  second  to  over  200  miles 
a  second  in  extreme  cases.  It  is  not  usual,  how- 
ever, to  find  stellar  motions  greater  than  forty  miles 
a  second  in  the  line  of  sight  though  the  actual  mo- 
tions may  be  considerably  greater.  It  shows  the 
great  accuracy  of  these  measurements  that  stellar 
motions  as  small  as  one-fifth  of  a  mile  a  second  can 
be  detected.  The  surprising  fact  has  been  indi- 
cated by  the  spectroscope  that  the  stars  least 
111 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


advanced  in  evolution  move  the  most  slowly,  and  as 
the  age  of  the  star  increases  the  velocity  increases. 
A  star  starts  in  the  beginning  with  hardly  any  mo- 
tion and  acquires  increasing  velocity.  It  is  now 
generally  believed  that  stars  form  in  the  regions  of 
the  Milky  Way  and  as  their  velocity  increases 
they  move  further  and  further  away  from  this 
plane. 

"We  can  no  more  than  touch  upon  a  few  of  the 
many  wonderful  truths  revealed  to  us  by  the  spec- 
troscope.  Stars  have  been  grouped  into  classes  ac- 
cording to  their  spectra.  There  is  the  Orion  type, 
often  called  the  Helium  type  from  the  prominence 
of  the  lines  of  that  element  in  the  spectra  of  such 
stars.  The  Sirian  type,  named  after  its  most  prom- 
inent member,  Sirius,  shows  hydrogen  lines  in  great 
intensity.  The  Calcium  type,  named  from  charac- 
teristic lines  of  calcium,  shows  intense  hydrogen 
lines  as  well.  The  Solar  type,  which  includes  our 
own  sun,  has  its  spectrum  crossed  by  numerous 
dark  metallic  lines  such  as  appear  in  the  solar 
spectrum,  and  also  hydrogen  lines.  In  the  type 
called  K,  which  is  next  in  evolution,  the  hydrogen 
lines  have  become  fainter  than  some  of  the  metallic 
lines.  In  the  type  last  in  evolution,  composed  of 
112 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


dark  reddish  stars  and  known  as  type  M,  the  spec- 
trum is  characterized  by  fhitings  due  to  titanium 
oxide.  It  is  considered  very  remarkable  that  spec- 
tra of  this  type  are  so  dominated  by  this  one  sub- 
stance. These  types  have  been  named  in  the  gen- 
erally accepted  order  of  evolution ;  a  star  may  pass 
in  its  life  through  all  these  different  stages. 
Earlier  than  the  Orion  stars  occur,  however,  stars 
of  type  O,  called  Wolf-Rayet  stars,  whose  spectra 
consist  of  bright  bands  on  a  faint,  continuous  back- 
ground. These  latter  stars  are  all  found  in  the 
plane  of  the  Milky  Way  and  at  great  distances, 
and  are  believed  to  come  first  in  evolution.  The 
great  Andromeda  nebula  shows  a  spectrum,  in 
which  most  of  the  lines  of  this  type  are  present. 

The  Orion  and  Sirian  stars,  which  come  early 
in  evolution,  are  blue-white  and  white  stars.  The 
solar  type  includes  the  yellow  stars  and  the  later 
types  the  reddish  stars. 

In  the  study  of  our  own  sun,  pressure,  magnetism 
and  radiation  are  all  detected  and  measured  by 
the  spectroscope.  Among  double  stars  we  are  find- 
ing, by  means  of  the  spectroscope,  an  ever-increas- 
ing number  that  are  so  close  together  that  they  are 
beyond  the  reach  of  the  most  powerful  telescopes, 
113 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


but  the  shifting  lines  of  the  spectrum  reveal  the 
mutual  revolution  of  the  two  components. 

In  this  modest  little  instrument  we  possess  a  key 
to  many  mysteries  of  the  heavens  that  would  other- 
wise be  forever  beyond  our  reach.  It  is  little  won- 
der that  the  astronomy  of  the  spectroscope  is  called 
the  "new  astronomy"  and  by  its  means  we  hope  to 
obtain  an  ever-increasing  knowledge  of  the  uni- 
verse. 


114 


CHAPTER  XVI 

SECRETS  OF  THE  SUN  REVEALED  BY  THE  SPECTROSCOPE 

•pKACTICALLY  all  that  man  knows  of  the  phys- 
•*•  ical  constitution  of  our  sun,  which  is  simply 
one  of  the  stars,  has  been  discovered  through 
painstaking  examination  of  several  thousand  fine 
dark  lines  in  the  solar  spectrum,  spoken  of  usually 
as  the  Frauenhofer  lines. 

These  investigations  have  been  carried  on  in  con- 
nection with  extensive  laboratory  experiments  with 
the  spectra  of  all  the  known  elements  found  upon 
our  planet. 

Not  only  the  nature  and  distribution  of  the  ele- 
ments that  exist  in  the  sun 's  atmosphere  have  been 
determined  in  this  way,  but  a  number  of  very  im- 
portant additional  facts  have  been  ascertained  as 
well,  such  as  the  magnetic  field  existing  in  sun 
spots  and  the  amount  of  pressure  prevailing  at 
115 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  sun's  surface.  All  the  various  forms  of  solar 
activity  are  constantly  being  recorded  in  the  lines 
of  the  solar  spectrum  and  to  interpret  the  evidence 
correctly  is  the  duty  of  the  astronomer  engaged  in 
solar  research. 

The  solar  spectrum  consists  of  a  continuous  band 
of  variegated  color  crossed  vertically  by  an  enor- 
mous number  of  fine  dark  lines,  fully  14,000  of 
which  have  been  mapped  and  their  wave  lengths 
determined  with  a  high  degree  of  accuracy. 

It  is,  of  course,  the  relative  positions  of  these 
dark  lines  in  the  spectrum  that  are  important  and 
not  the  bright,  continuous  band  of  color  upon  which 
they  arc  projected,  and  which  owes  its  origin  to  the 
intensely  hot  solar  core  of  incandescent  gases  under 
high  pressure.  The  dark  lines  originate  in  the 
cooler  solar  atmosphere  lying  just  above  the  visible 
solar  surface  and  are  in  reality  not  dark  except  by 
contrast.  Remove  the  brilliant  background  and 
they  appear  as  bright  lines.  This  is  exactly  what 
occurs  at  the  beginning  of  totality  at  the  time  of  a 
total  eclipse  of  the  sun  when  they  produce  what  is 
known  as  the  "reversed"  or  flash  spectrum. 

As  the  moon  passes  before  the  sun  the  solar  sur- 
face is  covered  more  and  more  until  finally  there 
116 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


comes  a  moment  when  the  last  slender  crescent  of 
light  disappears.  The  brilliant  background  has 
been  removed  and  the  portion  of  the  solar  atmos- 
phere lying  just  above  the  surface  of  the  sun  at 
the  rim  shines  forth  by  its  own  light.  The  lines  of 
the  spectrum  that  are  usually  black  on  a  bright 
background  are  now  brilliant  against  a  background 
that  is  black.  This  phenomenon  is  visible  at  the 
eastern  edge  of  the  sun  at  the  beginning  of  totality 
and  at  the  western  edge  at  the  end  and  is  referred 
to  as  the  flash  spectrum.  It  lasts  but  a  moment, 
as  this  lower  solar  envelope,  spoken  of  as  "the  re- 
versing layer"  since  it  reverses  the  solar  spectrum 
at  this  time,  is  very  shallow,  and  so  is  quickly  cov- 
ered by  the  moon. 

It  is  possible  to  compute  its  depth  from  the 
known  motion  of  the  moon  and  the  duration  of 
flash  spectrums  and  it  is  found  to  be  about  500 
miles.  In  this  layer  occur  the  dense  metallic  va- 
pors that  give  the  dark  lines  of  the  spectrum,  which 
are  called  absorption  lines  because  they  ab- 
sorb from  the  light  beyond  exactly  the  same  rays 
of  which  they  themselves  consist.  Since  to  each 
chemical  element  belongs  always  the  same  definite 
group  of  lines  in  the  spectrum,  unvarying  in  posi- 
117 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tion  even  under  a  wide  range  of  temperature  and 
pressure,  it  is  possible  to  determine  from  the  po- 
sitions of  the  various  lines  the  elements  to  which 
they  belong.  By  producing  the  spectra  of  all  the 
familiar  terrestrial  elements  in  the  laboratory,  by 
heating  them  to  incandescence  in  various  ways  and 
passing  their  light  through  the  spectroscope,  it  has 
become  possible  to  measure  and  map  the  lines  of 
all  known  substances  and  to  identify  them  as  far 
as  possible  with  the  lines  of  the  same  elements 
found  in  the  sun's  spectrum.  Since  the  light  from 
the  sun's  interior  gives  the  continuous  band  of 
color  it  is  the  gases  that  compose  the  sun's  atmos- 
phere and  not  the  sun's  interior  that  are  studied. 
Thirty-eight  terrestrial  elements  are  known  to 
exist  in  the  lower  solar  atmosphere.  These  are 
chiefly  the  metallic  elements  and  hydrogen  and 
helium.  Carbon  occurs  only  in  compounds  and  free 
oxygen  has  been  detected  with  great  difficulty. 
Titanium  oxide  is  found  in  abundance  in  sun  spots. 
Some  of  the  heavier  elements,  such  as  gold  and 
mercury,  are  missing,  but  this  may  be  due  to  the 
fact  that  the  heavier  elements  probably  lie  at  a 
greater  solar  depth  and  therefore  do  not  appear  in 
a  spectrum  belonging  to  the  higher  levels, 
118 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


It  is  a  peculiar  fact  that  none  of  the  "negative" 
elements  appear  in  the  solar  spectrum.  The  halo- 
gen group,  including  such  elements  as  chlorine  and 
bromine,  the  oxygen  group  including  the  import- 
ant element  sulphur  and  the  nitrogen  group  are 
not  to  be  found  in  the  sun,  though  nitrogen  appears 
in  the  form  of  cyanogen.  The  explanation  has 
been  offered  that  the  spectrum  of  an  element  is 
sometimes  entirely  suppressed  by  a  small  amount 
of  another  element.  The  spectral  lines  of  the  non- 
metals  are  apt  to  be  suppressed  by  the  metallic 
elements.  It  is  well-known  that  helium  does  not 
absorb  the  rays  from  the  solar  surface  and  does 
not  give  a  dark  absorption  line,  as  in  the  case  with 
all  other  known  gases.  This  is  in  flat  contra- 
diction to  one  of  the  fundamental  laws  of  spec- 
trum analysis.  This  is  simply  another  peculiarity 
of  this  very  unusual  gas.  It  occurs  in  abundance 
in  the  sun,  however,  and  its  characteristic  bright 
yellow  line  is  in  the  flash  spectrum  and  can  always 
be  seen  when  the  light  of  the  photosphere  is 
screened  off. 

Of  the  fourteen  thousand  dark  lines  of  the  solar 
spectrum  that  have  been  mapped,  one-third  are 
1 '  telluric ' y  lines  originating  in  our  own  atmosphere 
119 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


and  are  due  to  absorption  of  the  sun's  rays  by 
gases  in  the  earth's  atmosphere,  chiefly  oxygen, 
carbonic  acid  gas  and  water  vapor. 

The  origin  of  about  six  thousand  of  the  solar 
lines  is  still  undetermined  or  doubtful.  Some  of 
these  are  extremely  faint.  Of  course,  many  of 
them  may  belong  to  a  single  element.  There  is 
great  disparity  in  the  number  of  lines  belonging  to 
the  various  elements.  The  spectrum  of  iron  is 
represented  by  more  than  two  thousand  lines  in  the 
solar  spectrum,  calcium  by  about  seventy-five  and 
lead  by  only  one.  The  work  of  identifying  the  lines 
of  the  solar  spectrum  is  still  going  on  and  it  is  ex- 
pected that  all  the  doubtful  and  unknown  lines 
will  be  traced  to  their  origin  before  many  years. 

Changes  in  solar  temperature  and  pressure  regis- 
ter their  effect  upon  the  appearance  of  the  lines 
of  the  spectrum.  Motion  of  the  source  of  the  light 
toward  or  from  the  observer,  as  motion  of  the  west 
limb  of  the  sun  toward  the  earth  and  of  the  east 
limb  in  the  opposite  direction  due  to  the  rotation 
of  the  sun  on  its  axis,  causes  a  shift  of  all  the  spec- 
tral lines  toward  either  the  violet  or  the  red  end 
of  the  spectrum,  according  to  a  well  known  law  of 
spectrum  analysis.  The  periods  of  the  sun's  ro- 
120 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tation,  varying  according  to  latitude,  have  been 
accurately  determined  from  this  shifting  of  the 
dark  lines  of  the  spectrum. 

By  special  contrivance  light  can  be  reflected  from 
the  two  limbs  so  that  two  spectra  may  be  produced 
simultaneously,  the  one  from  one  limb  immediately 
above  the  one  from  the  other.  The  effect  of  the 
sun's  rotation  can  then  be  determined  very  accu- 
rately from  the  double  displacement  of  the  lines. 
The  lines  originating  in  the  earth's  atmosphere 
will  not  show  this  shift  and  can  be  readily  identi- 
fied at  this  time.  Increase  of  pressure  in  the  solar 
atmosphere  will  broaden  the  lines  and  shift  them 
all  slightly  toward  the  red.  The  continuous  spec- 
trum that  forms  the  background  of  the  dark  lines 
is  due  to  the  light  coming  from  the  sun's  interior 
where  the  pressure  is  so  great  that  the  lines  have 
probably  been  broadened  until  they  coalesce. 

Dark  absorption  lines  at  times  become  tempor- 
arily bright  in  the  centre  for  all  or  part  of  their 
length.  This  is  spoken  of  as  reversal  of  the  lines, 
and  is  due  to  a  hotter  source  of  light  suddenly 
being  thrown  in  front  of  a  cooler  gas.  This  fre- 
quently occurs  when  some  solar  eruption  causes  a 
sudden  upheaval  of  low  lying,  highly  heated  gases. 
121 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


It  is  often  seen  in  the  spectral  lines  of  promi- 
nences. 

At  times  double  reversals  of  lines  are  seen,  par- 
ticularly of  the  sodium  and  magnesium  lines.  In 
such  cases  the  bright  line  itself  widens  and  a  fine 
dark  line  appears  in  the  centre.  This  appears  to 
be  due  to  large  quantities  of  the  vapor  at  great 
density. 

The  dark  lines  of  the  spectrum  often  appear  dis- 
placed and  distorted,  due  to  a  sudden  upheaval  of 
gases  and  outbursts  of  solar  activity  in  the  vicinity 
of  prominences. 

A  most  important  effect  frequently  observed  in 
the  vicinity  of  sun  spots  is  that  known  as  the 
Zeeman  effect.  This  is  the  splitting  of  a  line  into 
two  or  more  components  of  opposite  polarity,  due 
to  the  presence  of  a  magnetic  field.  It  was  from 
observing  this  effect  that  Hale  discovered  the  mag- 
netic field  existing  in  sun  spots.  There  is  a  whirl- 
ing or  vortical  motion  in  sun  spot  regions  carrying 
along  electrically  charged  particles  that  produce 
the  magnetic  field.  In  fact,  it  has  been  found  re- 
cently that  the  whole  sun  is  in  a  magnetic  field 
whose  poles  agree  very  closely  with  the  sun 's  poles 
of  rotation,  and  it  is  also  possible  that  the  earth 
122 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


and  sun  may  be  in  magnetic  states  as  a  result  of 
their  rotation  and  that  all  rotating  bodies  are 
magnetic. 

It  has  been  possible  to  touch  upon  only  a  very 
few  of  the  most  important  facts  that  have  been 
discovered  from  careful  study  of  the  dark  lines  of 
the  solar  spectrum  made  with  that  most  valuable 
instrument,  the  spectroscope.  The  branch  of  solar 
physics  is  probably  the  most  fruitful  of  all  fields 
of  astronomical  research,  and  our  knowledge  of 
the  nature  of  the  sun  and  its  surroundings  is  in- 
creasing rapidly. 


123 


CHAPTER  XVII 

THE  SPOTS  ON  THE  SUN 

SUN  spots  appear  singly  and  in  groups  in  con- 
stantly recurring  cycles  upon  the  surface  of  the 
sun.  Near  what  is  known  as  the  period  of  sun 
spot  maximum,  the  photosphere  or  visible  solar  sur- 
face is  never  clear.  It  is  often  possible  at  such  a 
time  to  count  as  many  as  fifty  spots  occurring 
singly  or  in  groups.  Large  single  spots  are  less 
frequent  than  groups  consisting  of  a  fairly  large 
spot  accompanied  by  a  train  of  smaller  ones.  Spots 
vary  greatly  in  size.  Isolated  spots  frequently  at- 
tain a  diameter  five  times  that  of  the  earth,  and 
sun  spot  groups  at  times  cover  an  area  of  more 
than  one-tenth  of  the  sun's  diameter. 

The  average  duration  of  a  sun  spot  is  two  or 
three  months,  though  some  last  only  a  few  days. 
They  are  carried  across  the  solar  disk  from  west 
124 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


to  east,  and  the  average  time  it  takes  a  spot  to  per- 
form a  revolution  is  twenty-seven  and  one-fourth 
days.  Different  spots  show  considerable  difference 
in  time  of  rotation,  as  we  should  expect,  for  the 
sun's  period  of  rotation  is  not  constant  as  is  the 
case  with  the  earth,  but  varies  greatly  for  different 
solar  latitudes.  Spots,  moreover,  have  slight  mo- 
tions of  their  own  which  affect  their  time  of  revo- 
lution. A  spot  is  visible  continuously  for  about 
two  weeks,  appearing  at  the  western  edge  of  the 
sun  and  disappearing  over  the  eastern  edge,  to  re- 
appear once  more  at  the  western  limb  after  two 
weeks  have  elapsed,  provided  it  has  not  'suffered 
dissolution  in  the  meantime.  Spots  often  appear 
and  reappear  for  several  successive  solar  rotations 
with  no  marked  change  of  form. 

At  times  a  sun  spot  will  form  in  a  single  day, 
again  it  will  require  days  or  even  weeks  for  com- 
plete development.  Usually  there  is  disturbance  of 
the  solar  surface  for  some  time  before  the  appear- 
ance of  a  spot.  Many  brilliant  faculae,  which  are 
intensely  bright  flecks  upon  the  sun's  surface, 
make  their  appearances,  and  among  these  are  scat- 
tered very  small,  black  dots  which  gradually  en- 
large. Between  the  black  djots  appear  grayish 
125 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


patches,  which  have  the  appearance  of  a  veiled  dark 
mass.  This  veil  gradually  fades  away  and  we  see 
the  perfected  spot.  This  consists  of  a  dark  central 
portion  or  umbra  and  an  extensive  grayish  penum- 
bra. The  black  dots  either  coalesce  with  the  prin- 
cipal spot  or  disappear  or  go  to  form  an  attendant 
train  of  smaller  spots. 

When  a  spot  is  formed  it  is  usually  roughly  cir- 
cular in  form  and  remains  without  marked  change 
until  it  breaks  up.  When  this  occurs  the  surround- 
ing solar  surface  seems  to  crowd  in  upon  the  pe- 
numbra and  bridges  of  light  that  are  often  much 
brighter  than  the  average  solar  surface  span  the 
umbra  or  dark  central  portions.  The  spot  disap- 
pears as  if  overwhelmed  and  the  disturbed  surface 
is  again  covered  with  the  brilliant  flecks  or  faculae 
which  are  regions  of  intensely  high  temperature. 
Frequently  the  disturbance  breaks  forth  anew  at 
the  same  spot  after  a  few  days'  interval  and  an- 
other spot  may  appear  exactly  where  the  old  one 
disappeared.  This  appearance  and  disappearance 
may  be  repeated  several  times.  Occasionally  a 
large  spot  divides  into  two  or  more  and  the  parts 
seem  to  repel  each  other  and  fly  asunder  with  a 
velocity  that  may  reach  as  high  as  a  thousand  miles 
126 


THE   GREAT    NEBULA   IN   ORION 
(Photographed  by  Ritchey  with  the  2-ft.  reflector  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory) 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

an.  hour.  This  repulsion  probably  arises  from  the 
fa  ct  that  a  strong  magnetic  field  exists  in  sun  spots, 
adjacent  spots  frequently  being  of  opposite  po- 
larity. 

When  a  sun  spot  is  forming,  eruptive  promi- 
nences appear  in  the  immediate  neighborhood. 
These  are  upshooting  jets  of  gases  that  attain  a 
height  of  20,000  or  30,000  miles  on  the  average. 
Tiey  are  varied  and  beautiful  in  appearance  and 
change  in  form  with  great  rapidity,  often  at  a  rate 
oi  100  miles  a  second. 

Sun  spots  are  confined  to  certain  definite  zones 
or  belts  upon  the  sun's  surface.  They  are  never 
found  at  the  equator  or  poles.  In  fact,  their  ap- 
pearance beyond  forty  degrees  north  and  south  of 
tie  equator  is  extremely  rare.  They  usually  ap- 
pear between  ten  degrees  and  thirty  degrees  north 
and  south  latitudes,  and  in  the  long  run  appear  as 
frequently  in  one  hemisphere  as  the  other. 

The  periodicity  of  sun  spots  is  one  of  the  most  in- 
teresting and  most  puzzling  facts  concerning  them. 
Within  a  period  whose  average  length  is  about 
ebven  years,  sun  spots  go  through  a  cycle  of  maxi- 
mum and  minimum  appearance.  At  time  of  maxi- 
mum spottedness  the  sun's  surface  is  never  free 
127 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


from  spots;  at  the  minimum  weeks  may  pass  with- 
out the  appearance  of  a  single  spot.  Although  the 
average  cycle  is  eleven  years,  individual  periods 
may  vary  greatly,  running  from  seven  to  seventeen 
years  in  duration.  Attempts  have  been  made  to 
show  that  a  larger  period  of  thirty-three  and  one- 
third  years  exists,  of  which  the  smaller  periods  are 
subdivisions.  When  we  know  the  cause  of  the  sun 
spot  cycle  we  shall  have  advanced  far  in  the  solu- 
tion of  the  mystery  of  sun  spots  and  all  their  num- 
erous allied  phenomena. 

Sun  spot  spectra  have  been  extensively  studied 
and  much  has  been  learned  from  this  means  of 
investigation.  They  show  the  presence  of  strong 
magnetic  fields  as  well  as  a  marked  cooling  of  over- 
lying gases,  and  the  presence  within  spots  of  such 
compounds  as  titanium  oxide  and  calcium  and 
magnesium  hydride.  These  compounds  could  only 
form  at  comparatively  low  temperature  and  it  is 
assumed  that  sun  spots  are  regions  of  cooler  solar 
temperature  of  about  3,500  degrees  C.,  as  com- 
pared with  6,000  degrees  C.  for  the  remainder  of 
the  photosphere. 

The  presence  of  the  compounds  above  mentioned 
gives  the  sun  spot  spectra  their  peculiar  fluted  ap- 
128 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


pearance,  which  is  also  seen  in  the  red  type  of 
stars.  This  is  very  significant  when  we  consider 
that  the  red  stars  are  the  older  and  cooler  stars. 
Are  sun  spots  then  one  of  the  signs  of  the  sun's 
advancing  age  ?  And  will  they  increase  in  size  and 
importance  as  the  sun  grows  older? 

Sun  spots,  it  is  now  believed,  are  manifestations 
of  some  deep-lying  disturbance  that  is  of  far-reach- 
ing importance.  Many  phenomena  go  through 
cycles  of  change  in  keeping  with  the  sun  spot  cycle. 
Among  these  are  magnetic  storms  and  magnetic 
disturbances  upon  the  earth  which  are  closely  de- 
pendent upon  the  sun  spot  period.  Severe  mag- 
netic storms  upon  the  earth  occur  at  a  time  when 
the  sun's  face  is  strongly  spotted,  and  displays  of 
northern  and  southern  lights  are  also  most  marked 
at  this  time.  The  general  surface  air  temperature 
of  the  earth  is  lower  by  about  a  degree  at  the  time 
of  maximum  spottedness  of  the  sun. 

One  of  the  most  marked  effects  of  the  sun  spot 
cycle  is  the  form  of  the  solar  corona,  which  is  only 
visible  at  time  of  total  solar  eclipse.  At  the  time 
of  a  maximum  sun  spot  period  the  corona  is  an 
evenly  developed  halo  surrounding  the  sun.  At 
the  sun  spot  minimum  it  shows  equatorial  stream- 
129 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ers  that  often  extend  to  a  distance  of  several  times 
the  sun's  diameter,  while  on  either  side  of  the 
solar  poles  only  short  filaments  of  light  appear. 
So  decided  are  these  changes  in  the  form  of  the 
corona  with  the  change  in  the  sun  spot  period  that 
the  two  types  are  spoken  of  as  '  i  the  sun  spot  max- 
imum corona"  and  "the  sun  spot  minimum  co- 
rona." 

As  to  what  causes  these  periodic  outbreaks  upon 
the  solar  surface  we  are  still  in  the  dark.  Some 
astronomers  believe  they  are  caused  by  external 
influences  such  as  periodic  returns  of  swarms  of 
meteors  or  returns  of  certain  planetary  configura- 
tions. Careful  and  long-continued  observations 
seem  to  show  that  sun  spots  are  rather  the  result  of 
internal  disturbances  which  cause  a  transference  of 
solar  matter  from  within  outward  in  a  cyclonic  mo- 
tion, which  has  been  compared  in  form  to  that  of 
whirling  waterspouts  at  sea.  The  central  stem 
forms  the  umbra  and  the  outspreading  gases  the 
penumbra.  There  is  a  tendency  for  a  vacuum  to 
form  in  the  centre  of  the  whirl  and  into  this  is 
drawn  the  overlying  gases,  chiefly  hydrogen. 

The  rapid  expansion  of  gases  as  they  approach 
the  solar  surface  from  within  causes  a  sudden  cool- 
130 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ing,  which  accounts  for  the  comparatively  low 
temperature  in  spots  and  the  formation  of  such 
solids  as  titanium  oxide  and  the  hydrides  of  cal- 
cium and  magnesium.  These  dissimilar  substances, 
it  is  believed,  give  rise  by  friction  to  the  magnetic 
field  which  is  known  to  be  a  feature  of  sun  spots. 

It  is  hoped  that  continued  solar  research  will 
make  known  in  time  the  cause  of  these  peculiar 
periodic  disturbances  that  are  so  far  reaching  in 
their  effect. 


131 


CHAPTER  XVIII 

SOLAR  EXPLOSIONS 

\  MOST  interesting  discovery  has  been  made 
•**•  within  the  past  few  years  of  the  sudden,  but 
rather  infrequent,  appearance  at  the  surface  of 
the  sun  of  hydrogen  " bombs,"  as  they  have  been 
called. 

These  "bombs'*  are  apparently  violent  explo- 
sions of  highly  heated  hydrogen  gas  in  regions  of 
great  solar  activity.  At  times,  according  to  Dr. 
Ellerman,  of  the  Mount  Wilson  Observatory, 
who  discovered  them,  they  will  follow  one  another 
like  balls  of  a  Roman  candle  at  intervals  of  ten  or 
twenty  minutes.  The  duration  of  the  explosion  is 
usually  about  two  or  three  minutes,  more  rarely 
five  or  ten  minutes.  The  "bombs"  generally  ap- 
pear on  the  edge  or  at  one  side  of  active  sun  spot 
groups  that  are  developing  and  are  composed  of 
132 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

many  members.  Repeated  explosions  often  occur 
almost  exactly  in  the  same  place. 

The  presence  of  the  "bombs"  is  revealed  by  the 
appearance  of  two  intensely  brilliant  narrow  bands 
of  nearly  uniform  width  on  either  side  of  the  dark 
absorption  line  of  hydrogen  that  is  associated  with 
the  higher  solar  atmosphere.  The  fact  that  the 
dark  line  itself  is  not  interfered  with  nor  any 
other  of  the  absorption  lines  belonging  to  the  va- 
rious strata  of  the  sun's  atmosphere  shows  that 
the  explosions  occur  considerably  below  the  chro- 
mosphere, the  lowest,  densest  layer  of  the  solar 
envelopes,  in  which  are  to  be  found  the  majority 
of  all  the  gaseous  elements  that  compose  the  sun's 
atmosphere. 

The  area  covered  by  the  explosion  is  so  small 
that  the  bombs  can  only  be  seen  with  a  large  solar 
image  and  under  fine  "seeing"  condition.  Dr. 
Ellerman  first  saw  the  two  brilliant  bands  sud- 
denly appear  one  on  each  side  of  the  dark  absorp- 
tion line  of  hydrogen  in  September,  1915,  while  he 
was  observing  the  dark  line  for  distortions  and 
reversals  in  connection  with  an  active  sun  spot 
group. 

Within  two  minutes  the  bright  bands  disap- 
133 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


peared  and  were  not  seen  again.  A  month  later 
additional  explosions  were  recorded  visually  and 
photographically. 

The  phenomenon  of  the  solar  hydrogen  "bombs" 
has  now  been  recognized  for  some  time  as  an  estab- 
lished feature  of  solar  activity.  The  close  associa- 
tion of  hydrogen  with  sun  spots  in  the  form  of 
vast  eruptive  prominences  of  highly  heated  hydro- 
gen and  the  descent  of  cooler  hydrogen  from  the 
upper  solar  atmosphere  into  the  vortices  of  sun 
spots  has  long  been  known. 

A  most  valuable  instrument  employed  in  study- 
ing the  distribution  of  the  various  gases  in  the 
sun's  atmosphere  is  the  spectroheliograph,  which  is 
simply  a  moving  spectroscope  timed  to  travel  over 
the 'solar  disk  at  a  uniform  rate  with  the  slit  of  the 
instrument  so  adjusted  that  the  light  from  only 
one  line  of  an  element  in  the  solar  spectrum  is  ad- 
mitted to  the  eye  or  the  photographic  plate. 

In  this  way  the  distribution  of  the  vapors  of  in- 
candescent hydrogen  or  calcium,  iron  or  any  other 
element  at  different  levels  of  the  sun's  atmosphere 
can  be  studied  in  great  detail  as  well  as  the  con- 
nection of  these  elements  with  sun  spots  and  other 
solar  phenomena.  When  the  sun  is  viewed  with 
134 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  spectroheliograph  in  the  light  of  a  single  spec- 
tral line  of  hydrogen  it  is  possible  to  detect  the 
presence  of  the  flames  of  incandescent  hydrogen  in 
the  prominences  by  their  projection  on  the  sun's 
disk  as  irregular  dark  patches  or  streaks  as  well  as 
to  study  their  infinite  variety  of  forms  when  the 
slit  of  the  instrument  is  set  at  the  edge  of  the  sun's 
disk. 

When  the  surface  of  the  sun  is  viewed  telescopic- 
ally,  it  presents  a  peculiar  mottled  appearance,  or 
rice-grained  structure,  as  it  is  called.  The  spec- 
troheliograph shows  that  this  same  structure  is 
found  in  the  chromosphere  and  in  the  higher  solar 
atmosphere.  The  rice  grains  of  the  sun's  surface 
are  intensely  brilliant  flecks  of  light,  each  com- 
posed of  a  great  number  of  minute  granules  or 
mere  points  of  light. 

The  rice  grains  are  usually  about  400  miles  in 
diameter,  while  the  granules  measure  less  than  ten 
miles  across.  In  sun  spots  these  minute  granules 
are  replaced  by  minute  filaments  that  group  them- 
selves into  the  familiar  " thatch  straw"  structure 
of  the  penumbra  that  surrounds  the  umbra  or  dark 
central  portion  of  sun  spots. 

It  is  now  believed  that  the  granules  and  the  fila- 
135 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ments  are  all  the  same.  Columns  of  highly  heated 
gases  arise  by  convection  from  the  sun's  interior. 
The  granules  are  cross  section  views  of  these  ver- 
tical columns.  In  the  vicinity  of  sun  spots  the 
ascending  columns  of  gases  are  drawn  into  posi- 
tions more  or  less  at  right  angles  to  their  normal 
positions  by  the  whirling  vortical  motion  existing 
in  sun  spot  regions,  and  they  then  appear  as  the 
long,  slender  filaments  that  form  the  thatch  straw 
structure  of  the  penumbra  of  sun  spots. 

Now  the  spectroheliograph  shows  in  the  layers 
of  the  sun's  atmosphere  above  the  photosphere  the 
same  peculiar  structure.  The  "flocculi"  of  hydro- 
gen and  calcium  resemble  in  appearance  the  rice 
grains  of  the  sun's  surface.  These  flocculi  are 
ascending  columns  of  expanding  and  cooling  hy- 
drogen and  calcium  vapors  that  rise  far  above  the 
level  of  the  photosphere,  or  visible  surface  of  the 
sun. 

It  is  an  interesting  fact  that  different  spectral 
lines  of  an  element  usually  are  associated  with  dif- 
ferent levels  of  the  sun 's  atmosphere.  The  element 
hydrogen,  for  instance,  has  lines  in  the  red  end  of 
the  spectrum  and  lines  in  the  violet.  The  red  rays 
of  any  element  in  the  sun  rise  normally  to  a  much 
136 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

higher  level  than  the  violet  rays,  for  the  rays  of 
shortest  wave  length,  violet  and  ultra-violet  rays 
are  more  liable  to  be  trapped  in  the  denser  lower 
atmosphere  of  the  sun,  while  the  longer  red  rays 
escape. 

By  setting  the  spectroheliograph  on  the  violet 
lines  of  hydrogen  the  distribution  of  hydrogen  in 
the  lower  levels  can  be  studied,  and  by  setting  on 
the  hydrogen  lines  in  the  red  the  scarlet  flames  of 
incandescent  hydrogen  gas  in  the  prominences  that 
reach  to  heights  of  100,000  or  200,000  miles  above 
the  photosphere  can  be  exhaustively  examined. 

It  is  possible  that  there  are  rays  of  extremely 
short  wave  length  in  the  sun's  interior  that  never 
reach  the  photosphere,  but  are  imprisoned  far  be- 
neath, while  the  red,  orange  and  green  rays  of  the 
various  elements  escape  readily  to  the  surface  and 
the  higher  atmosphere  of  the  sun.  As  a  result  the 
sun  presents  a  decidedly  yellowish  hue  to  the  eye. 

The  calcium  flocculi  representing  highly  heated 
columns  of  calcium  gas  are  bright  flecks  on  a  dark 
background,  for  they  are  at  a  higher  temperature 
than  the  surrounding  gases,  which  appear  dark  by 
contrast,  but  still  higher  up,  where  hydrogen  alone 
persists,  the  hydrogen  flocculi  appear  dark  against 
137 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


a  bright  background  of  diffused  gases,  for  at  the 
reduced  temperature  of  the  higher  level  the  ex- 
panded and  cooled  hydrogen  shows  its  presence  by 
absorption. 

Photographs  of  these  upper  regions  taken  with 
the  slit  of  the  spectroscope  set  on  the  hydrogen  line 
characteristic  of  this  elevation  show  most  interest- 
ingly the  peculiar  distribution  of  hydrogen  gas 
here.  Irregular  dark  streaks  projected  upon  the 
sun's  disk  show  the  presence  of  eruptive  or  quies- 
cent prominences.  Above  sun  spots  or  sun  spot 
groups  the  hydrogen  flocculi  are  curved  either  in 
clockwise  or  counter-clockwise  direction,  showing 
that  a  whirling  motion  of  the  hydrogen  gas  exists 
and  that  it  is  being  sucked  downward  with  a  cy- 
clonic motion  into  the  umbrae  of  the  sun  spots  that 
lie  at  the  level  of  the  solar  surface. 

The  revelations  of  the  spectroheliograph  are, 
therefore,  rich  in  information  concerning  the  dis- 
tribution and  behavior  of  the  gases  that  are  found 
at  the  surface  of  the  sun  and  in  all  the  different 
layers  of  its  atmosphere. 

It  pictures  a  sun  of  explosions,  eruptions  and 
ceaseless  activity.  Countless  columns  of  highly 
heated  gases  of  many  elements  rise  to  the  surface 
138 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


and  penetrate  in  some  instances  even  into  the 
higher  solar  atmosphere,  the  lightest  elements  at- 
taining the  greatest  heights,  later  to  descend  in 
cooler  streams  or  cyclonic  whirls  to  the  photosphere 
and  the  sun  spot  regions. 


139 


CHAPTER  XIX 

SOME  RECENT  TOTAL  SOLAR  ECLIPSES  AND  THEIR  VALUE 
TO  ASTRONOMY 

CLIPS ES  as  well  as  comets  were  always  hailed 
in  ancient  times  with  dire  misgivings,  and 
even  at  the  present  day  the  uneducated  and 
ignorant  of  all  lands  are  not  entirely  free  from 
fear  and  superstition  regarding  these  celestial  hap- 
penings. Up  to  a  few  centuries  ago  it  was  firmly 
believed  that  such  phenomena  heralded  some 
ominous  change  and  there  are  instances  in  history 
of  abandonment  of  certain  enterprises  and  even 
cessation*  of  battles  and  a  peace  hastily  concluded 
due  to  the  sudden  darkening  of  the  sun's  face. 
In  modern  times,  on  the  contrary,  we  find  scientists 
bending  every  effort  to  observe  all  total  eclipses 
of  the  sun  in  whatever  portion  of  the  world  they 
may  chance  to  fall  that  they  may  extend  their 
14Q 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


knowledge  of  the  wonderful  physical  constitution 
of  our  sun  and  its  mysterious  coronal  halo.  To 
obtain  observations  during  a  few  fleeting  moments 
many  hardships  have  been  undergone  by  eclipse 
expeditions.  Many  disappointments  have  also 
been  experienced  in  connection  with  this  work. 

The  French  astronomer  Janssen  escaped  from 
Paris  in  a  balloon  at  the  time  of  the  siege  of  Paris 
in  1870,  carrying  the  essential  parts  of  his  instru- 
ments with  him  for  the  purpose  of  observing  the 
total  eclipse  of  the  sun  visible  that  year  in  Spain 
and  Africa,  only  to  be  defeated  by  clouds. 

War  as  well  as  clouds  has  been  the  enemy  of 
many  an  eclipse  expedition.  At  the  beginning  of 
1914  elaborate  plans  were  well  advanced  in  many 
lands  for  observation  of  the  total  eclipse  of  Aug.  21, 
1914,  visible  in  Europe  from  Norway  and  Sweden 
through  Russia  to  Persia,  with  a  duration  of  about 
two  minutes.  All  the  leading  countries  of  Europe, 
Argentina  and  the  United  States  sent  eclipse  ex- 
peditions to  Russia  in  the  neighborhood  of  Riga 
and  Kiev.  Many  expeditions  were  in  the  field  set- 
ting up  complicated  photographic  and  spectro- 
scopic  outfits  and  practising  preliminary  drills  that 
all  might  go  smoothly  during  the  critical  moments, 
141 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


even  as  the  armies  of  Europe  were  mobilizing  for 
the  greatest  war  in  the  history  of  the  world.  A 
few  parties  were  successful  in  spite  of  war  and 
generally  prevailing  clouds,  but  the  majority  were 
either  turned  back  before  reaching  their  destina- 
tion or  experienced  extreme  difficulty  in  returning 
to  their  homes.  Several  German  observers  were 
detained  as  prisoners  of  war  in  Russia.  The  Lick 
Observatory  expedition  was  compelled  to  return  by 
way  of  Moscow,  Finland  and  Sweden  instead  of  by 
way  of  Berlin  and  Paris,  as  was  originally  planned, 
while  their  instruments  were  kept  in  Russia  for 
nearly  four  years. 

The  first  American  eclipse  expedition  ever 
formed  was  sent  to  Penobscot  in  the  War  of  the 
American  Revolution.  The  first  total  eclipse  to  be 
observed  scientifically  to  any  extent  in  North 
America  was  the  eclipse  of  July  18,  1860.  Three 
American  observers,  including  Prof.  Simon  New- 
comb,  the  noted  American  astronomer,  penetrated 
to  the  banks  of  the  Saskatchewan  to  observe  this 
eclipse,  while  the  astronomer,  Gilliss  traveled  to 
Washington  Territory  by  way  of  Panama  for  the 
same  purpose,  and  was  amply  rewarded  by  ex- 
cellent views  of  the  solar  prominences  and  the 
142 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


corona.  Another  American  expedition  sent  to 
Labrador  was  defeated  by  clouds.  From  that  date 
to  the  present  time  American  eclipse  expeditions 
have  been  sent  to  the  path  of  totality  of  every 
important  solar  eclipse,  whether  in  Europe,  Asia, 
Africa  or  South  America. 

The  eclipse  of  the  8th  of  June,  1918,  was  a 
return  of  the  total  eclipse  of  May  28,  1900,  so  suc- 
cessfully observed  by  a  large  number  of  eclipse 
expeditions  in  the  Southern  States  from  New 
Orleans  to  Norfolk.  After  an  interval  of  eighteen 
years,  eleven  and  one-third  days,  which  is  spoken 
of  as  the  eclipse  Saros,  the  earth,  sun  and  moon 
returned  to  practically  the  same  relative  positions 
in  the  heavens  and  all  the  circumstances  of  the 
previous  eclipse  are  repeated  except  for  the 
fact  that  the  fraction  of  a  day  in  the  period 
causes  the  eclipse  to  fall  120  degrees  westward  of 
its  former  position,  the  amount  of  the  earth's  rota- 
tion on  its  axis  in  this  interval  of  time.  In  conse- 
quence a  different  portion  of  the  earth's  surface  is 
visited  by  each  returning  eclipse  of  a  given  series. 
The  eclipse  of  May  17, 1882,  lasting  only  one  minute 
and  a  half,  but  observed  with  great  success  by 
many  eclipse  expeditions  in  Egypt  on  the  banks 
143 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  the  Nile,  belongs  to  this  same  eclipse  family. 
The  next  return  of  the  eclipse  of  June  8  will  fall 
upon  June  19,  1936,  and  its  path  will  extend  from 
the  Mediterranean  through  southern  Russia  and 
Asia  to  the  Pacific  coast. 

Since  the  path  of  totality  of  the  eclipse  of  June  8, 
1918,  passed  diagonally  across  the  United  States 
from  Washington  to  Florida,  eclipse  expeditions 
were  sent  to  the  central  line  from  nearly  all  the 
leading  observatories  in  the  country.  No  foreign 
expeditions  were  in  the  field  on  account  of  the  war 
and  many  American  astronomers  were  unable  to 
observe  the  eclipse  for  the  same  reason. 

Since  it  has  now  become  possible  to  study  the 
solar  prominences  without  the  aid  of  total  eclipses 
and  since  the  search  for  intra-mercurial  planets 
appears  to  yield  negative  results,  scientific  interest 
has  centred  of  late  years  chiefly  upon  the  elusive 
coronal  light,  its  nature  and  its  cause  and  the 
character  of  the  peculiar  unknown  gas  coronium 
of  which  it  is  largely  composed.  Much  is  to  be 
expected  from  future  investigations  along  this  line, 
but  progress  is  necessarily  slow,  for  so  faint  is 
the  coronal  light  that  the  least  percentage  of  direct 
sunlight  completely  masks  it.  So  it  is  only  when 
144 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  friendly  moon  interposes  between  the  earth 
and  sun  and  completely  hides  the  solar  surface 
that  the  beautiful  pearly  radiance  of  the  corona 
may  be  seen. 

According  to  the  reports  of  astronomers  who 
observed  the  eclipse  highly  satisfactory  results  were 
obtained  by  many  of  the  eclipse  parties  stationed 
between  Washington  and  Kansas  despite  the  fact 
that  clouds  gathered  all  along  the  path  of  totality 
within  the  United  States.  The  success  of  the  ma- 
jority of  the  expeditions  is  to  be  attributed  to 
breaks  in  the  overhanging  clouds  occurring  just  at 
the  critical  time. 

According  to  the  report  of  Prof.  W.  W.  Camp- 
bell, director  of  the  Lick  Observatory,  who  was  in 
charge  of  the  Crocker  eclipse  expedition  at  Golden- 
dale,  Wash.,  observers  at  this  station  were  pre- 
paring to  accept  complete  defeat  from  dense  clouds 
that  overspread  the  sky  from  midnight  of  June  7 
to  past  midnight  of  June  8,  when  within  less  than 
one  minute  of  total  eclipse  a  sudden  break  in  the 
clouds  uncovered  an  intensely  blue  strip  of  sky 
and  the  thin  solar  crescent.  The  entire  eclipse 
programme  was  most  unexpectedly  carried  out  with 
complete  success. 

145 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Less  than  one  minute  after  the  end  of  totality 
clouds  once  more  covered  the  scene  of  the  phe- 
nomenon. The  "  seeing "  at  the  critical  time  was 
magnificent  and  the  expedition  became  almost  by  a 
miracle  the  most  successful  expedition  ever  sent 
out  from  the  Lick  Observatory. 

Twenty-six  excellent  photographs  of  the  corona 
were  taken  at  Goldendale,  ten  with  the  forty-foot 
camera  on  a  large  scale  and  eight  each  with  a 
forty-eight-inch  coronal  camera  of  three-inch  aper- 
ture and  an  eleven-inch  coronal  camera  designed 
for  landscape  work.  The  last  two  cameras  were 
suitable  for  showing  the  general  outline  and  form 
of  the  corona  and  the  extent  of  the  streamers.  The 
longest  coronal  streamers  recorded  at  Goldendale 
were  approximately  three  solar  diameters,  or  two 
and  one-half  million  miles,  in  length. 

Six  spectroscopic  instruments  mounted  on  a 
single  polar  axis  registered  valuable  spectra  of  the 
corona  and  prominences,  as  well  as  of  the  chromo- 
sphere or  lower  solar  atmosphere. 

The  corona  was  particularly  beautiful  in  form, 

belonging  to  the  variety  known  as  a  "petal-formed" 

corona,  a  type  occasionally  noted  in  past  eclipses. 

The  "petals"  are  the  result  of  rifts  in  the  coronal 

146 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


streamers  and  the  crossing  of  curved  rays.  Seven 
distinct  petals  were  noted  in  the  June  eclipse. 

Many  observers  described  the  corona  as  unusu- 
ally brilliant  and  of  an  intense  blue-white  color. 
In  shape  it  was  roughly  triangular,  the  long 
streamers  to  the  east  of  the  sun  forming  the  apex 
and  the  more  evenly  distributed  streamers  to  the 
west  the  base  of  the  triangle. 

The  spectrum  of  the  inner  corona  was  "continu- 
ous/* that  is  a  continuous  band  of  variegated  color 
with  no  dark  absorption  lines,  showing  that  It 
shone  by  its  own  inherent  light  and  not  by  re- 
flected sunlight.  The  outlying  portions  of  tne 
corona  showed  the  faint  absorption  lines  of  the 
solar  atmosphere  and  therefore  it  was  evident  that 
part  of  its  brightness  was  due  to  reflected  light 
from  the  sun. 

At  least  five  unidentified  bright  lines  were  found 
in  the  coronal  spectrum  and  their  wave-lengths 
were  measured,  while  the  existence  of  seven  other 
bright  coronal  lines  was  suspected.  The  nature  of 
the  element  or  elements  connected  with  these  lines 
is  undetermined,  though  several  of  the  lines  doubt- 
less belong  to  the  unknown  element  coronium. 

The  wave-length  of  the  characteristic  green  line 
147 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  coronium  was  accurately  measured  from  spec- 
troscopic  observations  obtained  during  this  eclipse, 
which  will  aid  greatly  in  its  future  identification. 

The  chromosphere,  appearing  as  an  extremely 
narrow  orange-colored  rim  of  light  surrounding  the 
sun  and  composed  of  incandescent  gases  of  many 
metallic  elements,  contrasted  beautifully  with  the 
pearly  light  of  the  corona  tinged  with  the  green 
rays  of  the  unknown  coronium  whose  nature  as- 
tronomers are  most  anxious  to  discover  from  ob- 
servations obtained  during  total  eclipses  of  the  sun. 

Rising  from  the  chromosphere  are  usually  seen 
during  totality  a  number  of  "prominences,"  up- 
shooting  flames  of  incandescent  hydrogen  gas  of  a 
deep  scarlet  hue.  These  outbursts  of  incandescent 
gases  from  the  dense  lower  strata  of  the  solar  at- 
mosphere are  at  times  very  conspicuous  and  add 
to  the  weird  beauty  of  this  unusual  scene. 

Even  to  the  unaided  eye  the  prominences  of 
June  8,  1918,  were  a  most  beautiful  feature  of 
totality.  Three  huge  blood  red  prominences,  vary- 
ing from  45,000  to  60,000  miles  in  height,  were 
visible  120  degrees  apart.  Though  they  were  not 
higher  than  the  average,  their  structure  was  ex- 
tremely interesting.  One  of  these  on  the  west  edge 
148 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  the  sun  was  likened  to  the  skeleton  of  some 
prehistoric  monster.  A  number  of  other  minor 
prominences  were  visible,  and  the  north  and  south 
poles  of  the  sun  chanced  to  be  marked  by  two 
bright  prominences. 

Several  of  the  prominences  were  capped  in  a 
most  peculiar  manner  by  curved  coronal  rays  re- 
sembling Gothic  arches.  The  apexes  of  several  of 
these  arches  lay  at  a  distance  of  fully  200,000  miles 
above  the  solar  surface.  There  appeared  to  be 
some  connection  between  the  coronal  arches  and 
the  prominences.  Doubtless  the  same  force  that 
caused  the  upheaval  of  the  gases  composing  the 
prominences  also  produced  the  peculiar  coronal 
caps  above  them. 

The  coloring  of  the  solar  surroundings  during 
totality  of  the  June  eclipse  has  been  described  by 
those  who  were  privileged  to  observe  it  as  gorgeous 
beyond  description.  The  deep  orange  tinge  of  the 
chromosphere,  contrasting  with  the  intensely  bril- 
liant blue-white  light  of  the  coronal  rays  curved 
mto  beautiful  petal-like  formations,  and  the  huge 
blood  red  prominences  presented  a  weird  effect 
never  to  be  forgotten. 

The  great  value  of  the  next  total  solar  eclipse, 
149 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


that  of  May  29,  1919,  lay  both  in  its  extraordinary 
duration,  amounting  to  nearly  seven  minutes  at 
maximum  and  far  exceeding  the  average  totality  of 
three  minutes,  and  also  in  the  fact  that  the  eclipsed 
sun  was  to  be  in  a  field  particularly  rich  in  stars, 
midway  between  the  Hyades  and  the  Pleiades,  a 
position  unusually  favorable  for  testing  the  new 
theories  bearing  on  the  nature  of  light  and  the 
influence  of  the  sun's  gravitational  and  magnetic 
field  upon  the  path  of  a  ray  of  light. 

The  belt  of  totality  in  this  eclipse  started  on 
the  western  coast  of  South  America,  the  boundary 
between  Chile  and  Peru  falling  nearly  on  the  cen- 
tral line,  and  the  northern  limit  of  totality  passing 
only  a  few  miles  south  of  the  Harvard  College 
observatory  station  at  Arequipa,  Peru. 

Here  the  sun  rose  partially  eclipsed,  so  it  was 
not  expected  that  valuable  observations  would  be 
obtained  with  the  sun  so  close  to  the  horizon. 
Passing  over  the  towns  of  La  Paz  and  Trinidad  in 
Bolivia,  the  path  of  totality  entered  Brazil,  crossed 
to  the  Atlantic  Ocean  at  a  point  about  three  de- 
grees south  of  the  equator,  passing  almost  centrally 
over  the  towns  of  Caxias  and  Sobral,  where  the 
duration  was  to  be  over  five  minutes,  and  then 
150 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


crossed  the  Atlantic  Ocean  to  Cape  Palmas,  Liberia. 

At  St.  Paul's  Rocks  in  mid- Atlantic,  at  latitude 
one  degree  north  and  longitude  thirty  degrees  west, 
the  total  phase  was  to  last  more  than  six  minutes. 
Bending  southward  from  Liberia  the  path  of  total 
eclipse  passed  over  He  Principe,  or  Prince's  Island, 
in  the  Gulf  of  Guinea,  and  Libreville  in  the  French 
Congo;  thence  across  the  African  continent  to  the 
Indian  Ocean,  the  sun  setting  partially  eclipsed 
over  the  island  of  Madagascar. 

British  astronomers  organized  two  eclipse  expe- 
ditions to  observe  this  eclipse.  Both  expeditions 
were  equipped  at  the  Eoyal  Observatory  at  Green- 
wich and  left  England  about  the  middle  of  March, 
one  under  Astronomers  Crommelin  and  Davidson 
for  Sobral  in  northern  Brazil,  and  the  other,  under 
Prof.  Eddington  and  Mr.  Cottingham,  for  He  Prin- 
cipe in  the  Gulf  of  Guinea.  At  both  stations  the 
total  phase  of  the  eclipse  was  to  last  more  than  five 
minutes,  and  it  was  the  plan  of  the  observers  to 
concentrate  all  their  efforts  on  testing  the  new 
theories  of  light  and  the  effect  of  gravitation  upon 
the  course  of  a  ray  of  light. 

The  Bureau  of  Terrestrial  Magnetism  of  the 
Carnegie  Institute,  under  the  directorship  of 
151 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Dr.  L.  A.  Bauer,  made  extensive  plans  for  mag- 
netic and  other  allied  observations  of  this  eclipse. 
Dr.  Bauer  left  for  England  early  in  March,  where 
he  organized  an  expedition  to  be  stationed  either 
at  He  Principe  or  Libreville  in  the  French  Congo. 
From  there  he  proceeded  to  South  America  to 
arrange  for  similar  observations  near  Sobral,  as 
well  as  at  a  number  of  stations  outside  the  belt  of 
totality.  Various  magnetic  observatories,  institu- 
tions and  individuals  offered  their  co-operation  for 
this  purpose. 

Dr.  C.  G.  Abbot,  director  of  the  astrophysical 
observatory  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  left 
Washington  the  first  of  May  for  South  America 
to  observe  the  eclipse  near  Sobral,  which  was  the 
chief  station  for  observations  on  this  continent. 
The  eclipse  was  to  occur  in  the  early  morning  at 
this  point,  mid-totality  coming  shortly  after  9 
o'clock,  while  at  Libreville,  in  the  French  Congo, 
totality  was  to  occur  shortly  before  3  o'clock  in 
the  afternoon,  local  time. 

The  problem  that  the  observers  of  this  eclipse 

were  anxious  to  solve  is  whether  or  not  light  obeys 

the  laws  of  gravitation  and  is  deflected  from  its 

course  upon  entering  the  field  of  the  sun's  attrac- 

152 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tion.  Prof.  Eddington,  who  was  to  observe  the 
eclipse  in  the  French  Congo,  characterized  it  as  the 
problem  of  " weighing  light." 

According  to  the  most  recent  theories  light  can 
no  longer  be  regarded  as  an  elastic  wave  motion 
of  the  universal  ether  that  has  been  assumed  to 
pervade  all  space,  but  rather  as  consisting  of  widely 
separated  centres  of  energy  whose  particles  vibrate 
singly. 

It  is  known  that  light  exerts  pressure  and  has 
a  finite  velocity  of  186,000  miles  per  second,  and 
therefore  it  is  reasonable  to  assume  that  it  pos- 
sesses mass,  momentum  and,  in  the  vicinity  of  a 
strongly  attractive  body  such  as  the  sun,  appre- 
ciable weight,  provided  it  obeys  the  laws  of  gravi- 
tation. It  was,  therefore,  to  see  if  light  is  com- 
posed of  material  particles  obeying  the  Newtonian 
law  of  gravitation  that  this  eclipse  was  to  be  ob- 
served. 

It  is  possible  to  determine  just  how  far  particles 
of  matter  coming  from  infinite  space,  in  this  in- 
stance rays  of  light  from  distant  stars  moving  with 
a  velocity  of  186,000  miles  per  second,  will  be  de- 
flected from  their  course  upon  entering  the  field 
of  the  sun's  attraction,  just  as  one  can  trace  the 
153 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


path  of  a  comet  or  meteor  under  the  same  con- 
ditions. 

It  can  be  shown  that  the  path  of  any  such  par- 
ticle will  have  the  form  of  a  hyperbola  con- 
cave toward  the  sun  and  that  the  nearer  the  par- 
ticles or  light  rays  come  to  the  sun's  edge  the 
greater  will  be  the  curvature  of  the  paths  and  the 
greater  the  apparent  displacement  of  the  stars 
away  from  the  sun.  For  a  ray  of  star  light  just 
grazing  the  eclge  of  the  sun  it  has  been  found  that 
a  displacement  of  nearly  one  second  of  arc  in  the 
star's  position  Is  to  be  looked  for  if  light  obeys 
the  law  of  gravitation.  This  would  be  the  greatest 
displacement,  for  the  nearer  the  rays  pass  to  the 
sun  the  more  strongly  they  are  attracted  and  the 
more  they  are  deflected  from  their  course. 

Obviously  stars  near  the  sun  are  invisible  ordi- 
narily. It  is  only  during  a  total  eclipse  of  the  sun 
when  the  stars  shine  forth  as  on  a  moonlight  night 
that  it  becomes  possible  to  " weigh  light"  from 
observations  of  the  stars  in  the  vicinity  of  the  sun. 

During  this  eclipse,  it  was  expected  at  least  thir- 
teen stars  would  be  visible  close  to  the  sun's  posi- 
tion. If  displacements  in  the  normal  positions  of 
all  of  these  stars  were  observed  and  if  the  displace- 
154 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


merits  were  greater  the  nearer  the  star  came  to  the 
sun  by  the  amount  required  by  the  theory  it  would 
be  strong  evidence  in  favor  of  the  new  theory  that 
light  possesses*  mass  and  weight  and  obeys  the  law 
of  gravitation. 

The  uncertainties  attending  observations  of  such 
a  nature  are  necessarily  great.  Aside  from  uncer- 
tainties as  to  weather  conditions  there  is  the  pos- 
sibility that  the  solar  corona  might  affect  the  star 
positions,  possibly  refracting  or  blurring  the  images 
of  the  stars  and  thereby  introducing  errors  in  the 
measurements. 

Errors  of  instruments  must  also  be  reduced  to  a 
minimum  to  make  possible  accurate  measurements 
of  these  angles  of  displacement  that,  if  existent, 
scarcely  exceed  the  parallaxes  of  the  nearest  stars. 

The  expeditions  fitted  at  the  Royal  Observatory 
of  England  expected  to  use  the  astrographic  tele- 
scope employed  for  cataloguing  the  positions  of 
the  stars  by  photography,  and  it  planned  to  make 
the  exposures  of  the  photographic  plates  of  ten 
seconds  duration.  Comparisons  of  the  positions  of 
the  thirteen  stars  obtained  during  the  eclipse  with 
the  normal  positions  of  these  stars  obtained  when 
the  sun  is  in  another  part  of  the  heavens  should 
155 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


show  the  displacement  due  to  the  sun's  influence 
on  the  path  of  a  ray  of  light,  if  it  exists. 

It  is  also  possible  to  test  at  the  same  time  the 
noted  Einstein  theory  of  relativity  that  is  the 
subject  of  so  much  discussion  at  the  present  time. 
According  to  this  theory  the  velocity  of  light  is 
less  in  a  strong  gravitational  field  than  it  is  in  a 
vacuum,  and  the  displacement  of  the  light  from  the 
stars  that  passed  through  the  field  of  the  sun's  influ- 
ence comes  out  twice-that  indicated  by  the  first 
theory. 

It  was  difficult  to  obtain  any  information  bear- 
ing on  these  problems  of  light  and  gravitation 
during  the  United  States  eclipse  of  June  8,  1918, 
owing  to  the  fact  that  the  sun  was  at  that  time  in 
a  field  of  very  few  stars. 

The  results  of  the  observations  of  this  eclipse  are 
not  yet  available  but  it  is  hoped  that  some  of  the 
expeditions  were  successful  in  obtaining  photo- 
graphs that  will  be  of  value  in  solving  this  unique 
problem  of  weighing  light. 


156 


CHAPTER  XX 

ARE  THERE   OTHER  PLANET   WORLDS? 

TF  IT  were  possible  for  man  to  view  the  solar  sys- 
•••  tern  from  the  distance  of  the  nearest  star,  our 
glorious  orb  of  day  would  appear  as  a  first  magni- 
tude star,  very  similar  to  beautiful  Capella,  the 
star  of  yellow  hue  that  shines  so  conspicuously 
near  the  meridian  in  northern  skies  in  the  early 
evening  hours  of  February. 

If  our  greatest  telescopes  could  be  turned  upon 
the  sun  at  this  distance,  the  existence  of  his  planet 
family  would  never  be  suspected.  Jupiter,  the 
greatest  of  the  satellites,  would  be  a  star  of  the 
twenty-first  magnitude,  shining  by  reflected  light 
only  and  situated  but  five  seconds  of  arc  distant 
from  the  sun.  When  we  consider  that  the  most 
powerful  telescope  in  existence  cannot  show  stars 
below  the  twenty-first  magnitude,  even  under  the 

157 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


most  favorable  circumstances,  the  impossibility  of 
detecting  even  the  greatest  of  the  sun's  family  at 
this  distance  is  clearly  evident. 

The  least  distance  that  the  unaided  eye  is  able 
to  distinguish  between  two  stellar  objects  is  more 
than  200  seconds  of  arc,  so  even  if  Jupiter  shone 
with  a  lustre  equal  to  that  of  the  sun  the  two  would 
appear  as  one  star  to  the  naked  eye  at  the  distance 
of  the  nearest  star.  As,to  the  other  planets:  be- 
fore the  bounds  of  the  solar  system  are  passed, 
Mercury,  Venus,  Earth  and  Mars  sink  into  invisi- 
bility, mere  cosmic  specks  lost  in  the  rays  of  a  sun 
that  is  rapidly  assuming  a  starlike  appearance 
even  at  this  distance. 

We  have  likened  the  aspect  of  our  sun  at  the  dis- 
tance of  the  nearest  star,  that  is,  at  a  distance  of 
only  four  light  years,  to  the  brilliant  Capella,  and 
spoken  of  the  total  invisibility  of  its  greatest  satel- 
lite, the  mighty  Jupiter,  at  this  distance.  How 
would  our  glorious  sun  appear  if  it  were  situated 
at  the  same  distance  from  us  as  this  conspicuous 
star  of  winter  skies  forty  light  years  away? 

Instead  of  a  brilliant  first  magnitude  star  we 
would  barely  see  an  insignificant  point  of  light  of 
the  fifth  magnitude,  one-seventieth  as  bright  as 
158 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Capella  and  near  the  limit  of  visibility  for  the  un- 
aided eye.  And  yet  Capella  is  not  very  far  away 
as  star  distances  go  in  a  sidereal  universe  some 
300,000  light  years  in  extent.  Ten  thousand  light 
years  away  great  telescopes  could  not  pick  up  the 
tiny  speck  of  light  representing  our  sun  among 
the  innumerable  hosts  of  the  universe. 

The  inconceivably  great  distances  separating  the 
various  suns  that  compose  our  universe  render  ab- 
solutely hopeless  any  attempt  to  investigate  the 
planet  families  of  other  suns,  if  such  exist,  and  we 
very  reasonably  suspect  that  other  planet  worlds 
do  exist. 

There  are  many  stars  in  the  stellar  system  that 
closely  resemble  our  own.  So  the  spectroscope  tells 
us.  Our  sun  is  but  one  of  the  yellow  stars.  Line 
by  line  its  spectrum  is  reproduced  in  many  a  star 
that  is  evidently  composed  of  the  same  elements  at 
practically  the  same  stage  of  stellar  evolution.  If 
one  member  of  this  group  is,  to  our  knowledge,  at- 
tended by  a  planet  family,  we  can  hardly  assume 
that  the  reverse  is  true  of  all  other  stars  of  the 
same  type.  Inability  to  detect  the  presence  of 
such  worlds  does  not  disprove  their  existence. 

Possibly  the  day  may  come  when  some  device  at 
159 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


present  unknown,  as  the  spectroscope  was  less  than 
one  hundred  years  ago,  may  accomplish  as  wonder- 
ful results  in  the  detection  of  dark  bodies  in  the 
universe,  whether  sun-like  or  planetary  in  size,  as 
the  spectroscope  has  in  the  detection  of  dark  and 
light  suns  physically  associated  in  double  or  mul- 
tiple systems. 

It  is  the  spectroscope  that  tells  us  that  beautiful 
Capella  is  not  a  single  star,  such  as  our  own  sun, 
but  belongs  to  a  star  system  composed  of  two  bright 
stars,  each  approximately  equal  in  mass  to  our  own 
sun,  that  revolve  around  a  common  centre  of  grav- 
ity in  about  one  hundred  days  and  are  separated 
from  each  other  by  a  distance  of  about  fifty  million 
miles. 

It  is  now  well  known  that  a  large  proportion  of 
the  stars  are  not  single  suns,  but  belong  to  systems 
of  two,  three  or  more  suns  in  revolution  around  a 
common  centre  of  gravity.  The  spectroscope  tells 
us  that  some  of  these  bodies  are  dark.  They  make 
known  their  presence  only  by  the  disturbance  they 
produce  in  the  motion  of  the  bright  stars  with 
which  they  are  associated.  The  fact  that  they  can 
produce  such  disturbances  proves  that  they  are  of 
sun-like  dimensions  and  not  planets.  They  are 
160 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


dark  either  because  they  are  extinct  through  old 
age  or  because  they  are,  for  some  mysterious  rea- 
son, imperfect  radiators  of  light. 

A  satellite  such  as  Jupiter  that  possesses  only 
about  one-thousandth  of  the  mass  of  the  sun  it  en- 
circles could  never  appreciably  affect  the  motion 
of  its  ruler.  The  spectroscope  would  not  reveal  the 
presence  of  such  a  modest  attendant,  though  it 
possesses  more  than  300  times  the  mass  and  1,300 
times  the  volume  of  our  planet  Earth.  Yet  small 
planetary  bodies  may,  for  all  we  know,  be  members 
of  double  and  multiple  star  systems.  There  may 
be  all  gradations  in  such  systems  from  dark  bodies 
of  sun-like  mass,  capable  of  revealing  their  pres- 
ence to  observers  hundreds  or  even  thousands  of 
light  years  distant,  down  to  hopelessly  obscure 
planets  or  planetoids  such  as  our  ringed  Saturn, 
mighty  Jupiter,  modest  planet  Earth,  or  the  num- 
berless asteroids  of  the  sun's  family.  The  masses 
of  celestial  bodies  can  only  be  found  through  their 
attraction  for  other  bodies.  It  is  impossible  to 
know  anything  definite  about  the  masses  of  solitary 
stars  since  they  lie  so  far  apart. 

Systems  of  connected  stars,  on  the  other  hand, 
through  the  attraction  of  the  various  members  for 
161 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


each  other,  furnish  a  method  for  determining  the 
combined  masses  of  the  stars  in  terms  of  our  sun's 
mass  when  their  distance  from  the  earth  is  known. 
One  of  the  interesting  results  of  the  investigations 
of  the  masses  of  these  binary  systems  is  to  show  that 
our  sun  is  an  average  star.  Though  there  are 
giants  in  the  universe  such  #s  Arcturus  or  Cano- 
pus  or  Rigel  that  dwarf  our  sun  into  insignificance, 
and  though  nearly  all  the  stars  visible  to  the  naked 
eye  are  far  more  brilliant  than  our  luminary,  they 
represent  the  exceptional  stars.  Among  the  tele- 
scopic stars,  the  countless  hosts  that  go  to  form  the 
sidereal  universe,  our  sun  is  about  the  average  in 
size  and  importance  and  in  no  respect  remarkable 
unless  we  assume  that,  for  some  mysterious  reason, 
the  rays  of  this  one  alone  are  capable  of  fostering 
varied  and  multiple  forms  of  life  upon  attendant 
planets. 

Binary  star  systems  often  present  strange  and 
unexplained  variations  of  light.  In  some  instances 
light  variations  are  due  to  the  temporary  eclipse  of 
one  member  of  the  system  by  the  other,  as  in  the 
noted  Algol  system.  There  are,  on  the  other  hand, 
light  changes  in  other  binary  stars  not  so  easily 
explainable.  The  Cepheid  variables,  as  they  are 
162 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  rSKY 


called,  have  so  far  defied  all  attempts  at  a  satis- 
factory explanation  of  their  peculiar  behavior. 
They  are  characterized  by  a  periodic  variation  of 
light  of  short  duration.  The  entire  cycle  of  change 
is  usually  accomplished  in  a  few  days,  in  some  stars 
in  a  few  hours.  A  very  rapid  rise  to  maximum 
brightness  is  followed  by  a  prolonged  drop  to  mini- 
mum that  is  sometimes  interrupted  by  a  weak  at- 
tempt at  an  increase  of  brightness.  This  cycle  of 
change  is  repeated  continuously  with  clock-like  pre- 
cision. 

Many  explanations  of  the  peculiar  behavior  of 
these  stars  have  been  suggested,  though  none  fit  all 
the  requirements.  According  to  one  theory  the 
peculiar  light  variations  are  due  to  internal  oscil- 
lations of  the  stars  resulting  from  collisions  with 
planetary  masses. 

There  are  also  the  remarkable  cluster  variables 
found  in  some  of  the  noted  globular  clusters  com- 
posed of  thousands  of  stars.  They  resemble  the 
Cepheids  in  the  nature  of  their  light  variations, 
though  the  periods  are  extremely  short.  The  cycle 
of  change  is  usually  accomplished  in  less  than 
twenty-four  hours.  Some  stars  wax  while  others 
wane,  each  star  keeping  strictly  to  its  own  period, 
163 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


entirely  independent  of  other  stars  in  the  same 
cluster. 
This  independence  of  each  other  is  not  so  strange 

when  we  consider  that  the  individual  stars  in  the 

\ 

globular  clusters  are  separated  by  distances  com- 
parable to  the  distance  that  separates  our  solar 
system  from  the  nearest  stars  and  that  ample  room 
is  furnished  each  star  for  the  possession  of  exten- 
sive satellite  families  without  being  crowded  by  too 
close  stellar  neighbors.  Why  some  few  stars  in  a 
globular  cluster  should  show  this  unaccountable 
periodic  flickering  of  light  while  the  majority  shine 
with  clear  and  steady  rays  is  another  of  the  unex- 
plained mysteries  of  this  wonderful  universe  of 
which  we  form  such  a  humble  part. 


164 


CHAPTER  XXI 

DRIFT  OP  THE  STAR  STREAMS 

THE  sun,  as  is  now  well  known,  travels  through 
the  universe  at  the  rate  of  twelve  miles  a 
second,  or  more  than  1,000,000  miles  a  day.  In  a 
year  it  passes  over  four  times  the  distance  from  the 
earth  to  the  sun  and  after  an  interval  of  nearly 
16,000  years  has  journeyed  the  same  distance 
through  space  that  light  travels  in  one  year. 

The  earth  and  other  planets,  of  course,  share  this 
motion  of  their  ruler,  since  the  solar  system  moves 
as  a  unit  with  the  relative  motions  and  positions  of 
its  various  members  unaffected  by  the  translation 
of  the  whole  system  through  space.  The  revolu- 
tion of  the  planets  around  the  sun,  combined  with 
the  motion  of  the  system  as  a  whole,  causes  their 
paths  through  space  to  assume  the  form  of  cork- 
screw spirals. 

165 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


In  the  past  five  thousand  years  practically  no 
changes  appreciable  to  the  naked  eye  have  taken 
place  in  the  forms  of  the  constellations  or  the 
brightness  of  the  stajs  due  to  this  motion  of  the 
sun.  After  an  interval  of  one  hundred  thousand 
years,  however,  which  is  less  than  the  period  man 
has  been  known  to  exist  upon  this  planet,  the  in- 
dividual motions  of  the  stars  combined  with  the 
sun's  advance  through  the  universe  begins  to  no- 
ticeably alter  the  appearance  of  the  constellations 
and  the  brightness  of  the  nearer  stars. 

[n  this  time  the  sun  travels  between  six  and  seven 
light  years,  which  is  more  than  the  distance  that 
separates  us  from  a  few  of  the  nearer  stars.  From 
the  birth  of  a  star  to  its  extinction  many  journeys 
to  and  fro  from  one  end  to  the  other  of  the  stellar 
system  may  be  possible  if  the  extent  of  the  system 
of  the  stars  to  which  we  belong  is  limited  in  diam- 
eter. 

In  four  hundred  million  years,  a  less  time  than 
has  elapsed  since  the  formation  of  the  earth's  sur- 
face crust,  according  to  some  geologists,  the  sun 
has  journeyed  so  far  through  our  stellar  system 
that  its  light  will  take  25,000  years  to  retrace  the 
path.  In  other  words  the  sun  has  travelled  in  this 
16S 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


period  25,000  light  years,  which  is  sufficient  to  have 
brought  it  from  far-distant  star  clouds  of  the  Milky 
Way  to  its  present  position. 

During  this  tremendous  interval  of  time  what 
portions  of  the  heavens  has  our  sun  passed 
through?  Has  it  moved  in  a  straight  line  or  in  a 
closed  orbit  as  do  its  own  satellites? 

How  far,  moreover,  has  it  advanced  in  its  evolu- 
tion after  pouring  forth  its  rays  of  light  and  heat 
during  this  journey  at  a  most  extravagant  rate 
with  no  sign  of  diminishing  force?  Unanswerable 
questions  as  yet.  One  fact  is  reasonably  certain, 
however.  No  serious  catastrophe,  such  as  a  col- 
lision with  or  close  approach  to  a  neighboring  sun 
either  dark  or  light,  has  occurred  during  this  vast 
period.  Wherever  our  sun  has  journeyed  it  has 
been  allowed  to  trace  its  path  undisturbed  by  out- 
side influences. 

The  life  process  nas  slowly  and  steadily  ad- 
vanced upon  the  earth  and  possibly  upon  other 
planets  of  the  solar  system  as  well  during  this  pe- 
riod. As  far  as  our  own  planet  is  concerned,  evi- 
dence of  this  undisturbed  development  is  stored 
away  in  geological  formations. 

Collisions  or  close  approaches  of  stars  are  such 
167 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


rare  phenomena,  occurring  so  far  only  in  the  more 
congested  regions^  of  the  Milky  Way,  that  it  is 
stated  as  one  of  the  fundamental  laws  of  the  uni- 
verse that  "the  stars  describe  paths  under  the  gen- 
eral attraction  of  the  stellar  system  without  inter- 
fering with  one  another. ' ' 

One  of  the  most  interesting  and  important  prob- 
lems of  modern  astrophysics  is  to  determine  the 
form  and  extent  of  the  system  of  stars  to  which 
we  belong.  A  beginning  at  least  has  been  made 
toward  the  solution  of  this  problem.  Material  is 
being  collected  continually,  day  by  day  and  year 
by  year,  bearing  upon  the  number  of  the  stars, 
their  velocities  both  in  the  line  of  sight  and  across 
the  line  of  sight,  their  distribution  with  reference 
to  the  plane  of  the  Milky  Way,  which  is  recognized 
as  the  foundation  of  the  system,  and  their  physical 
characteristics  as  well,  including  relative  masses, 
densities  and  luminosities. 

One  of  the  most  important  discoveries  in  astro- 
physics was  made  through  painstaking  examina- 
tions of  the  motions  of  a  great  number  of  stars. 
It  was  in  1904  that  the  noted  astrophysicist 
Kapteyn  first  proved  in  this  way  the  existence  of 
two  intermingling  star  streams  and  showed  that 
168 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  motions  of  the  stars  were  according  to  law  and 
order  and  not  at  random. 

More  and  more  facts  are  gradually  being  gath- 
ered as  to  the  nature  of  these  two  star  streams. 
It  has  been  established  by  this  time  that  the  great 
majority  of  the  stars  belong  to  one  or  the  other 
of  these  two  great  streams.  Also  that  the  number 
of  stars  in  the  two  streams  are  in  the  ratio  of  three 
to  two  and  their  velocities  in  the  ratio  of  1.52  to 
0.86;  that  is,  the  stars  in  one  stream  are  more 
numerous  and  move  more  rapidly  than  the  stars 
of  the  other  stream  in  the  above  proportions.  It 
has  been  found,  moreover,  that  the  motion  of  one 
stream  relative  to  the  other  is  parallel  to  the  plane 
of  the  Milky  Way,  emphasizing  the  importance  of 
this  formation  in  the  stellar  system. 

It  is  a  peculiar  fact  that  the  Orion  or  Helium 
stars  scarcely  partake  of  this  star  streaming  tend- 
ency, though  they  show  a  decided  inclination  to 
drift  in  groups,  all  the  members  of  a  group  moving 
in  the  same  general  direction  and  with  the  same 
speed. 

The  Pleiades  and  the  chief  stars  in  the  constella- 
tion Orion  are  notable  among  these  moving  clus- 
ters. This  gregarious  habit  is  not  entirely  confined 

169 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


to  the  Helium  stars,  for  some  stars  as  far  advanced 
as  the  sun  in  evolution  show  the  same  trait. 

The  stars  that  most  closely  follow  the  directions 
of  the  two  interpenetrating  star  streams  are  the 
Hydrogen  stars.  Their  preference  for  these  two 
streams  is  most  marked.  The  older  stars,  espe- 
cially the  red  stars,  show  a  tendency  to  diverge 
from  the  directions  of  the  two  streams.  The  aver- 
age rate  of  motion  of  the  red  stars  of  advanced 
age  is  three  times  as  great  as  the  extremely  slug- 
gish rate  of  the  Orion  stars  and  their  independ- 
ence of  motion  is  much  more  marked,  for  they 
show  no  inclination  to  remain  in  or  near  the  plane 
of  the  Milky  Way,  as  do  the  earlier  type  stars. 

Though  the  two  star  streams  to  which  the  major- 
ity of  all  the  stars  belong  represent  a  fundamental 
feature  of  the  stellar  system,  it  is  believed  that 
they  are  but  a  first  approximation  to  the  motions 
of  the  stellar  system.  The  more  recent  investiga- 
tions in  astrophysics,  especially  those  connected 
with  the  spiral  nebulae  and  globular  star  clusters 
as  external  systems  of  stars,  seem  to  indicate  the 
possibility  of  a  spiral  form  for  the  sidereal  system 
to  which  we  belong. 

Nothing  is  known  that  contradicts  this  belief, 
170 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


while  the  star  streaming  characteristic  mentioned 
above  is  in  line  with  the  theory.  It  has  been  sug- 
gested by  some  astronomers  that  the  dense  star 
clouds  of  Cygnus  or  of  Sagittarius  may  be  the 
strongly  condensed  centre  or  nucleus  of  our  stellar 
system  and  that  the  spiral  arms  lie  along  the  plane 
of  the  Milky  Way.  Whether  matter  is  flowing 
along  the  spiral  arms  toward  the  nucleus  or  from 
the  nucleus  outward  along  the  spiral  arms,  streams 
of  matter  will  flow  in  opposite  directions  where 
the  arms  merge  into  the  central  nucleus. 

What  would  be  the  nature  of  stellar  movements 
in  a  system  possessing  a  double  armed  spiral 
formation  cannot  be  stated  until  the  dynamics  of 
motion  in  spirals  is  known.  At  present  there  is 
no  clue  to  the  law  that  governs  such  motion. 

Tf  the  stellar  system  is  indeed  a  spiral  forma- 
tion, more  extended  study  of  the  relative  motions 
of  the  stars  will  eventually  reveal  the  law  that 
governs  their  motion.  It  might  then  be  possible 
to  trace  the  path  of  our  sun  through  the  system  of 
the  stars  just  as  it  is  now  possible  to  trace  the 
paths  followed  by  his  satellites  within  the  solar 
system. 


171 


CHAPTER  XXII 

THE    MILKY   WAY 

TO  THE  people  of  all  ages  and  nations  the  Milky 
Way  or  Galaxy  has  ever  been  an  object  of  awe 
and  admiration.  Many  beautiful  though  fanciful 
stories  exist  concerning  it.  It  has  been  called  both 
the  Sky  River  and  the  Path  of  Souls.  In  Scandi- 
navia, where  it  arches  magnificently  through  the 
zenith  in  winter  months,  it  is  the  Winter  Street, 
and  another  favorite  name  for  it  is  Jacob's  Road. 

The  true  immensity  and  grandeur  of  this  girdle 
of  the  universe  the  human  mind  can  hardly  grasp. 
It  is,  as  it  were,  the  equatorial  belt  of  the  sidereal 
system  and  marks  the  outermost  confines  of  the 
universe.  The  distances  of  the  stars  that  belong  to 
it  must  be  measured  by  the  thousands  of  light 
years. 

Suns  heaped  upon  suns  occur  here  in  such  pro- 
172 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


fusion  that  in  certain  of  the  denser  portions  it  is 
impossible  to  form  any  estimate  of  their  true 
number.  Nebulae  and  star  clusters  as  well  as  stars 
surrounded  by  nebulosity  are  intermingled  with 
the  dark  lanes  and  stretches  of  inky  blackness.  An 
example  of  the  latter  is  the  Coal  Sack  in  the  South- 
ern Cross,  not  visible  in  our  latitudes.  These 
darker  portions  are  as  characteristic  of  the  Milky 
Way  as  the  bright  knots  and  streamers  of  light 
so  frequently  met  with.  Many  of  them  are  truly 
rifts  in  the  star  clouds  through  which  we  see  into 
space  beyond,  but  dark  nebulous  matter  is  also 
abundant  in  the  Galaxy,  in  fact  nebulosity  both 
light  and  dark  is  a  strong  characteristic  of  galactic 
regions. 

Here,  too,  tend  to  collect  the  younger  members 
of  the  stellar  system,  the  Wolf-Eayet  or  bright 
line  stars,  with  a  type  of  spectrum  bordering  upon 
that  of  gaseous  nebulas,  and  the  helium  stars. 
Both  groups  come  early  in  stellar  evolution.  The 
Wolf-Rayet  stars  are  never  found  anywhere  except 
in  the  Milky  Way  and  in  the  Greater  and  Lesser 
Magellanic  Clouds,  two  small,  somewhat  circular 
regions  in  southern  circumpolar  skies  very  similar 
in  nature  to  the  Galaxy.  The  bluish-white  helium 

173 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


stars  show  a  decided  preference  for  the  plane  of 
the  Milky  Way  and  so  also  do  the  green  or  gaseous 
nebulas  and  the  temporary  stars  or  Novae.  With 
hardly  an  exception  the  latter  have  flashed  out  in 
the  regions  of  the  Milky  Way.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  white  or  spiral  nebulae  conspicuously  avoid 
galactic  regions  and  seek  the  neighborhood  of  the 
galactic  poles,  particularly  in  Virgo  and  Canes 
Venatici,  in  northern  latitudes.  It  is  believed  by 
many  astronomers  that  these  spirals  are  not  nebulae 
at  all  but  " island  universes,"  as  they  are  called, 
lying  beyond  our  stellar  universe  and  so  distant 
that  we  cannot  distinguish  their  true  stellar  na- 
ture. There  is  also  the  attendant  theory  that  our 
own  universe  is  of  spiral  form  with  its  nucleus  in 
some  galactic  region  and  its  spiral  arms  in  the 
plane  of  the  Milky  Way.  If  spiral  nebulae  shall 
be  found  on  future  investigation  to  be,  in  truth, 
exterior  universes  it  will  be  reasonable  to  assume 
by  analogy  that  our  universe  also  has  a  spiral 
form. 

Counts  of  stars  in  various  parts  of  the  heavens 
have  established  the  fact  that  the  great  majority 
of  the  stars  in  the  universe  crowd  toward  the  ga- 
lactic plane,  and  by  far  the  greater  number  of 
174 


DARK   MARKINGS   IN   THE   MILKY   WAY 

(Photographed  by  Barnard  on  Mt.  Wilson  with  the  Bruce  telescope) 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


these  are  actually  within  the  bounds  of  the  Milky 
"Way.  There  is  a  noticeable  thinning  out  of  stars 
as  we  approach  the  galactic  poles  and  an  increase 
in  the  number  of  spiral  nebulae.  This  has  led  to 
the  belief  that  the  shape  of  our  stellar  universe  is 
decidedly  flattened  in  the  direction  of  the  galactic 
plane.  It  has  been  likened  to  a  disk  in  shape,  the 
most  distant  regions  of  the  Milky  Way  marking 
the  confines  of  our  visible  universe.  It  has  been 
judged  that  our  particular  solar  system  at  present 
occupies  a  position  well  within  the  Milky  Way  a 
little  above  the  galactic  plane  and  part  way  from 
its  centre  to  its  edge,  far  from  the  central  aggrega- 
tions of  the  Galaxy.  This  belief  is  based  partly 
upon  the  form  of  the  Milky  Way  as  seen  from  our 
viewpoint.  To  us  it  appears  as  a  great  circle  en- 
compassing the  heavens. 

In  northern  latitudes  the  Milky  Way  is  never 
seen  to  run  due  north  and  south  or  east  and  west, 
but  crosses  the  sky  diagonally  and  is  best  seen  in 
fall  or  late  summer.  In  spring  it  lies  too  near 
the  horizon  to  be  well  observed.  From  circum- 
polar  regions  through  Cassiopeia  to  Cepheus  and 
into  Cygnus  it  runs.  Here  it  divides  into  two 
parallel  branches  for  nearly  one-third  of  its  entire 

175 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


length,  running  through  Aquila,  Ophiuchus  and 
Sagittarius  to  Scorpio.  There  the  two  branches 
join  once  more  and  it  passes  beyond  our  vision  into 
southern  skies,  where  it  enters  Centaurus  and  Crux, 
the  Southern  Cross,  and  traverses  the  magnificent 
and  extensive  constellation  of  Argo  Navis,  which 
contains  Canopus,  the  second  brightest  star  in  the 
heavens.  From  Argo  Navis  it  curves  northward 
once  more,  passing  close  by  Canis  Major,  which 
contains  Sirius,  the  brightest  of  the  stars,  and 
running  through  Monoceros,  where  it  is  extremely 
brilliant,  to  Gemini  and  Taurus,  then  through 
Auriga  and  Perseus  to  circumpolar  regions  in  the 
neighborhood  of  Cassiopeia  once  more.  Through- 
out this  entire  course  it  exhibits  a  wonderful  diver- 
sity of  form  and  structure.  We  note  that  it  in- 
cludes in  its  midst  or  passes  near  many  of  the 
brightest  of  the  stars,  while  it  includes  an  over- 
whelming majority  of  the  fainter  stars.  The 
brilliancy  of  the  Milky  Way  and  its  immediate 
neighborhood  is  in  striking  contrast  to  the  dearth 
of  stars  near  its  poles. 

Since  the  stellar  system  is  undoubtedly  condensed 
toward  the  plane  of  the  Milky  Way  and  we  are 
situated  between  the  centre  and  the  edge  of  this 
176 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


plane,  it  is  evident  that  we  look  through  a  dense 
layer  or  stratum  of  stars  in  the  direction  of  the 
Milky  Way.  All  the  stars  that  lie  in  the  direction 
of  the  Galaxy  do  not  belong  in  its  midst,  but  are  at 
varying  distances  from  us.  The  true  aggregations 
of  the  Galaxy  are  at  excessive  distances  and  are 
for  this  reason  extremely  faint,  on  the  average 
between  the  fourteenth  and  sixteenth  magnitude, 
and  probably  only  in  a  few  rare  cases  brighter 
than  the  eighth  magnitude.  As  distinct  points  of 
light  they  are  beyond  the  reach  of  the  unaided  eye 
and  give  us  only  the  impression  of  hazy  light. 

Successful  attempts  have  been  made  to  portray 
various  regions  in  the  Milky  Way,  especially  in 
Sagittarius  and  Cygnus,  and  we  cannot  fail  to  be 
impressed  with  the  impossibility  of  making  any 
estimate  of  the  number  of  suns  represented  in  some 
of  these  views.  Such,  moreover,  is  the  diversity 
of  form  of  its  various  parts  that  it  has  been  said 
no  one  region  can  be  regarded  as  typical  of  the 
entire  Milky  Way.  The  stupendous  scale  of  this 
wonderful  structure  fills  us  with  awe.  Suns  are 
here  crowded  together  until  they  seem  as  countless 
as  the  grains  of  sand  upon  the  seashore,  and  yet 
there  is  no  doubt  that  they  include  among  their 
177 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


number  some  of  the  giants  of  the  universe  only 
dimmed  to  our  eyes  by  immeasurable  distances. 

We  cannot  fail  to  recognize  the  fact  that  there 
is  some  definite  plan  or  purpose  in  this  structure 
in  its  relation  to  the  remaining  portions  of  our 
universe.  It  is  not  unmeaning  chaos  that  we  look 
upon,  for  certain  types  of  stars  crowd  toward  the 
Galaxy  while  others  avoid  it,  and  certain  physical 
characteristics  are  shared  by  all  of  its  members. 

We  can  only  stand  awestruck  before  the  plan 
of  the  universe  that  our  minds  cannot  grasp  or 
comprehend. 


178 


CHAPTER  XXIII 

DO  DARK  STARS  EXIST  IN  THE  HEAVENS? 

DARK  stars  abound  throughout  the  universe 
either  in  a  solitary  state  or  associated  with 
brilliant  companions.  Though  invisible,  they  have 
disclosed  their  presence  to  us  in  a  variety  of  ways. 
It  may  never  be  possible  to  form  any  estimate  of 
their  true  numbers,  but  we  cannot  doubt  their 
existence. 

Many  a  dark  or  feebly  luminous  body  of  sun- 
like  dimensions  has  been  detected  by  the  perturbed 
motion  of  some  bright  star  with  which  it  is  phys- 
ically connected.  Sirius  and  Procyon  were  ob- 
served to  describe  little  ellipses  under  the  influence 
of  some  unseen  force  long  before  their  companions 
were  discovered.  The  companion  of  Sirius,  though 
not  absolutely  dark,  is  one  of  the  most  feebly  lumi- 
nous bodies  known.  Its  mass,  however,  is  nearly 

179 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


one-half  that   of   Sirius  and  it   has   a  powerful 
attractive  force. 

It  is  now  conservatively  estimated  that  one  star 
in  every  three  is  either  double  or  multiple ;  that  is, 
belongs  to  a  system  of  two  or  more  stars  in  revo- 
lution around  a  common  centre  of  gravity,  and 
in  numberless  cases  dark  stars  are  included  in 
these  systems.  Sometimes  the  components  of  these 
systems  are  so  close  that  in  the  most  powerful 
telescopes  they  appear  as  a  single  star,  but  their 
composite  nature  is  revealed  by  the  spectroscope, 
which  shows  a  doubling  or  shifting  of  the  lines 
of  the  spectrum.  These  are  called  spectroscopic 
binary  systems.  The  doubling  of  the  spectral 
lines  shows  a  second  luminous  body  to  be  present, 
but  the  shifting  of  the  lines  without  doubling 
shows  that  the  bright  star  has  a  companion  giving 
little  or  no  light.  As  the  bright  body  recedes  in 
its  orbit  under  the  sway  of  its  dark  attendant  the 
lines  shift  toward  the  red  end  of  the  spectrum, 
and  as  it  turns  in  its  orbit  so  as  to  approach  the 
earth  the  lines  shift  toward  the  violet  end  of  its 
spectrum,  and  the  amount  of  the  shift  shows  the 
velocity  with  which  it  moves  in  its  orbit.  In  some 
cases  it  is  possible  to  determine  not  only  the  time 
180 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


it  takes  for  the  star  to  describe  its  orbit  and  the 
velocity  with  which  it  is  moving,  but  also  the  dis- 
tance between  the  two  components  in  miles,  their 
relative  mass  and  brightness,  and  their  mass  and 
brightness  as  compared  with  that  of  our  own  sun. 
All  this  is  possible,  however,  only  in  case  the  dis- 
tance of  the  system  from  the  solar  system  is  known. 

Stars  are  often  variable  in  light  due  to  periodical 
eclipse  by  dusky  satellites.  Such  is  Algol,  the 
Demon  Star,  whose  wink  every  three  days  means 
that  a  dark  body  passes  before  his  face  and  shuts 
off  fully  five-sixths  of  his  light.  Stars  that  are 
regularly  occulted  or  eclipsed  by  dark  attendants 
form  a  large  class  of  stars  known  as  eclipsing 
variables.  They  furnish  another  proof  of  the  ex- 
istence of  dark  bodies. 

It  is  of  peculiar  interest  that  dark  stars  are 
often  associated  with  stars  known  to  be  young; 
that  is,  with  Helium  or  Sirian  stars.  Since  mem- 
bers of  double  star  systems  have  presumably  at 
one  time  formed  a  single  mass,  gradually  separat- 
ing into  two  or  more  components  and  drawing 
further  and  further  apart  as  time  goes  on,  we 
would  expect  the  components  to  show  signs  of 
equal  age.  "Why  should  they  be  in  so  many  cases 
181 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  nearly  equal  mass,  but  widely  different  light 
giving  power?  We  must  conclude  that  there  are 
two  classes  of  dark  stars,  those  dark  through  old 
age  coming  at  the  end  of  the  evolutionary  stage, 
and  those  dark  because  they  are  imperfect  ra- 
diators and  have  not  the  necessary  physical  prop- 
erties for  keeping  up  long  continued  radiation 
without  appreciable  loss  of  light  and  heat.  Pos- 
sibly at  the  time  of  their  separation  from  the  orig- 
inal mass  there  was  unequal  distribution  of  the 
materials  possessing  the  light  and  heat  giving  prop- 
erties needed  for  long  continued  radiation.  We 
can  only  conjecture  as  to  the  cause,  but  the  fact 
remains  that  intensely  brilliant  stars  with  every 
sign  of  youth  are  physically  connected  with  stars 
necessarily  of  equal  age  but  emitting  no  appre- 
ciable light.  Such  well  known  bright  stars  as 
Sirius,  Spica,  Procyon  and  Castor  are  attended 
by  faint  or  invisible  companions. 

Whether  there  exist  in  space  systems  in  which 
all  the  members  are  dark  we  have  no  means  of 
knowing,  but  we  can  reasonably  assume  that  as  old 
age  overtakes  the  brighter  members  of  these  systems 
they  too  will  become  dark.  The  systems  of  61 
Cygni,  one  of  our  nearer  neighbors,  includes  one 
182 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


or  more  invisible  members,  and  the  entire  system 
shows  signs  of  great  age.  There  seems  no  escape 
from  the  conclusion  that  in  far  distant  ages  the 
entire  system  will  be  devoid  of  light.  Investiga- 
tions are  also  establishing  the  fact  that  the  velocity 
through  space  of  stars  and  star  systems  increases 
with  age.  If  so,  with  what  tremendous  velocity 
extinct  stars  must  be  rushing  on  their  mysterious 
journeys  to  unknown  fates! 

We  have  been  considering  so  far  dark  stars  that 
are  associated  with  bright  companions.  The  sud- 
den blazing  forth  of  temporary  stars  has  led  to 
the  belief  that  dark  stars  occur  in  an  isolated  state 
as  well.  It  is  only  when  collisions  between  dark 
stars  occur  or  when  dark  bodies  pass  through 
resisting  nebulous  matter  with  the  attendant  burst- 
ing forth  of  light  that  we  can  know  of  their  exist- 
ence. 

Our  own  sun  in  his  old  age  would  be  a  star  of 
this  class.  For  the  ruler  of  our  solar  system  is 
supreme  and  shares  his  glory  with  no  other  body 
of  sunlike  dimensions.  Our  own  system  may  be 
but  one  of  many  that  have  dark  attendant  satellites 
vastly  inferior  in  mass  to  the  ruling  body  around 
which  they  circulate.  And  when  old  age  falls  upon 

183 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  ruler  of  such  a  system  and  his  light  and  heat 
have  disappeared  he  has  no  choice  but  to  join 
the  host  of  dark  stars,  as  cold  and  inert  as  his 
lifeless  attendants  that  still  circle  ceaselessly 
around  their  ruler  as  he  journeys  onward  to  ex- 
tinction. We  can  only  reason  about  the  existence 
of  such  dark  and  lifeless  systems  through  analogy. 
We  see  in  the  heavens  the  nebulae  that  give  birth 
to  stars.  We  see  also  young  stars,  and  stars  in 
the  zenith  of  their  splendor,  such  as  our  own  sun, 
and  again  stars  failing  in  light  and  heat  with 
advancing  old  age;  and  why  not  cold,  rayless 
stars? 

It  is  known  that  stars  exist  in  a  non-luminous 
condition  in  mixed  systems  of  light  and  dark  stars. 
The  telescope  and  spectroscope  prove  this  to  us. 
So  it  is  reasonable  to  assume  that  dark  bodies  exist 
among  the  single  stars. 

Dark  bodies  of  planetary  size  attendant  upon 
bright  stars  could  never  be  detected  by  any  means 
at  our  disposal,  for  bodies  shining  only  by  reflected 
light  from  a  central  sun  and  of  such  minute  pro- 
portions compared  with  their  luminary  would  be 
hopelessly  lost  in  his  rays.  It  is  only  when  a 
satellite  has  sunlike  dimensions  that  it  can  influ- 
184 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ence  the  ruler  of  the  system  and  reveal  its  pres- 
ence by  the  perturbations  it  produces.  If  our  most 
powerful  telescopes  were  placed  at  the  distance  of 
Alpha  Centauri,  the  nearest  star,  and  pointed  at 
our  solar  system,  it  would  never  disclose  the  fact 
that  our  sun  had  a  single  attendant  planet. 

It  is  doubtful  if  we  can  ever  fulfil  our  very 
natural  desire  to  know  whether  other  stars  are 
attended  by  worlds  of  planetary  size. 

As  regards  dark  suns,  however,  Bessel,  one  of 
the  greatest  of  mathematicians,  said  we  had  reason 
to  believe  there  may  be  as  many  dark  stars  as 
bright  ones. 


185 


CHAPTER  XXIV 

THE  BRILLIANT  NOVA  OF  1918,  NOVA  AQUILJE  NO.   3 

SHORTLY  after  the  moon's  shadow  had  swept 
across  the  United  States  on  the  8th  of  June, 
1918,  and  while,  in  fact,  members  of  many  success- 
ful eclipse  expeditions  were  busily  engaged  in  de- 
veloping plates  and  packing  up  eclipse  apparatus, 
there  suddenly  appeared  in  the  heavens,  in  the 
constellation  Aquila,  the  Eagle,  the  most  brilliant 
temporary  star  or  nova  that  has  been  seen  since 
Kepler 's  star  suddenly  flashed  into  view  in  1604, 
more  than  three  hundred  years  ago. 

According  to  a  Harvard  College  Observatory 
bulletin  numerous  telegrams  were  received  at  the 
Harvard  Observatory  during  the  night  of  June  8 
from  all  parts  of  the  United  States  and  Europe 
announcing  the  independent  discovery  of  the  nova 
by  many  amateur  and  professional  astronomers. 
186 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


The  first  person  to  report  the  discovery  was  Mr. 
W.  H.  Cudworth,  who  sent  a  telephone  message 
from  Norwood,  Mass.  Due  to  differences  in  longi- 
tude the  star  was  probably  first  seen  in  Europe. 
Harvard  observers  immediately  proceeded  to  photo- 
graph the  visitor  and  look  up  its  past  history. 

Photographic  plates  dating  back  as  far  as  May 
22,  1888,  showed  a  faint  star  of  the  eleventh  mag- 
nitude whose  position  in  the  heavens  was  identical 
with  that  of  the  nova.  Several  hundred  plates 
were  examined  at  the  Harvard  Observatory  in 
order  to  trace  the  light  variations  of  this  star  in 
the  past  thirty  years.  There  appear  to  have  been 
slight  fluctuations  in  the  brightness  of  the  star 
during  that  period  that  have  a  range  of  about 
half  a  magnitude. 

The  following  facts  were  established  from 
examination  of  photographs.  On  June  3  this 
wonderful  star  possessed  its  normal  brightness  for 
the  past  thirty  years,  that  of  a  faint  star  of  the 
eleventh  magnitude.  Because  of  clouds  no  plates 
were  exposed  on  June  4,  5  and  6.  On  June  7  the 
star  appeared  as  a  sixth  magnitude  star  just  at  the 
limit  of  visibility  to  the  unaided  eye.  Its  bright- 
ness had  therefore  increased  one  hundred  fold  in 

187 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


less  than  four  days.  On  June  8,  the  memorable 
day  of  its  discovery,  it  had  become  a  star  of  the 
0.5  magnitude  and  was  a  magnificent  blue-white 
star  nearly  as  bright  as  Vega,  shining  all  the  more 
resplendently  since  it  appeared  in  a  part  of  the 
heavens  where  few  first  magnitude  stars  appear. 

Upon  June  9  Nova  Aquilae  No.  3,  as  it  has  been 
labelled  astronomically,  attained  what  appears  now 
to  have  been  its  maximum  brightness,  when  it 
outshone  the  famous  Nova  Persei  of  1901  and  prac- 
tically equalled  Sirius  in  brilliancy.  According  to 
observations  of  Prof.  E.  E.  Barnard,  made  June  9, 
its  magnitude  was  minus  1.4,  while  the  magnitude 
of  Sirius  is  given  as  minus  1.6. 

How  long  it  will  remain  visible  to  the  naked  eye 
is  doubtful.  Nova  Persei  faded  from  view  within 
a  month  and  was  conspicuous  for  only  a  few  days. 
It  was  unlike  the  present  nova  in  being  distinctly 
ruddy  at  maximum  brightness.  It  is  customary 
for  temporary  stars  to  fade  rapidly  but  fitfully 
away.  Kepler's  star,  which  was  nearly  as  bright 
as  Venus  at  maximum  brightness,  was  unusual 
among  temporary  stars  in  remaining  visible  for 
fully  two  years. 

The  nova  is  situated  in  one  of  the  two  branches 
188 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  the  Milky  Way,  that  lie  between  Aquila  and 
Scorpio,  and  it  was  all  the  more  conspicuous  for 
appearing  in  a  portion  of  the  heavens  where  few 
bright  stars  are  seen. 

On  June  8  the  spectrum  of  the  nova  was  found 
to  be  that  of  an  early  type  star,  with  dark  lines 
due  to  absorption  of  the  light  of  the  stellar  core 
by  cooler  hydrogen  gas  surrounding  the  star.  A 
spectrum  taken  at  Harvard  on  June  9  confirmed 
the  first  observation  and  showed  narrow,  dark 
hydrogen  lines  on  a  nearly  continuous  background. 

All  astronomers  agree  that  the  sudden  outburst 
of  novae,  a  rare  phenomenon,  is  evidence  of  some 
sort  of  a  celestial  catastrophe,  but  the  exact  cause 
of  the  sudden  and  tremendous  increase  in  the  light 
giving  powers  of  the  star  is  still  in  doubt.  The 
latest  theory  assumes  that  a  dark  or  light  star 
encounters  a  stream  of  nebulous  matter,  and  its 
heat  and  light  are  enormously  increased  by  the 
friction  created  by  its  passage  through  the  nebula. 
Considerable  weight  is  given  to  this  theory  by  the 
fact  that  Nova  Persei  was  observed  to  be  sur- 
rounded by  nebulous  matter  soon  after  its  sudden 
appearance.  Nebular  conditions  still  exist  around 
this  star,  which  is  still  visible  in  large  telescopes. 

189 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


At  first  it  was  thought  that  matter  was  travelling 
outward  from  the  star  with  the  velocity  of  thou- 
sands of  miles  per  second,  but  this  appeared  most 
unlikely,  and  it  was  finally  shown  that  the  phe- 
nomenon could  be  explained  by  assuming  that  the 
surrounding  nebula  was  illuminated  by  the  waves 
of  light  proceeding  outward  from  the  star.  Light 
was  being  reflected  to  us  from  the  dark  nebula 
just  as  the  planets  and  moon  reflect  the  light  of 
the  sun.  The  theory  of  the  origin  of  novae  by 
encounters  between  stars  and  nebulous  matter  does 
not  satisfactorily  explain  all  that  has  been  observed 
in  connection  with  the  appearance  of  these  stars, 
and  the  origin  of  novas  is  still  a  subject  open  to 
discussion. 

The  novae  show  no  measurable  parallax  and 
therefore  their  distance  is  unknown,  but  it  is  as- 
sumed to  be  very  great,  certainly  not  less  than 
300  light  years,  possibly  in  some  instances,  several 
thousand  light  years. 

The  great  value  of  preserving  photographic 
records  of  the  heavens  appears  in  connection  with 
the  discovery  of  this  star.  It  is  possible  to  prove 
by  reference  to  the  photographs  of  this  portion 
of  the  sky  taken  at  the  Harvard  College  Observa- 
190 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tory  that  the  present  nova  was  not  a  dark  star 
previous  to  its  present  outburst,  but  a  faint  star 
of  the  eleventh  magnitude,  and  all  its  past  history 
for  thirty  years  is  now  available.  The  sudden  rise 
of  this  star  to  the  minus  one  and  four-tenths  mag- 
nitude represents  an  increase  in  light  giving  power 
of  about  ninety  thousand  fold.  In  other  words, 
when  this  star  attained  its  greatest  brilliancy  on 
June  9  it  would  have  taken  the  combined  light  of 
90,000  stars  of  its  former  brightness  to  equal  it. 

Since  Nova  Aquilae  has  no  measurable  parallax 
it  must  have  been  before  its  outburst  at  least  equal 
in  brightness  to  our  own  sun.  At  the  time  of  its 
outburst  its  light  was  therefore  equal  to  the  light 
of  many  thousand  such  suns  as  our  own.  It  is 
possible  that  Nova  Aquila&  is  situated  in  distant 
regions  of  the  Milky  Way  where  lie  vast  nebulous 
tracts  of  matter,  and  that  even  before  its  outburst 
it  was  superior  to  our  own  sun  in  brilliancy. 

Possibly  at  the  time  of  its  outburst  a  catastrophe 
became  visible  that  took  place  several  thousand 
years  ago,  for  if  the  star  is  several  thousand  light 
years  distant  the  light  that  now  reaches  us  started 
on  its  journey  many  centuries  ago. 

Since  the  date  of  its  discovery  astronomers  have 
191 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


obtained  many  spectroscopic  records  of  the  changes 
that  have  taken  place  in  this  brilliant  nova.  Fol- 
lowing the  usual  course  of  temporary  stars  Nova 
Aquilae  No.  3  decreased  fitfully  but  rapidly  in 
brightness  and  in  a  few  months  became  a  faint 
fifth  magnitude  star,  just  perceptible  to  the  naked 
eye. 


192 


CHAPTER  XXV 

CALCIUM  GAS  IN  THE  MILKY  WAY 

NOVA  AQUIL^J  No.  3,  the  brilliant  temporary 
star  that  suddenly  burst  forth  June  8,  1918, 
and  then  rapidly  decreased  in  brightness  until  it  is 
now  scarcely  visible  to  the  eye,  has  been  under 
continual  observation  by  astronomers  since  the  date 
of  its  first  appearance. 

A  most  unusual  and  unexpected  result  of  the 
spectroscopic  study  of  this  star  has  been  the  de- 
tection of  clouds  of  calcium  vapor  lying  in  the 
Milky  Way  between  us  and  the  new  star. 

This  discovery  has  been  announced  in  a  com- 
munication to  the  Observatory,  a  British  publica- 
tion, by  the  prominent  British  astronomer  Ever- 
shed,  stationed  at  Hodaikanal,  India,  who  reports 
the  existence  of  fine  dark  lines  of  calcium  in  the 
spectrum  of  the  nova  in  a  normal  position.  Since 

193 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


all  the  spectral  lines  of  a  nova  are  always  greatly 
displaced  and  distorted,  due  to  the  abnormal  con- 
ditions existing  in  such  stars,  the  presence  of  the 
lines  of  any  element  in  a  normal  position  points 
to  an  origin  of  these  lines  external  to  the  scene 
of  the  outburst. 

According  to  one  of  the  first  laws  of  spectrum 
analysis,  upon  which  depends  our  knowledge  of 
the  physical  condition  of  the  stars,  if  light  from 
a  certain  source,  such  as  an  incandescent  solid, 
or  liquid,  or  gas,  under  extremely  high  pressure 
(in  this  case  the  nova),  passes  through  a  cooler 
intervening  gas,  the  latter  will  absorb  from  the 
source  of  light  beyond  the  particular  elements 
of  which  the  cooler  gas  consists  and  as  a  result 
the  spectrum  of  the  hotter  body  (the  nova)  will 
be  crossed  by  dark  absorption  lines  of  the  cooler 
intervening  gas. 

It  is  upon  this  same  principle  that  the  elements 
that  enter  into  the  composition  of  the  cooler  en- 
veloping gases  of  a  stellar  body  can  be  determined. 
Upon  the  continuous  band  of  color  emanating 
from  the  star's  interior  appear  the  dark  absorp- 
tion lines  originating  in  the  cooler  atmosphere  of 
the  star. 

194 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Were  the  outer  gaseous  envelope  of  Nova 
Aquilse  in  a  normal  condition  of  temperature  and 
pressure  its  absorption  lines  would  be  in  their 
normal  position  in  the  spectrum,  and  the  existence 
of  these  clouds  of  calcium  vapor  lying  in  the  Milky 
Way  between  us  and  the  nova  would  not  have 
been  suspected,  since  in  that  case  the  lines  of 
calcium  in  the  star's  atmosphere  and  in  the  ex- 
terior clouds  of  calcium  would  have  been  coincident 
and  would  have  been  attributed  entirely  to  a  stellar 
origin.  In  the  atmosphere  of  a  nova,  however, 
conditions  are  far  from  normal. 

A  celestial  catastrophe  has  occurred  and  ab- 
normal conditions  of  temperature  and  pressure 
existing  in  the  star's  outer  gaseous  envelope  are 
registered  in  the  form  of  distorted  and  displaced 
lines  and  bands  both  bright  and  dark  in  the  star's 
spectrum.  Only  the  lines  of  calcium  vapor  far 
exterior  to  the  scene  of  the  catastrophe  remain 
uninfluenced  by  these  conditions  and  appear  fine 
and  dark  with  the  distorted,  abnormal  spectrum 
of  the  nova  for  a  background.  Remove  the  nova, 
or  place  in  its  stead  a  normal  star,  and  the  pres- 
ence of  the  calcium  clouds  would  remain  unknown. 

Continuing  his  investigation  of  the  calcium  lines 
195 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


in  Nova  Aquilse  and  looking  up  the  records  of 
past  novae  and  a  number  of  binary  stars,  which 
also  show  displaced  lines  due  to  the  mutual  revo- 
lution of  the  components  of  each  system,  Evershed 
made  some  additional  discoveries  of  great  interest. 
Observations  had  been  recorded  in  the  past  of  the 
existence  of  the  dark  absorption  lines  of  calcium 
in  the  spectrum  of  Nova  Persei,  which  appeared 
in  1901  and  closely  rivalled  Nova  Aquilae  in 
splendor. 

The  lines  of  calcium  also  appeared  in  their  nor- 
mal position  in  this  nova,  though  all  the  other 
lines  of  its  spectrum  were  displaced.  A  few  binary 
stars  also  showed  the  calcium  lines  in  a  normal 
position,  though  all  lines  originating  in  the  atmos- 
phere of  these  stars  were  displaced  owing  to 
mutual  revolution  of  the  components  of  these  star 
systems  which  produces  periodic  displacements  of 
all  their  spectral  lines.  Evershed  concluded  as  a 
result  of  his  observations  of  all  these  stars,  ten 
or  twelve  in  number  scattered  over  widely  sepa- 
rated regions,  that  there  exists  in  the  Milky  Way 
vast  clouds  of  calcium  vapor  through  which  the 
light  of  these  stars  passes  before  it  reaches  our 
eyes,  and  he  also  concluded  as  a  result  of  further 
196 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


investigations  that  these  clonds  lie  virtually  sta- 
tionary in  space.  So  immovable  do  they  appear 
that  he  considers  they  would  furnish  a  valuable 
method  for  a  new  determination  of  the  motion  of 
our  own  sun  through  space. 

It  has  long  been  known  that  vast  clouds  of 
nebulous  matter  exist  in  the  Milky  Way,  but  this 
is  the  first  time  that  the  presence  of  a  gaseous 
tract  of  matter  has  been  detected  by  absorption 
lines  produced  in  the  spectrum  of  a  star  far 
exterior.  It  is  a  most  unique  and  unusual  dis- 
covery, and  shows  what  valuable  and  unexpected 
results  may  be  obtained  from  spectroscopic  observa- 
tions of  the  stars.  Under  ordinary  circumstances, 
the  existence  of  these  vast  clouds  of  calcium  vapor 
would  be  unknown  and  unsuspected. 

A  normal  stellar  spectrum  would  not  reveal 
their  presence.  Yet  the  rays  of  light  from  Nova 
Aquilse  and  Nova  Persei,  as  well  as  certain  binary 
star  systems,  have  not  only  told  the  secret  of  the 
physical  condition  of  these  stars  but  have  also 
brought  us  the  proof  of  encounters  with  interven- 
ing gases  on  their  long  journey  through  space  to 
the  solar  system  and  our  own  planet. 

An  interesting  and  valuable  field  for  future 
197 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


study  has  thus  been  indicated.  Observations  of 
other  stars  with  displaced  spectral  lines  may 
enable  astronomers  to  detect  the  presence  of  clouds 
of  gas  lying  between  us  and  such  stars  and  to 
determine  in  addition  whether  these  clouds  of 
vapor  are  at  rest  or  drifting  through  space. 

Why  calcium  vapor  should  exist  in  such  pro- 
fusion in  space  is  a  mystery.  As  is  well  known  to 
astronomers,  there  is  a  certain  type  of  stars  known 
as  calcium  stars,  whose  spectra  are  characterized 
by  the  presence  of  strong  absorption  lines  of  cal- 
cium, indicating  that  calcium  vapor  occurs  in  great 
abundance  in  the  atmosphere  of  such  stars.  To 
this  class  of  stars  belongs  Canopus,  one  of  the 
greatest  suns  of  the  universe,  and  Procyon,  a  near 
neighbor  of  the  solar  system,  which  is  about  ten 
times  more  luminous  than  the  sun. 

In  addition  to  dominating  the  spectra  of  stars 
of  this  class  calcium  is  found  in  great  quantities 
in  the  solar  type  stars,  to  which  our  own  sun  be- 
longs, and  less  conspicuously  in  later  type  stars. 
It  is  only  in  the  helium  and  hydrogen  stars  that 
this  element  appears  to  be  absent.  The  distribu- 
tion of  this  element  in  the  atmosphere  of  the  sun 
can  be  studied  by  means  of  the  spectro-heliograph, 
198 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


which  makes  it  possible  to  photograph  the  sun  in 
the  light  of  a  single  spectral  line. 

The  circulation  of  calcium  vapor  in  the  sun's 
atmosphere  has  been  extensively  studied  by  this 
method,  and  it  has  been  noted  as  a  singular  and 
puzzling  fact  by  astronomers  interested  in  solar 
research  that  the  vapors  of  this  comparatively 
heavy  element  are  frequently  found  at  very  high 
levels  in  the  sun's  atmosphere. 

It  is,  moreover,  a  noteworthy  fact  that  this  ele- 
Jnent,  which  apparently  occurs  in  the  greatest 
abundance  in  stars  of  many  types,  and,  as  is  now 
known,  exists  in  different  portions  of  the  universe 
in  the  form  of  vast  clouds,  is  also  of  the  greatest 
importance  upon  our  own  planet,  earth. 

It  is  this  element  that  enters  into  the  structure 
of  the  bones  and  is  so  essential  to  virtually  all 
forms  of  animal  life.  Though  its  particular  impor- 
tance in  the  fashioning  of  the  stars  and  in  the 
universe  as  a  whole  is  unknown,  it  is  certain  that 
without  it  animal  life  as  it  now  exists  on  our 
planet  would  be  impossible. 


199 


CHAPTER  XXVI 

THE  SPIRAL  NEBULAE  AND  THE  GREAT  NEBULA  IN 
ANDROMEDA 


^TT^HE  discovery  in  recent  years  of  a  number  of 
-••  novae,  or  temporary  stars,  in  spiral  nebulas  is 
regarded  by  astronomers  as  a  matter  of  unusual 
importance  since  it  may  have  a  direct  bearing 
upon  the  baffling  problem  of  the  nature,  size  and 
distance  of  these  peculiar  spiral  formations  now 
known  to  exist  in  the  heavens  in  numbers  running 
into  the  hundreds  of  thousands,  if  not  millions. 

It  would  in  no  wise  lessen  our  interest  in  the 
most  famous  of  all  spirals,  the  Great  Andromeda 
Nebula,  to  discover  that  it  is  an  "  island  universe" 
consisting  of  millions  of  suns  as  well  as  vast  nebu- 
lous formations  and  star  clusters  similar  to  those 
found  in  the  Milky  Way  of  our  own  system. 

According  to  astronomers  who  have  made  a  spe- 
200 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


cial  study  of  these  spiral  formations,  dimensions 
and  distances  of  a  higher  order  than  that  of  the 
stars  are  to  be  expected  for  the  spiral  .nebulae  if 
they  are  remote  universes 

The  marked  distribution  of  all  stars,  star  clus- 
ters and  gaseous  nebulas  within  our  own  universe 
with  reference  to  the  Milky  Way,  or  Galaxy,  has 
long  been  known.  In  or  near  this  plane  are  to  be 
found  the  majority  of  all  stars,  bright  as  well  as 
faint — though  the  condensation  is  more  marked 
for  faint  stars — showing  that  our  system  is  de- 
cidedly flattened  toward  the  plane  of  the  Galaxy. 
The  tendency  of  the  gaseous  nebulae  and  the  plan- 
etary nebulae,  as  well  as  the  vast  star  clouds  and 
tracts  of  irregular  nebulous  formations,  dark  as 
well  as  light,  to  adhere  closely  to  the  neighbor- 
hood of  the  Galaxy  is  well  known. 

In  marked  contrast  to  this  we  find  that  the  spiral 
nebulae  actually  avoid  the  regions  of  the  Milky 
Way  and  are  found  in  greatest  abundance  in  parts 
of  the  heavens  farthest  removed  from  galactic  re- 
gions; and,  what  is  of  special  interest  in  this  con- 
nection, all  temporary  stars  discovered  up  to  the 
present  time,  about  thirty  in  number,  have  been 
closely  confined  to  the  Milky  Way,  with  but  three 
201 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


exceptions.  One  of  these,  T  Coronae,  was  not  a 
typical  nova.  The  other  two  were  found  in  spiral 
nebulae  and  were  the  only  temporary  stars  known 
to  exist  in  spirals  until  quite  recently,  when  Prof. 
Kitchey  at  Mount  Wilson  discovered  a  nova  in  the 
spiral  nebula  N.  G.  C.  6946. 

The  discovery  of  this  nova,  the  third  to  be 
found  in  a  spiral,  caused  a  suspicion  that  there 
might  be  an  actual  physical  connection  between 
the  spiral  formation  and  the  star.  The  probability 
that  three  temporary  stars  should  chance  to  be  in 
line  with  spiral  nebulae  was  very  small.  The  dis- 
covery of  this  nova  led  to  a  reexamination  of 
former  photographs  of  spiral  nebulae  with  the 
result  that  eleven  temporary  stars  were  found 
in  spiral  nebulae  as  against  twenty-six  previ- 
ously found  in  the  Milky  "Way.  Throughout  the 
remainder  of  the  heavens  temporary  stars  are  non- 
existent. 

Another  extremely  important  point  brought  out 
by  astronomers  in  connection  with  the  discovery 
of  these  temporary  stars  in  spirals  is  the  great 
difference  in  the  brightness  of  the  novae  in  spirals 
and  the  novae  in  the  Milky  Way.  Temporary  stars 
that  have  appeared  in  the  Milky  Way  have  usually 
202 


THE    GREAT    SPIRAL    NEBULA   IN    ANDROMEDA 

(Photographed  by  Ritchey  with  the  2-ft.  reflector  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory) 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


teen  somewhat  sensational  objects,  in  some  cases 
appearing  at  their  maximum  fully  as  brilliant  as 
the  brightest  of  the  stars  or  even  the  planets 
Jupiter  or  Venus.  The  novae  in  spiral  nebulas,  on 
the  contrary,  are  excessively  faint  objects,  averag- 
ing about  the  fifteenth  magnitude,  entirely  invisible 
at  their  maximum  brightness  except  in  the  most 
powerful  telescopes. 

Between  the  average  brightness  of  the  temporary 
slars  appearing  in  the  Milky  Way  and  those  de- 
tected in  spirals  there  is  a  difference  of  fully  ten 
magnitudes.  If  we  assume  that  the  two  classes  of 
novae  are  about  the  same  in  actual  luminosity  this 
great  difference  in  apparent  brightness  is  due  to 
differences  in  distance.  A  difference  of  ten  mag- 
nitudes in  apparent  brightness  of  two  stars  that 
are  in  reality  of  equal  light  giving  power  means 
that  the  fainter  star  is  one  hundred  times  more 
distant  than  the  brighter.  We  have  no  knowledge 
of  the  actual  distance  from  us  of  the  temporary 
stars  situated  in  or  near  the  Milky  Way,  but  it  is 
believed  to  be  very  great,  probably  in  many  cases 
as  high  as  several  thousand  light  years.  This 
would  place  the  spirals  at  distances  to  be  measured 
by  hundreds  of  thousands  of  light  years  and  give 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


support  to  the  theory  that  they  are  "island  uni- 
verses "  of  millions  of  suns. 

Even  with  the  sixty-inch  reflector  of  the  Mount 
Wilson  Observatory  no  star  in  the  heavens  fainter 
than  the  twentieth  magnitude  can  be  detected. 
Photographs  of  spirals  taken  with  this  instrument 
?$how  no  individual  stars,  but  nebulous,  starlike 
condensations  analogous  probably  to  the  nebulous 
star  clouds  of  our  own  Galaxy,  its  star  clusters 
and  its  nebulous  formations.  The  appearance  of 
a  temporary  star  of  the  fifteenth  magnitude  in  a 
spiral  nebula  would  therefore  mean  the  appear- 
ance of  a  star  that  is  at  least  several  hundred 
times  brighter  than  the  brightest  individual  star 
in  the  nebula,  while  the  nova  of  1885  in  the  Great 
Andromeda  Nebula,  which  was  of  the  seventh  mag- 
nitude at  maximum  and  therefore  almost  visible 
to  the  naked  eye,  must  have  attained  an  actual 
luminosity  hardly  to  be  equaled  by  the  combined 
light  of  a  million  of  the  brightest  stars  in  the 
heavens. 

Dr.  Shapley  has  pointed  out  that  this  unusual 

case  would  have  a  parallel  in  our  own  Galaxy, 

however,  if  we  make  the  assumption  that  Nova 

Persei,  the  famous  temporary  star  of  1901,  is  situ- 

204 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ated  in  some  one  of  our  most  distant  galactic  clouds. 
The  noted  temporary  stars  of  Hipparchus  and 
Tycho  Brahe  may  have  originated  in  far  distant 
galactic  regions  for  all  we  know  to  the  contrary. 
If  so  they  burst  forth  with  a  temporary  splendor 
equal  to  several  million  such  suns  as  our  own. 

Though  the  question  of  the  true  nature  of  spiral 
nebulae  is  still  an  open  one,  the  appearance  of 
extremely  faint  novae  in  their  midst  must  be  con- 
ceded to  be  a  strong  argument  in  favor  of  the  view 
that  they  are  far  distant  external  universes  of  the 
order  of  magnitude  of  our  own  stellar  system  and 
of  the  attendant  theory  that  our  own  universe, 
composed  of  some  hundreds  of  millions  of  stars 
and  nebulous  formations,  luminous  as  well  as  non- 
luminous,  has  a  spiral  formation  with  the  double 
branching  spiral  arms  to  be  traced  among  the 
star  clouds  of  the  Galaxy.  Upon  the  assumption 
that  the  spirals  are  far  distant  universes,  the  fact 
that  they  so  conspicuously  avoid  galactic  regions  in 
strong  contradistinction  to  nearly  all  other  classes 
of  objects  in  the  heavens  is  explainable.  If  they 
are  situated  at  distances  more  remote  than  other 
celestial  objects  the  vast  tracts  of  nebulous  matter, 
dark  and  light,  in  galactic  regions  and  the  dense 
205 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


star  clouds  that  abound  in  this  plane  would  hide 
from  view  spirals  lying  near  the  Milky  Way. 

Were  our  own  system  of  stars  as  far  away  as 
the  Great  Nebula  in  Andromeda  it  would  appear 
very  much  as  the  Great  Nebula  in  Andromeda 
does  to  us.  Without  telescopic  aid  it  would  be 
seen  as  a  faint  patch  of  light  about  the  size  of  the 
full  moon.  When  viewed  with  the  most  powerful 
telescopes  its  most  brilliant  individual  stars  would 
still  remain  hopelessly  invisible,  but  various  nebu- 
lous condensations  of  light  would  appear,  suggest- 
ing conglomerations  of  many  stars  and  nebulae. 
Our  own  little  sun  at  this  distance  would  be 
beyond  the  range  of  all  telescopes.  There  would 
be  little  reason  to  suspect  we  were  viewing  a  uni- 
verse of  hundreds  of  millions  of  suns  or  that  all 
these  suns  were  in  unceasing  motion  in  obedience 
to  the  mysterious  laws  governing  their  formation 
and  that  of  the  universe  to  which  they  belong. 

Since  the  Andromeda  Nebula  is  exceptionally 
large,  it  is  either  comparatively  near  or  an  unusu- 
ally large  formation.  Many  of  the  spiral  nebulae 
are  extremely  faint.  They  appear  in  the  greatest 
abundance  in  the  heavens.  Of  the  fainter  nebulae 
virtually  nothing  is  known.  The  thought  that  these 
206 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


faint  spirals  may  be  aggregations  of  suns  at  dis- 
tances to  be  measured  by  hundreds  of  thousands 
of  light  years  is  staggering  to  the  imagination  of 
man. 


207 


CHAPTER  XXVII 

GASEOUS  NEBULJE  AND  THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  STARS 


^TT^HE  gaseous  or  green  nebula*,  so  named  from 
•"*  the  greenish  tinge  imparted  to  them  by  the 
presence  of  the  unknown  gas  nebulium,  present 
problems  to  the  astronomer  as  interesting  and  im- 
portant as  those  connected  with  the  noted  spiral 
nebulae.  These  two  types  of  nebulas  are  radically 
different  in  their  composition  and  in  their  distri- 
bution in  the  heavens. 

Gaseous  nebulas  are  beyond  a  doubt  members  of 
our  own  system  of  stars.  They  crowd  densely 
toward  the  Milky  Way,  the  groundwork  of  our 
universe.  The  spirals  as  conspicuously  avoid  it. 
The  latter,  it  is  suspected,  may  be  systems  of 
stars  independent  of  and  external  to  our  own. 
The  gaseous  nebulas  we  think  of  as  the  material 
from  which  the  stars  are  fashioned. 
208 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Their  extent  is  enormous.  We  have  as  yet  no 
definite  idea  of  their  distance,  but  it  must  be  as 
great  as  that  of  the  nearer  stars.  Most  probably 
they  occur  in  greatest  profusion  among  the  more 
dense  star  clouds  of  the  Milky  Way  at  distances 
to  be  measured  by  thousands  of  light  years.  In 
many  cases  they  must  occupy  an  interval  of  space 
so  great  that  light  would  require  many  years  to 
cross  it. 

Vast  gaseous  nebulae  enwrap,  in  some  instances, 
moving  clusters  composed  of  many  stars  such  as 
the  Pleiades  and  the  stars  of  Orion.  The  Great 
Orion  nebula  is  the  finest  of  all  the  gaseous  nebulas. 
Double,  triple  and  multiple  stars  are  enmeshed  in 
its  extensive  folds. 

The  extreme  tenuity  of  the  gaseous  nebulae  is 
as  astonishing  as  their  vast  extent.  One  ten  thou- 
sand millionth  of  the  density  of  our  own  atmos- 
phere at  standard  pressure  is  one  of  the  estimates 
of  the  density  of  the  denser  portions  of  the  Great 
Nebula  in  Orion. 

It  is  difficult  to  imagine  the  condition  of  matter 

in  such  an  extreme  state  of  rarefaction.    Yet  these 

nebulae  assume  an  infinite  variety  of  form  and 

structure.     In   addition   to   the    vast   nebulae   of 

209 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


irregular  form  there  are  the  ring  or  annular  nebulae, 
peculiar  formations  probably  spheroidal  in  form, 
with  a  star  of  variable  luster  often  shining  with- 
in the  ring.  There  are  the  Saturn  nebula, 
the  Owl,  Crab,  Dumb-bell,  North  America  and 
many  other  odd  shaped  gaseous  nebulae  frequently 
named  from  their  fancied  resemblance  to  objects 
familiar  to  terrestrial  inhabitants. 

There  are  also  the  planetary  nebulae,  a  species 
of  gaseous  nebulae  named  from  their  resemblance 
to  faint  planetary  disks,  that  are  receiving  consid- 
erable attention  at  the  present  time.  Astronomers 
find  their  extremely  high  velocities  of  motion  in 
the  line  of  sight  which  average  twenty-four  miles 
a  second  surprising  and  extremely  puzzling. 

In  the  scheme  of  stellar  evolution  the  first  type 
stars,  on  the  border  between  nebulous  and  stellar 
conditions,  are  supposed  to  follow  the  planetary 
nebulas  in  order  of  development,  but  the  very  high 
velocity  of  the  planetary  nebulae  would  hardly 
connect  them  with  the  slowly  moving  new  stars. 
It  has  been  found  that  the  stars  move  more  rapidly 
with  increasing  age  and  we  should  therefore  have 
to  place  the  planetary  nebulae  at  the  end  of  the 
evolutionary  chain  instead  of  the  beginning,  if  we 
210 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

<t 

consider  simply  the  very  high,  speed  with  whloii 
they  are  moving  through  space. 

Some  recent  investigations  of  these  same  planet- 
ary nebulae  show  that  they  are  rotating  as  well  and 
that  in  two  special  cases  the  periods  of  rotation 
lie  between  600  and  14,000  years  and  the  masses 
of  the  rotating  nebulae  between  three  and  100  times 
that  of  the  sun. 

The  planetary  nebulae  are  usually  strongly  con- 
densed toward  their  centres.  Here  are  found  the 
denser  helium  and  nebulium  gases,  while  hydro- 
gen .occurs  chiefly  near  the  outlying  portions. 

These  three  gases,  hydrogen,  helium  and  nebu- 
lium, are  the  elements  always  to  be  found  in  the 
gaseous  nebulae,  whether  irregular  or  planetary. 
They  enter  into  the  composition  of  all  nebulae  ex- 
cept the  spirals,  which  shine  on  the  other  hand 
with  "  white "  light  and  give  the  continuous  spec- 
trum of  incandescent  solids  or  liquids  or  gases 
under  high  pressure.  They  are  for  this  reason 
often  referred  to  as  the  white  nebulae,  as  opposed 
to  the  green  or  gaseous  nebulae.  The  latter  show 
the  typical  nebular  spectrum  consisting  of  bright 
lines  of  the  three  gases  mentioned. 

A  bright  line  spectrum  indicates  that  the  source 
211 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  the  illumination  is  gaseous  matter  at  low  pres- 
sure. The  green  nebulas  are  very  feebly  luminous 
and  the  nature  of  their  luminosity  is  one  of  their 
most  puzzling  features.  According  to  a  recent 
theory  the  mysterious  element  nebulium  is  some 
familiar  element  electrically  excited.  Some 
astronomers  believe  that  the  luminosity  of  the 
gaseous  nebulae  is  chiefly  due  to  electrical  excite- 
ment of  certain  portions.  In  all  these  nebulas 
occur  dark  portions  as  well  as  light.  The  illumi- 
nation is  locally  condensed  and  certain  portions 
seem  for  some  inexplicable  reason  to  have  lost  their 
illuminative  power.  This  would  hardly  be  ex- 
pected if  the  luminosity  of  the  gaseous  nebulas 
were  due  to  light  of  incandescence  alone.  A  more 
uniform  distribution  of  light  would  be  expected. 
It  is  generally  believed  that  the  temperature  of 
the  gaseous  nebulas  is  extremely  low  and  if  due 
to  electrical  discharges  their  average  temperature 
might  approximate  to  absolute  zero. 

Tremendous  extent,  extremely  low  density  and 
marked  feebleness  of  light  are  the  three  peculiar 
characteristics  of  the  gaseous  nebulas. 

Evidently  plan  and  purpose  control  the  nebulas 
as  well  as  the  stars.  They  do  not  represent  mean- 
212 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ingless  chaos,  but  form  one  of  the  links  in  the  chain 
of  evolution. 

It  is  not  by  chance  that  stars,  both  single  and 
multiple,  are  found  in  the  midst  of  the  vast  irreg- 
ular nebulae,  while  even  the  small  planetary 
nebulae,  the  annular  nebulae  and  the  nondescript 
nebulae  have  in  nearly  all  instances  stars  closely 
associated  with  them. 

It  has  been  pointed  out  by  some  astronomers 
who  are  inclined  to  question  the  transformation 
from  nebulae  to  stars  that  the  nebulosity  connected 
with  these  stars  may  rather  result  from  gradual 
change  of  stars  into  nebulae,  and  that  the  nebu- 
losity surrounding  the  Pleiades  and  the  stars  of 
Orion  are  rather  emanations  of  gaseous  matter 
from  these  stars  and  that  eventually  they  will  all 
be  dissipated  into  nebular  form.  It  has  been 
pointed  out  also  in  this  connection  that  flames  of 
hydrogen  and  helium  often  burst  forth  from  the 
solar  surface  at  the  rate  of  200  miles  per  second 
even  under  present  conditions,  while  a  velocity  of 
ejection  of  380  miles  per  second  would  permit 
them  to  leave  the  surface  of  the  sun  never  to 
return. 

The  nebulous  matter  now  to  be  found  surround- 
213 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ing  the  famous  temporary  star,  Nova  Persei,  is 
instanced  in  support  of  the  view  that  stars  may  be 
dissipated  gradually  or  suddenly  into  a  nebulous 
state. 

Although  the  existence  of  dark  nebulae  closely 
resembling  the  luminous  variety  in  form  seems  to 
show  that  some  nebula  at  least  may  become  extinct 
without  passing  through  the  usually  accepted  or- 
der of  evolution  from  nebulae  to  star,  the  theory 
that  gaseous  nebulae  do  not  condense  into  stars 
would  leave  the  question  of  the  origin  of  stars  en- 
tirely unsettled.  That  there  is  a  continual  cycle 
of  change  from  nebulae  to  star  and  possibly  also 
from  star  back  to  nebulae  by  chance  encounter  of 
one  star  with  another  or  close  approach  of  two 
stars  seems  more  in  accord  with  observed  condi- 
tions. The  passage  of  a  star  through  a  stream  of 
dark  nebulous  matter  would  doubtless  result  in 
such  nebular  conditions  as  are  observed  in  the  case 
of  the  temporary  stars,  Nova  Persei,  Nova  Aquilse 
and  others. 

Man  is  handicapped  in  his  observations  of  the 

nebulae  by  the  fact  that  changes  in  the  form  and 

structure  of  these  objects  are  so  extremely  slow. 

A  hundred  or  a  thousand  years  is  but  a  moment  iu 

214 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  life  of  a  nebula.  It  is,  therefore,  next  to  im- 
possible to  detect  a  progressive  change  in  any  one 
nebula  that  would  show  whether  condensation  or 
expansion  is  taking  place. 

The  spectroscope  has  furnished  much  valuable 
information  concerning  the  gaseous  nebulae.  In 
fact,  practically  all  we  know  about  these  objects 
has  been  obtained  with  the  aid  of  the  spectroscope. 
We  trust  also  that  it  will  eventually  solve  the  mys- 
tery of  the  strange  gas  nebulium  that  is  the  most 
characteristic  element  of  the  gaseous  nebulae.  The 
fact  that  it  is  unknown  elsewhere  but  adds  to  the 
mystery.  The  condensation  of  the  gaseous  nebulas 
into  stars  and  the  final  transformation  of  stars 
back  to  nebulae  through  chance  encounters  and  col- 
lisions pictures  a  state  of  universal  and  continual 
change,  a  universe  without  beginning  or  end,  and 
in  absence  of  proof  to  the  contrary  this  is  generally 
believed  to  be  the  true  cycle  of  change  that  is  tak- 
ing place  among  the  stars. 


215 


CHAPTER  XXVIII 

THE  GREAT  STAR  CLUSTER  IN  HERCULES 

\  N  extensive  study  of  the  great  star  cluster  in 
<*  *•  Hercules,  in  connection  with  other  globular 
star  clusters,  has  been  made  at  the  Mount  Wilson 
observatory  and  results  seem  to  indicate  that  the 
parallax  of  this  noted  cluster  is  less  thain  one-ten- 
thousandth  of  a  second  of  arc,  and  that  it  is  at  a 
distance  of  37,000  light  years,  with  a  diameter  of 
several  hundred  light  years. 

This  faint  wisp  of  light,  barely  visible  to  the  un- 
aided eye  on  clear,  dark,  summer  nights,  thus  takes 
on  the  dimensions  of  a  sidereal  universe  sepa- 
rated from  us  by  immensities  of  space  so  vast  that 
our  minds  utterly  fail  to  grasp  them.  Thirty- 
seven  thousand  years  ago  then,  if  the  above  esti- 
mates are  correct,  the  light  that  now  comes  to  us 
from  this  gorgeous  assemblage  of  suns  started  forth 
216 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


on  its  journey  at  the  rate  of  186,000  miles  a  sec- 
ond, and  if  the  cluster  were  suddenly  blotted  out 
of  existence  another  37,000  years  would  elapse 
before  our  solar  system  would  fail  to  receive  its 
light. 

Only  the  mos*  powerful  telescopes  are  capable 
of  completely  resolving  the  Hercules  cluster  into 
its  stellar  components.  Of  more  than  5,000  stars 
counted  upon  one  photograph  fully  4,000  were 
fainter  than  the  thirteen  and  one-half  magnitude 
and,  therefore,  invisible  as  separate  stars  in  small 
telescopes.  Long  photographic  exposures  made 
with  the  largest  reflecting  telescopes  bring  out 
great  numbers  of  extremely  faint  stars  in  this  clus- 
ter lying  near  the  limit  of  visibility  of  these  great 
instruments. 

When  we  consider  that  the  entire  space  covered 
by  the  Hercules  cluster  is  only  about  one-sixteenth 
of  the  area  of  the  full  moon,  it  seems  almost  in- 
conceivable that  this  insignificant  little  patch  of 
light  represents  a  mighty  assemblage  of  suns. 

A  peculiar  distribution  of  stars  has  been  noted 

in  the  Hercules  cluster.    The  brighter  stars  extend 

outward  from  the  centre  in  curved  lines,  while  the 

extremely  faint  stars  show  a  uniformly  globular 

217 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


distribution.  Three  dark  lanes  making  an  equian- 
gular juncture  near  the  centre  of  the  cluster  were 
detected  many  years  ago  and  later  photographs 
show  a  similar  formation  repeated  at  other  points, 
which  implies  the  existence  of  some  definite  law  of 
formation. 

The  Hercules  cluster  is  considered  the  finest 
globular  cluster  in  the  northern  heavens,  though  it 
is  surpassed  in  splendor  by  two  clusters  in  the 
southern  hemisphere  in  the  constellations  Centau- 
rus  and  Tucana.  Over  6,000  stars  have  been 
counted  in  the  Centaurus  cluster  within  a  space 
about  as  large  as  that  filled  by  the  full  moon,  and 
they  average  about  twelve  and  one-half  magnitude, 
a  magnitude  brighter  than  those  in  the  Hercules 
cluster.  In  this  cluster,  also,  many  extremely  faint 
stars  are  present.  The  globular  cluster  in  Tucana 
is  somewhat  smaller  than  the  Centaurus  cluster  and 
contains  about  2,000  bright  members  that  are,  how- 
ever, more  closely  crowded  together  than  are  the 
members  of  the  cluster  in  Centaurus.  The  globu- 
lar cluster  in  Tucana,  which  is  a  constellation  near 
the  South  Pole,  is  regarded  by  some  as  the  finest 
object  in  the  heavens.  The  dark  lanes  noticeable 
in  the  Hercules  cluster  are  entirely  absent  in  the 
218 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


two  southern  clusters,  which,  show  a  decided  cen- 
tral crowding  of  the  brighter  stars  as  well  as  of 
the  extremely  faint  members. 

The  distance  of  the  Lesser  Magellanic  Cloud, 
which  appears  very  much  like  a  star  cloud  de- 
tached from  the  Milky  Way,  but  which  lies  too  far 
from  the  plane  of  the  galaxy  to  be  considered  a 
portion  of  this  girdle  of  the  heavens,  has  been  es- 
timated at  30,000  light  years.  The  Milky  Way, 
which  defines  the  outer  limits  of  our  own  sidereal 
system,  is  generally  believed  to  consist  of  several 
branches  lying  one  beyond  the  other.  The  nearer 
portions,  it  is  estimated,  lie  somewhere  between 
3,000  and  15,000  light  years  distant.  Estimates 
of  the  distance  vary,  according  to  whether  or  not 
we  include  stars  as  bright  as  the  sixth  magnitude 
among  the  hosts  of  stars  that  crowd  these  regions. 
The  vast  majority  of  stars  that  form  the  star  dust 
of  the  galaxy  range  from  the  fourteenth  to  the  six- 
teenth magnitude.  It  is  interesting  to  consider  in 
this  connection  that  a  star  10,000  times  as  luminous 
as  the  sun  would  appear  as  a  ninth  magnitude 
star  at  a  distance  of  20,000  light  years.  If  we  ad- 
mit the  presence  of  stars  brighter  than  the  ninth 
magnitude  in  the  nearer  portions  of  the  Milky 
219 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Way  we  must  either  admit  the  presence  of  veri- 
table giants  in  our  sidereal  system,  stars  that  are 
even  more  than  10,000  times  as  great  as  our  own 
sun  in  brilliancy,  or  we  must  limit  the  extent  of 
our  stellar  system  and  assume  that  the  nearer  star 
clouds  in  the  galaxy  are  but  2,000  or  3,000  light 
years  distant. 

A  class  of  objects  far  more  numerous  than  the 
globular  star  clusters  that  lie  at  immeasurable  dis- 
tances are  the  spiral  nebulae,  often  spoken  of  as 
the  white  nebulae,  to  distinguish  them  from  the 
green  or  gaseous  nebulae.  The  idea  that  these  are 
external  sidereal  systems  or  "island  universes"  has 
recently  been  revived.  Many  years  ago,  before 
the  day  of  large  telescopes  and  of  the  spectroscope, 
it  was  believed  that  all  nebulae  were  star  clusters 
that  could  be  resolved  into  separate  stars  by  tele- 
scopes of  sufficient  power,  but  when  the  larger  tele- 
scopes were  obtained  it  was  found  that  they  could 
not  resolve  some  of  the  nebulae  into  star  clusters, 
and  finally  along  came  the  spectroscope  to  prove 
the  truly  gaseous  nature  of  the  green  nebulae.  As 
to  the  nature  of  the  spiral  nebulae,  however,  we  are 
still  in  doubt.  The  spectroscope  simply  tells  us 
that  they  have  a  type  of  spectrum  known  as  "con- 
220 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tinuous,"  which,  may  belong  to  a  solid  or 
liquid  substance  at  high  temperature  or  to  an  in- 
candescent gas  under  high  pressure.  In  this  case 
the  spectroscope  refuses  to  give  us  any  informa- 
tion. 

We  are  familiar  with  the  idea  that  our  solar 
system  is  evolved  from  a  nebula,  but  the  spiral 
nebulae  to  which  we  refer  are  far  too  vast  to  give 
birth  to  anything  as  simple  as  a  single  sun  and  its 
satellites  or  even  to  arise,  on  the  other  hand,  from 
the  close  approach  of  two  stars.  Nothing  less  than 
clusters  of  suns  could  be  evolved  from  nebulas  as 
extensive  as  these.  The  evolution  of  groups  of 
stars  from  irregular  gaseous  nebulse,  such  as  the 
Orion  nebula  and  the  nebula  surrounding  the 
Pleiades,  is  a  process  now  going  on  before  our 
eyes.  There  are  also  moving  clusters  of  stars,  such 
as  the  Taurus  cluster,  which  is  known  to  include 
thirty-nine  stars  far  exceeding  our  own  sun  in  size 
and  splendor,  that  may  have  evolved  from  one 
nebula.  The  latter  star  cluster  has  been  very  ex- 
tensively studied  and  it  has  been  estimated  that  in 
something  like  65,000,000  years  it  will  appear  as  an 
ordinary  globular  star  cluster  about  twenty  min- 
utes in  diameter,  or  two-thirds  the  diameter  of  the 
221 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


full  moon,  if  it  keeps  up  its  present  rate  and  di- 
rection of  motion. 

If  future  investigations  of  spiral  nebulae  shall 
disclose  the  fact  that  these  formations  that  occur 
in  such  great  numbers  are  indeed  far  beyond  the 
limits  of  our  own  universe  and  form  isolated  stellar 
systems,  as  now  appears  to  be  the  case  with  the 
Hercules  star  cluster,  light  may  be  thrown  upon 
some  perplexing  questions  that  arise  concerning  the 
form  and  extent  of  our  own  sidereal  system.  Ac- 
cording to  some  astronomers  a  spiral  form  for  our 
own  stellar  system  fits  in  better  than  any  other 
with  all  the  known  facts  concerning  it. 


222 


CHAPTER  XXIX 

WONDERS   OF   THE   GLOBULAR  STAR   CLUSTERS 

INVESTIGATIONS  made  in  the  past  few  years 
by  Dr.  Harlow  Shapley  at  the  Mount  Wilson 
Solar  Observatory  in  regard  to  the  distances  and 
distribution  of  about  seventy  globular  star  clusters 
have  brought  results  amazing  even  to  the  astrono- 
mers themselves,  accustomed  though  they  are  to 
dealing  with  inconceivably  great  intervals  of  space 
and  time,  and  have  greatly  broadened  our  ideas  of 
the  form  and  extent  of  the  visible  universe. 

The  following  facts  respecting  these  wonderful 
star  systems  have  been  gleaned  from  several  ex- 
tremely interesting  articles  by  Dr.  Shapley,  ap- 
pearing in  recent  publications  of  the  Astronomical 
Society  of  the  Pacific,  which  are  preliminary  to 
complete  discussions  of  the  observations  and  re- 
sults now  in  process  of  publication. 
223 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Globular  star  clusters  are,  as  the  name  implies, 
symmetrically  shaped,  globular,  in  some  cases  ellip- 
soidal, systems  composed  of  thousands,  possibly 
hundreds  of  thousands,  of  individual  stars  strongly 
condensed  toward  the  centre.  A  few  of  these  clus- 
ters are  visible  to  the  naked  eye  as  faint  patches  of 
light,  and  the  largest  of  them  appear  to  fill  a  space 
in  the  heavens  less  than  that  occupied  by  the  full 
moon. 

The  most  noted  of  these  are  the  great  cluster  in 
Hercules  in  the  Northern  Hemisphere  and  Omega 
Centauri  and  47  Tucanse  in  the  Southern  Hemi- 
sphere. The  last  named  cluster  is,  in  fact, 
considered  by  some  to  be  the  finest  telescopic  object 
in  the  heavens. 

Indeed,  the  telescope  makes  a  most  striking 
transformation  in  the  appearance  of  these  hazy 
patches  that  we  strain  our  eyes  to  see  on  a  clear 
night.  A  most  brilliant  assemblage  of  thousands 
of  suns,  some  deep  red,  others  blue-white,  gleam 
and  flicker,  some  with  steady  intensity,  others  with 
the  periodic  pulsation  of  light  that  is  characteristic 
of  the  cluster  variables. 

It  is  the  periodic  waxing  and  waning  of  the  light 
of  the  cluster  variables  that  has  furnished  the  clue 
224 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


to  the  distances  of  the  globular  star  clusters,  though 
the  results  have  been  checked  by  comparing  the 
apparent  luminosities  of  other  stars  in  the  clusters 
of  the  type  of  the  red  giant  stars,  such  as  Antares 
and  Betelgeux,  and  of  the  blue-white  type  of  Vega 
and  Rigel  with  the  known  luminosity  of  these  stars 
at  a  standard  distance  from  the  sun. 

The  brightest  stars  in  the  globular  clusters  have 
been  found  to  have  a  surface  temperature  two  or 
three  thousand  degrees  less  than  that  of  our  sun, 
and  to  be  much  redder  in  color.  Emitting  as  much 
light  as  they  do,  their  volume  must  be  very  great. 
They  correspond  to  the  red  giants  of  the  Galaxy. 

The  blue-white  stars  of  the  clusters  are  two  or 
three  magnitudes  fainter  than  the  brightest  red 
stars,  and  among  the  bluer  of  these  stars  are  found 
the  cluster  variables  which  are  similar  in  their 
light  variations  to  the  noted  Cepheid  variables  of 
the  Galactic  system.  Their  light,  color,  spectrum 
and  velocity  in  the  line  of  sight  all  pass  through 
a  marked  periodic  variation  in  less  than  a  day. 

The  maximum  brightness  is  more  than  twice  the 

minimum,  but  the  average  brightness  for  a  star  of 

this  short  period  type  has  been  found  to  be  almost 

exactly  one  hundred  times  the  luminosity  of  our 

225 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


own  sun.  Between  two  and  three  hundred  typical 
variables  whose  periods  range  from  a  few  hours  to 
one  hundred  days  have  been  chosen  from  five  glob- 
ular clusters,  the  small  Magellanic  cloud,  and  the 
Galaxy  to  form  a  curve  which  shows  that  the  lum- 
inosity of  a  variable  star  of  this  class  bears  a  simple 
relation  to  the  period  of  its  variation  of  light. 

It  has  been  found  that  the  variables  with  periods 
less  than  one  day  average  one  hundred  times  the 
brightness  of  the  sun,  while  those  with  the  longest 
periods  average  nearly  ten  thousand  times  the  lum- 
inosity of  the  sun  and  are  rarely  surpassed  in 
brightness  by  other  stars. 

The  important  result  of  this  relationship  is  that 
it  gives  immediately  the  distance  of  stars  of  this 
type  as  soon  as  their  apparent  brightness  and  the 
period  of  their  fluctuations  of  brightness  are  known 
and  if  the  variables  are  located  in  globular  clusters 
it  gives  the  distances  of  the  clusters. 

Investigations  of  the  light  variations  of  the  Ce- 
pheid  variables  in  the  small  Magellanic  cloud  a 
few  years  ago  gave  a  distance  of  about  33,000  light 
years  for  this  object,  which  was  about  the  greatest 
distance  the  mind  of  man  was  asked  to  grasp  until 
the  measurement  of  the  distances  of  the  globular 
226 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


clusters  was  undertaken  by  the  same  methods. 

An  apparently  hopeless  task  has  at  last  been  ac- 
complished and  within  the  short  period  of  two 
years  the  distances  of  sixty-nine  globular  star  clus- 
ters have  been  measured  with  a  probable  error  not 
exceeding  twenty  per  cent,  of  the  values  given, 
which  compares  favorably  with  the  degree  of  ac- 
curacy obtainable  in  measuring  by  direct  methods 
the  parallax  of  our  nearer  stellar  neighbors  within 
a  distance  of  one  or  two  hundred  light  years. 

One-fourth  of  the  globular  star  clusters  meas- 
ured are  more  distant  than  one  hundred  thousand 
light  years.  The  two  nearest,  Omega  Centauri  and 
47  Tucanae,  are  a  little  less  than  23,000  light  years 
away. 

The  most  distant  so  far  known  has  a  parallax 
found  by  one  method  to  be  .000015  seconds,  and 
by  another  method  .000014  seconds.  Either  value 
would  place  it  at  a  distance  from  us  of  considerably 
more  than  200,000  light  years. 

Possibly  before  the  human  race  appeared  upon 
this  planet  the  light  that  now  reaches  our  eyes  from 
the  most  distant  globular  clusters  had  started  on 
its  journey. 

The  individual  stars  visible  in  the  globular  clus- 
227 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ters,  though  actually  from  100  to  10,000  times  more 
brilliant  than  our  sun,  appear  extremely  .faint  be- 
cause of  their  great  distance.  Their  apparent  mag- 
nitudes usually  average  from  the  twelfth  to  the 
seventeenth,  while  the  twenty-first  is  the  limit  of 
visibility  of  the  greatest  telescope.  Were  our  sun 
in  the  nearest  of  the  globular  clusters  it  would  be 
too  faint  to  be  visible.  The  stars  that  gleam  faintly 
in  these  clusters  are  the  giant  suns  of  their  sys- 
tems. 

How  many  more  there  are  too  faint  to  be  seen 
is  unknown.  The  diameters  of  the  globular  clus- 
ters average  several  hundred  light  years.  There  is 
nothing  in  the  neighborhood  of  our  sun  to  compare 
with  this  dense  crowding  of  huge  suns  into  a  com- 
paratively small  space.  Within  a  distance  of 
thirty-three  light  years  of  the  centre  of  one  typical 
globular  cluster  there  are  to  be  found  15,000  stars 
one  hundred  or  more  times  brighter  than  our  own 
sun. 

Within,  the  same  distance  of  the  solar  system 
there  are  known  to  be  but  four  or  five  such  stars. 
Yet  these  individual  stars  in  clusters  are  sepa- 
rated by  distances  comparable  to  the  distance  that 
separates  our  own  sun  from  Alpha  Centauri,  more 
228 


SPLENDORS    OF    THE   SKY 


than  four  light  years  away,  and  no  collisions  be- 
tween stars  in  globular  clusters  have  yet  been  re- 
corded, though,  of  course,  all  individual  members 
of  the  system  are  in  motion. 

The  distribution  of  the  globular  clusters  with 
reference  to  the  plane  of  the  Galaxy  or  Milky  Way 
is  most  striking.  Of  the  sixty-nine  clusters  exam- 
ined (and  the  survey  is  considered  complete  within 
one  hundred  thousand  light  years  of  the  sun), 
thirty-two  are  north  of  this  plane  and  thirty-seven 
south  of  it,  and  the  average  distance  of  the  clusters 
from  the  plane  is  about  twenty-two  thousand  light 
years.  The  centre  of  the  system  of  clusters  lies  in 
the  Galaxy  in  the  region  of  the  dense  star  clouds 
of  Sagittarius  and  the  diameter  of  the  system  is 
at  least  three  hundred  and  twenty-five  thousand 
light  years,  since  two  known  clusters  are  separated 
by  this  distance.  The  distance  of  our  local  group 
of  stars  from  the  centre  of  this  enormous  system  is 
about  sixty-five  thousand  light  years. 

A  significant  characteristic  of  the  system  of 
globular  clusters,  Dr.  Shapley  points  out,  is  the 
equatorial  belt  between  10,000  and  12,000  light 
years  wide  within  which  no  globular  clusters  are 
to  be  found.  Within  this  belt  are  nearly  all  the 
229 


SPLENDORS   OF   THE  SKY 


stars  listed  in  our  catalogues,  including  the  stars 
visible  to  the  naked  eye  as  well  as  the  gaseous  nebu- 
lae, diffuse  nebulosities  and  open  star  clusters. 
Outside  the  belt  are  the  globular  star  clusters,  the 
Magellanic  clouds,  a  few  isolated  stars  and  prob- 
ably the  spiral  nebulae. 

The  explanation  offered  for  the  avoidance  of  the 
equatorial  belt  by  the  globular  clusters  is  their  in- 
ability to  form  and  exist  as  compact  organizations 
in  such  an  intense  gravitational  field. 

The  conclusions  drawn  from  the  facts  so  far  dis- 
covered are  that  all  known  objects  in  the  heavens 
belong  to  one  enormous  unit.  The  globular  clus- 
ters, Magellanic  clouds  and  probably  spiral  nebu- 
lae as  well,  though  vast  systems  composed  of  thou- 
sands, possibly  hundred  of  thousands,  of  stars, 
and  moving  through  space  with  velocities  of  a 
higher  order  than  the  average  stellar  velocity,  are, 
nevertheless,  subordinate  members  of  an  organized 
system  whose  form  and  extent  the  globular  clusters 
roughly  outline. 

The  volume  of  this  vast  organized  system  is  more 
than  100,000  times  that  formerly  assigned  to  the 
stellar  system. 

The  present  location  of  our  solar  system  in  the 
230 


SPLENDORS   OF   THE  SKY 


universe  is  about  three  hundred  light  years  from 
the  centre  of  a  loosely  formed  moving  star  cluster 
which  lies  just  north  of  the  plane  of  the  Milky 
Way  and  about  half  way  from  its  centre  to  its 
edge. 

Man  no  longer  places  himself  at  the  centre  of  the 
universe,  but  finds  it  65,000  light  years  away. 


231 


CHAPTER   XXX 

THE  LIFE  OF  A  STAR 

^T^HE  discovery  of  radioactive  substances  has 
•*•  radically  affected  many  astronomical  theories 
bearing  not  only  upon  the  age  of  the  sun  and  its 
planet  family,  but  also  upon  the  evolution  of  the 
stars  in  general  and  the  periods  of  time  required 
for  the  various  stages  of  their  development. 

It  is  believed,  moreover,  that  there  are  certain 
properties  of  matter,  as  yet  unknown  as  the  revo- 
lutionizing properties  of  radium  were  unknown 
until  the  end  of  the  nineteenth  century,  that  will 
solve  the  great  problem  of  the  source  of  the  radiant 
energy  of  the  stars  and  explain  why  these  bodies 
pour  forth  into  space  light  and  heat  and  life-giving 
energy  at  a  lavish  rate  that  has  shown  no  signs  of 
abatement  during  hundreds  of  millions  of  years. 
It  is  now  known,  thanks  to  the  irrefutable  cvi- 
232 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


dence  furnished  by  radio-active  substances,  that 
certain  rocks  containing  uranium  and  the  products 
of  its  disintegration,  helium  and  lead,  have  been 
in  existence  for  at  least  1,500,000,000  years.  How 
long  prior  to  this  date  our  planet  earth  possessed 
a  surface  crust  is  not  known. 

According  to  the  testimony  of  geologists  based 
upon  examination  of  the  oldest  fossil-bearing  rocks, 
well  differentiated  forms  of  life  were  in  existence 
on  our  planet  a  billion  years  ago. 

During  this  inconceivably  long  interval  of  time, 
according  to  astronomers,  our  sun  must  have  main- 
tained its  energy  of  radiation  virtually  constant 
though  possibly  varying  cyclically  within  narrow 
limits,  for  any  marked  increase  or  decrease  in  the 
radiant  energy  of  the  sun  would  have  made  impos- 
sible the  continuous  development  of  the  various 
forms  of  life  that  we  know  has  taken  place  during 
this  period. 

This  fact  has  a  direct  bearing  on  the  evolution 
of  the  stars  or  their  transition  from  one  type  to  the 
next.  It  is  generally  assumed  that  the  helium  or 
bluish-white  stars  are  the  youngest  and  that  they 
change  gradually  to  the  next  type,  the  hydrogen 
or  white  stars,  then  to  the  yellow  or  solar  type  and 
233 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


finally  to  the  orange  and  red  stars  that  are  ap- 
proaching extinction. 

The  transition  from  one  type  to  the  next  in 
order  is  supposed  to  be  attended  by  a  decided 
though  gradual  decrease  in  the  light  and  heat-giv- 
ing power  of  the  star  that  amounts  to  several 
hundred  per  cent,  and  would  be  fatal  to  life  upon 
any  possible  planet  system  of  the  star. 

Astronomers  have  found  from  a  consideration  of 
all  known  sources  of  energy,  including  radio-activ- 
ity, that  twenty-five  million  years  is  all  that  can 
be  allowed  for  the  evolution  of  our  sun  from  a 
nebular  state  through  the  various  spectral  types  to 
its  present  condition,  that  of  a  star  in  the  zenith 
of  its  development. 

This  conclusion  is,  of  course,  not  at  all  in  accord 
with  any  of  the  observed  facts  either  of  astronomy 
or  geology  and  simply  shows  that  the  true  source 
of  the  energy  of  the  stars  has  not  yet  been  dis- 
covered. 

Whatever  the  source  of  the  solar  energy  may 
prove  to  be,  it  has  been  sufficient  to  keep  the  spec- 
tral type  of  our  sun  and  its  light  and  heat  unvary- 
ing, except  within  comparatively  narrow  limits, 
for  at  least  one  billion  years. 
234 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


For  this  reason  astronomers  are  inclined  to  be- 
lieve that  the  gradual  transition  from  one  star  type 
to  another,  granted  such  a  transition  does  take 
place,  is  a  matter  of  hundreds  of  millions  rather 
than  millions  of  years. 

Since  primitive  forms  of  life  first  appeared  upon 
earth,  our  sun  and  its  satellites  have  travelled  more 
than  100,000  light  years,  that  is,  as  far  as  light 
would  travel  in  100,000  years  with  its  unimag- 
inable velocity  of  186,000  miles  in  a  second,  and 
has  experienced  no  catastrophe,  though  it  has 
doubtless  journeyed  far  and  wide  through  the  star 
streams  of  the  Milky  Way  and  seen  the  apparently 
immovable  constellations  fade  away  in  the  distance 
and  new  groupings  take  their  place. 

Though  our  own  particular  sun  has  so  far  es- 
caped catastrophe  the  sudden  appearance  of  Novae 
is  proof  that  all  stars  do  not  pursue  the  normal 
course  of  evolution.  As  measured  by  man's  stand- 
ards of  time  temporary  stars  or  Novae  appear  in- 
frequently. 

Novae  of  startling  splendor  such  as  Nova  Aquilae 
of  the  year  1918  are  to  be  looked  for  only  at  inter- 
vals of  many  years,  running  at  times  into  centuries, 
but  less  conspicuous  temporary  stars  appear  on 
235 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


an  average  of  one  in  every  three  or  four  years. 

Many  of  these  do  not  even  attain  visibility  to  the 
unaided  eye  at  their  best,  but  this  is  probably  due 
rather  to  their  comparatively  great  distance  than 
to  marked  deficiency  in  actual  luminosity  at  the 
time  of  their  outburst. 

Since  a  year  is  but  a  moment  in  the  life  of  a  uni- 
verse, Novae  are  by  no  means  rare  phenomena  aside 
from  man's  point  of  view.  Since  the  time  when 
life  on  our  planet  was  in  its  early  infancy,  possibly 
1,500,000,000  years  ago,  400,000,000  temporary 
stars  have  burst  forth,  if  the  present  rate  of  their 
appearance  was  maintained  in  the  past. 

Four  hundred  million  celestial  catastrophes  have 
been  enacted  during  this  period.  Nova  Aquilae  No. 
3,  the  famous  temporary  star  of  1918,  has  under- 
gone in  a  few  short  months  rapid  and  irregular 
transitions  of  type  such  as  normally  would  require 
hundreds  of  millions  of  years  if  we  judge  by  the 
apparent  permanency  of  type  of  our  own  sun  dur- 
ing the  past  1,500,000,000  years. 

At  first  appearance  a  brilliant  blue-white  star  of 

helium  type,  Nova  Aquilae  later  appeared  as  yellow 

as  Capella  and  at  another  time  more  reddish  than 

Aldebaran,  a  late  type  star,  though  no  regular  pro- 

236 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


gression  of  type  occurred,  the  changes  being  fitful 
and  irregular.  Little  is  known  yet  concerning  the 
origin  of  Novae. 

According  to  a  suggestion  of  Prof.  William  H. 
Pickering,  Novse  may  arise  from  the  impact  of  a 
body  of  planetoidal  dimensions  with  a  star,  assum- 
ing that  groups  of  such  bodies  are  possibly  drift- 
ing through  space  in  great  profusion  and  the  va- 
rious members  are  separated  by  many  millions  of 
miles.  In  the  regions  of  the  Milky  Way,  where  the 
star  material  occurs  in  greatest  profusion,  encoun- 
ters would  be  most  apt  to  occur. 

There  is  the  possibility,  according  to  certain  as- 
tronomers, that  our  sun  may  have  acquired  part 
of  his  planet  family  by  capture.  Our  planet  must 
have  possessed  a  surface  crust  for  nearly  two  bil- 
lion years  at  least.  It  has  been  proven  that  its  in- 
terior is  not  viscous,  but  as  rigid  as  steel,  and  is 
probably  composed  of  material  very  closely  resemb- 
ling meteorites  in  composition. 

The  discovery  of  radio-active  substances  has  ex- 
ploded the  idea  that  the  only  source  of  the  inherent 
heat  of  the  earth  is  its  originally  high  temperature 
and  that  it  is  simply  cooling  off  from  a  molten  be- 
ginning. 

237 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


The  earth's  temperature  increases  about  one  de- 
gree in  temperature  for  every  100  feet  in  depth. 
This  was  formerly  believed  to  indicate  that  the 
earth  was  cooling  off  gradually.  It  is  now 
known  that  this  heat  arises  from  the  disinte- 
gration of  radio-active  substances  in  the  earth's 
crust,  which  sets  free  an  enormous  quantity  of 
heat. 

It  has  been  estimated  also  from  the  amount  of 
heat  generated  by  these  radio-active  minerals  at 
the  surface  that  the  radio-active  layer  of  rocks 
probably  extends  only  to  a  depth  of  thirty  miles. 
Beneath  this  crust,  it  is  believed,  there  lies  to  a 
depth  of  several  hundred  miles  material  similar  to 
the  stony  meteorites  in  composition,  while  the 
earth's  central  core  is  of  metallic  composition,  re- 
sembling that  of  iron  meteorites  and  is  entirely  free 
from  radium. 

There  is  apparently  nothing  either  in  the  pres- 
ent composition  of  the  earth  or  in  its  past  condi- 
tion throughout  a  period  of  over  a  billion  and  a 
half  years  to  particularly  favor  the  idea  that  it 
once  formed  part  of  a  primitive  solar  nebula. 
Neither  is  there  reason  to  believe  that  the  sun  itself 
was  appreciably  nearer  to  a  nebular  condition  a 
238 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


billion  and  a  half  years  ago  than  it  is  in  the  pres- 
ent age. 

There  is  a  possibility  that  the  fate  of  a  Nova 
may  await  our  own  sun.  Its  journeys  through  the 
universe  may  at  some  future  time  carry  it  through 
the  more  densely  crowded  portions  of  the  Milky 
Way,  where  some  dusky  mass  may  chance  across 
its  path  and  suddenly  terminate  in  a  flaring  out- 
burst of  light  and  heat  the  long  career  of  the  beau- 
tiful yellow  star  that  has  so  long  supplied  its  planet 
family  with  life-giving  energy. 

Under  such  circumstances  all  forms  of  life  on  its 
satellites  would  be  extinguished  in  the  twinkling 
of  an  eye.  Barring  this  celestial  catastrophe,  all 
present  indications  point  to  a  future  existence  for 
our  little  planet  for  many  hundreds  of  millions  of 
years  under  the  genial  rays  of  a  constant  sun. 


CHAPTER  XXXI 


light  years  distant  from  the  earth,  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  Milky  Way,  is  to  be  found 
a  class  of  stars  remarkable  for  their  deep  red  color. 
If  Sirius  and  Vega  are  the  diamonds  among  the 
celestial  jewels,  then  these  unusual  stars  are  the 
garnets  and  the  rubies. 

For  many  years  these  carbon  stars  or  Type  N 
stars,  as  they'  are  technically  called,  appeared  to 
have  no  place  in  the  evolutionary  system  of  the 
stars.  A  sequence  in  the  development  of  all  other 
classes  of  stars  had  been  well  established,  which  we 
will  briefly  outline  in  order  to  show  the  relation- 
ship of  the  carbon  stars  to  stars  of  other  types. 

Beginning  with  the  gaseous  nebulae,  the  accepted 
order  of  stellar  evolution  is  from  nebulae  to  extinct 
stars  through  a  continuous  series  of  changes,  the 
240 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


first  change  being  made  from  nebulae  to  bright  line 
stars,  whose  type  of  spectrum  consists  chiefly  of 
bright  bands  of  unknown  origin  and  a  few  bright 
lines  of  hydrogen  upon  a  faint,  continuous  back- 
ground of  rainbow  color. 

These  stars  are  spoken  of  as  the  Type  0  stars  or 
the  Wolf-Rayet  stars,  and  they  occur  almost  ex- 
clusively in  the  Milky  Way.  The  faint,  continuous 
background  implies  the  presence  of  gases  under 
high  pressure,  which  form  the  growing  nucleus  of 
the  star,  while  the  bright  lines  and  bands  emanate 
from  incandescent  gases  under  low  pressure  sur- 
rounding the  stellar  core  or  possibly  gases  under 
strong  electrical  excitement. 

Gradually  this  type  merges  into  the  Orion,  or 
Type  B,  stars,  in  whose  spectra  the  bright  bands 
have  disappeared.  The  bright  hydrogen  lines  be- 
gin to  diminish  in  intensity  and  gradually  fade 
away  and  the  dark  lines  of  helium  and  hydrogen 
appear.  This  type  is  often  called  the  helium  type, 
because  of  the  prominence  of  the  lines  belonging 
to  this  element.  The  continuous  background  is 
particularly  rich  in  blue  and  violet  light,  which 
gives  the  stars  of  this  class  their  beautiful  blue- 
white  color. 

241 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Rigel  is  a  magnificent  star  of  the  Helium  or 
Orion  type.  The  increase  in  the  number  of  dark 
lines  in  the  stellar  spectra  from  this  point  on  im- 
plies that  the  gases  in  the  stars'  atmospheres  are 
now  absorbing  more  and  more  from  the  source  of 
light  beneath  the  rays  of  the  elements  of  which 
they  themselves  consist,  according  to  one  of  the  first 
laws  of  spectrum  analysis. 

The  dark  lines  are  for  this  reason  often  spoken 
of  as  absorption  lines,  and  they  appear  dark  only 
by  contrast  with  the  brilliant  background  of  con- 
tinuous light  upon  which  they  are  projected.  As 
the  composition  of  the  stellar  atmosphere  changes 
with  the  advance  in  evolution,  absorption  lines  and 
bands  and  flutings  of  various  different  elements 
appear,  but  to  a  given  element  always  belongs  the 
same  set  of  lines  and  its  own  position  in  the  spec- 
trum. 

As  the  Orion,  or  Type  B  star,  gradually  changes 
to  the  Sirian  or  Hydrogen  type,  the  lines  of  helium 
diminish  in  intensity,  while  the  hydrogen  lines  in- 
crease and  finally  become  the  most  conspicuous 
feature  of  the  type.  Technically  this  group  is  re- 
ferred to  as  the  Type  A  stars.  The  name  Sirian  is 
given  to  it  also  from  the  fact  that  the  most  bril- 
242 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


liant  of  all  stars,  Sirius,  is  an  illustrious  member. 

These  stars  are  noted  for  the  intense  whiteness 
of  their  light  and  their  high  temperatures,  as  well 
as  the  low  density  of  their  atmospheres.  In  this 
class  the  metallic  lines  of  the  solar  spectrum  also 
begin  to  appear  faintly,  and  in  the  succeeding  type 
known  as  the  Calcium,  or  F  type,  they  show  more 
strength,  though  they  still  remain  inferior  to  the 
hydrogen  lines.  The  calcium  lines  have  become 
conspicuous  and  characterize  the  type. 

Canopus  is  a  most  noted  member  of  this  group. 
The  color  of  the  stars  from  this  point  on  is  tinged 
more  and  more  with  yellow.  The  next  step  in  stel- 
lar evolution  is  that  occupied  by  our  own  sun. 
Stars  of  this  class,  are  called  Type  G  stars.  In 
these  the  hydrogen  lines  are  still  very  con- 
spicuous, but  equalled  in  intensity  by  many  of 
the  metallic  lines,  which  now  appear  in  great 
numbers. 

Capella  is  also  a  prominent  member  of  this  class. 
This  stage  probably  represents  the  zenith  of  stellar 
development,  the  middle-aged  period  of  star  life. 
From  this  point  the  stellar  spectrum  becomes  more 
and  more  reddish  as  the  rays  of  shorter  wave  length 
become  absorbed  more  and  more  in  the  gases  of  the 
243 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

star's  atmosphere,  which  is  gradually  increasing  in 
density. 

Type  K,  that  immediately  follows  the  solar  type, 
is  characterized  by  spectra  in  which  the  hydrogen 
lines  are  now  becoming  fainter  than  some  of  the 
metallic  lines.  These  stars  are  orange  in  color. 
An  illustrious  star  of  this  type  is  Arcturus.  Even 
before  this  stage  there  is  manifest  a  marked  ten- 
dency of  the  stars  to  divide  into  giants  and  dwarfs, 
which  becomes  still  more  pronounced  in  the  fol- 
lowing class  of  red  stars  of  Type  M,  which  comes 
at  the  end  of  the  process  of  evolution. 

The  dwarfs  of  this  class  are  so  feebly  luminous 
that  they  seem  to  mark  the  last  stage  before  ex- 
tinction and  the  advent  of  dark  stars. 

A  decided  decrease  in  the  star's  temperature  is 
evidenced  by  the  appearance  of  flutings  and  bands 
in  the  spectrum,  due  to  metallic  compounds,  chiefly 
of  titanium  oxide.  Though  it  is  generally  considered 
that  the  dwarf  red  stars  of  this  class  are  nearing 
extinction,  many  believe  that  the  giants  of  Type  M, 
of  which  Antares  and  Betelgeux  are  well  known 
examples,  are  stars  of  low  density  that  are  grad- 
ually increasing  in  temperature  and  passing 
through  the  evolutionary  process  in  reverse  order. 
244 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


After  reaching  the  white-hot  hydrogen  or  helium 
stage  it  is  held  that  they  will  pass  once  more 
through  the  solar  stage  to  the  type  of  dwarf  red 
stars. 

Though  the  direction  of  progression  through  the 
various  types  is  a  matter  of  some  uncertainty  for 
certain  stars,  the  fact  that  there  is  a  gradual  change 
in  the  life  history  of  the  average  star  as  outlined 
above  appears  to  be  beyond  question.  Type  merges 
into  type  through  gradations  so  slight  that  it  is 
difficult  to  say  where  one  type  ends  and  the  next 
begins. 

Until  recently  stars  of  the  carbon  type  appar- 
ently had  no  place  in  this  scheme  of  evolution.  A 
gap  seemed  to  separate  them  from  stars  of  other 
types.  Though  presenting  some  points  of  resemb- 
lance to  the  red  stars  of  Class  M,  they  presented 
as  many  points  of  difference.  Both  in  general  dis- 
tribution in  the  heavens  and  in  type  of  spectra  they 
refused  to  be  classified  with  the  M  stars. 

The  carbon  stars  are  all  extremely  faint  stars, 
due  to  their  tremendous  distance  from  us,  even  the 
brightest  of  the  class  being  barely  visible  to  the 
naked  eye.  They  show  a  most  marked  preference 
for  the  plane  of  the  Milky  Way,  never  being  found 
245 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


at  any  great  distance  from  it,  while  the  red  stars 
of  Type  M  are  noted  for  their  nearly  uniform  dis- 
tribution in  space,  being  found  as  often  near  the 
poles  of  the  Milky  Way  as  in  its  plane. 

Some  of  the  M  stars  are  our  close  neighbors, 
while  the  brightest  of  the  carbon  stars  show  no 
parallax  or  motion  across  the  line  of  sight.  Their 
spectra  are  characterized  by  the  presence  of  dark 
bands  due  to  carbon  compounds,  which  fade  away 
toward  the  blue  end  of  the  spectrum,  while  the 
spectra  of  the  M  stars  have  bands  of  titanium  oxide 
sharply  defined  on  the  violet  side  and  fading  to- 
ward the  red. 

In  recent  years  the  carbon  stars  have  been  care- 
fully studied,  and  it  now  appears  to  be  well  estab- 
lished that  they  can  be  traced  back  in  evolution  to 
stars  of  the  same  type  as  the  sun  along  an  inde- 
pendent branch. 

The  discovery  of  a  new  type  of  star,  called  Type 
R,  that  appears  to  come  intermediate  in  develop- 
ment between  the  solar  and  carbon  stars,  possess- 
ing some  of  the  characteristics  of  each,  has  led  to 
this  conclusion. 

Stars  of  this  new  type  supply  the  miss- 
ing link  necessary  to  trace  the  development 
246 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  a  solar  star  into  a  carbon  star,  or  possibly  the 
reverse. 

Spectra  of  more  than  sixty  stars  belonging  to 
this  intermediate  class  have  been  investigated. 
Many  of  them  were  formerly  classified  as  carbon 
stars,  though  some  have  a  decidedly  yellowish  tinge 
and  partake  strongly  of  the  features  of  the  solar 
stars. 

There  are  then  two  paths  that  a  star  may  follow 
after  it  has  reached  the  point  in  its  development 
known  as  the  solar  stage.  Differences  in  the  rela- 
tive amounts  of  certain  elements  in  the  atmosphere 
of  stars  may  determine  which  path  shall  be  fol- 
lowed after  this  point,  whether  a  star  shall  pass 
through  Type  K  to  a  red  star  of  Type  M,  whose 
spectrum  is  dominated  by  compounds  of  titanium 
oxide,  or  through  the  new  Type  B  stars  to  red 
carbon  stars,  whose  spectra  show  the  distinctive 
bands  of  carbon  compounds. 

That  the  carbon  stars  can  be  linked  to  the  evolu- 
tionary chain  of  stellar  development  is  particularly 
satisfying  to  the  astronomer,  for  it  shows  that  all 
stars  can  be  included  in  one  great  system  of  evolu- 
tion and  pass  from  one  type  to  the  next  gradually 
as  they  increase  in  age  and  development. 
247 


CHAPTER  XXXII 

DWARF  STAR  HOTTER  THAN   THE  SUN 

HE  existence  of  a  tiny  body  two  or  three  hun- 
dred  per  cent,  hotter  than  the  sun,  yet  with 
a  diameter  only  one-hundredth  as  great,  situated 
only  thirteen  light  years  distant  from  the  earth, 
and,  therefore,  one  of  our  nearest  stellar  neigh- 
bors, is  a  most  interesting  recent  discovery  of 
astronomy. 

Van  Maanen,  of  the  Mount  Wilson  Solar  Ob- 
servatory, noted  the  extremely  high  proper  motion, 
or  motion  across  the  line  of  sight,  of  this  star,  and 
concluding,  therefore,  that  it  was  most  probably 
comparatively  near  to  our  solar  system,  made  a 
determination  of  its  parallax  from  a  series  of  six- 
teen photographic  plates. 

The  value  found,  two  hundred  and  forty-four 
248 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


thousandths  of  a  second  of  arc,  is  very  large,  the 
greatest  parallax  known,  that  of  Alpha  Centauri, 
the  nearest  star,  being  only  seventy-six  hundredth^ 
of  a  second.  There  are  in  all  hardly  a  score  of 
stars  that  have  larger  parallaxes  than  this  small 
body  and  are,  therefore,  nearer  to  us. 

The  motion  of  this  star  across  the  heavens  is  also 
exceptionally  great,  amounting  to  slightly  over 
three  seconds  of  arc  a  year.  It  is,  therefore,  the 
most  rapidly  moving  star  discovered  since  Bar- 
nard's Runaway  Star  of  1916,  which  is  also  a  very 
near  neighbor  of  ours,  six  light  years  distant  and 
a  very  faint  body  as  well,  possessing  only  five  ten- 
thousandths  of  our  own  sun's  brightness. 

It  is,  however,  a  whole  stellar  magnitude,  or  two 
and  a  half  times  brighter  than  the  newly  discovered 
sun,  which  has,  accordingly,  only  one  five-thou- 
sandth part  of  the  luminosity  of  our  own  sun  and 
is  one  of  the  faintest  stellar  bodies  known. 

The  most  surprising  fact  discovered  about  this 
diminutive  sun  is  that  its  faintness  is  due  to  its  ex- 
tremely small  size  and  not  to  failing  light.  This  is 
known  from  the  fact  that  its  type  of  spectrum  is 
the  Calcium  or  F  type,  which  belongs  to  bodies  at 
least  two  or  three  times  hotter  per  unit  area  than 
249 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


our  own  sun.  The  color  of  this  small  sun  has  also 
been  determined  and  is  white,  indicating  a  high 
surface  temperature. 

Since  the  light-giving  power  of  this  star  relative 
to  the  sun  is  known,  and  since  it  radiates  two  or 
three  times  more  brilliantly  per  unit  area,  it  is 
possible  to  determine  the  actual  size  of  its  radiat- 
ing surface  and  therefrom  its  diameter  relative  to 
the  sun's  diameter. 

This  diameter  is  found  to  be  approximately  one- 
ninetieth  of  the  sun's  diameter,  or  nine  thousand 
five  hundred  miles.  As  far  as  size  goes,  it  might, 
therefore,  take  its  place  among  the  smaller  satel- 
lites of  our  sun,  the  terrestrial  planets  Earth  and 
Venus  being  scarcely  inferior  to  it  in  size.  Yet 
this  dwarf  sun  rushing  through  space  is  intrinsic- 
ally a  far  hotter  body  than  our  own  sun,  judging 
from  its  type  of  spectrum. 

Strange  to  say,  the  mighty  Canopus,  estimated 
to  be  at  least  ten  thousand  times  more  brilliant 
than  the  sun,  has  identically  the  same  type  of  spec- 
trum. 

Since  the  dwarf  sun  recently  discovered  has 
only  one  five-thousandth  part  of  the  light-giving 
power  of  the  sun,  we  have  here  two  stars  of  iden- 
250 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tically  the  same  temperature  per  unit  of  surface 
area,  differing  at  least  fifty  million  times  in  lu- 
minosity. Such  is  the  disparity  existing  in  the 
actual  sizes  of  the  suns  of  the  universe ! 

The  only  escape  from  the  above  conclusions 
would  lie  in  considering  that  stars  with  identically 
the  same  type  of  spectrum  do  not  radiate  with  equal 
intensity.  It  is  assumed  to  be  one  of  the  funda- 
mental laws  of  spectrum  analysis,  however,  that  two 
bodies  with  identical  types  of  spectra  radiate  with 
equal  intensity  per  unit  of  surface  area. 

How  such  a  tiny  sun  could  continue  to  radiate 
light  and  heat  at  the  lavish  rate  indicated  by  its 
type  of  spectrum  for  any  great  interval  of  time  is 
a  problem.  Most  faint  stellar  bodies  so  far  discov- 
ered in  the  vicinity  of  the  sun  belong  to  the  group 
of  nearly  extinct  dwarf  stars  low  in  surface  tem- 
perature and  decidedly  reddish  in  hue.  This  bril- 
liant little  sun  of  calcium  type,  whiter  and  hotter 
than  our  own  sun,  is  a  marked  exception. 

It  is  by  far  the  smallest  body  of  its  type  so  far 
discovered.  In  absolute  magnitude  it  is  exceeded 
by  all  known  stars  with  the  exception  of  a  faint 
companion  star  of  Alpha  Centauri.  It  is  possible 
that  this  tiny  sun  may  possess  still  more  diminutive 
251 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


satellites  of  its  own  and  dispense  its  light  and  heat- 
giving  rays  to  these  smaller  bodies. 

Within  our  own  solar  system,  at  least,  it  is  the 
exception  rather  than  the  rule  for  bodies  to  be  un- 
attended by  satellites.  Were  this  small  sun  at- 
tended by  any  body  at  all  comparable  to  it  in  size, 
however,  its  presence  could  be  detected  by  its  dis- 
turbance of  the  bright  body. 

How  many  of  these  suns  of  planetary  size  exist 
in  the  universe  it  is  impossible  to  estimate.  It  is 
only  the  very  nearest  of  such  stars  that  can  pos- 
sibly be  detected.  At  a  distance  of  only  thirteen 
light  years  the  star  discovered  is  invisible  in  small 
telescopes.  Were  it  much  further  removed,  it 
would  be  invisible  even  in  large  telescopes.  Mil- 
lions of  these  diminutive  suns  may  exist  in  far  dis- 
tant parts  of  the  universe,  hopelessly  beyond  our 
reach.  It  is  only  the  light  of  exceptionally  large 
suns  that  reaches  our  eyes  from  far  distant  realms. 

Since  the  number  of  stars  of  the  thirteenth  ap- 
parent magnitude  to  which  this  sun  belongs  is 
estimated  at  something  like  two  million,  it  can  be 
judged  that  only  through  some  marked  peculiarity 
would  such  a  star  be  singled  out  for  observation. 

In  general  the  faintness  of  a  star  is  assumed  to 
252 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


be  an  indication  of  great  distance.  Very  distant, 
faint  stars  appear  immovable  in  the  heavens, 
though  they  may  be  in  reality  in  rapid  motion 
through  space.  It  is,  therefore,  convenient  in  many 
kinds  of  astronomical  work  to  determine  the  posi- 
tion of  some  object  under  observation  relative  to 
one  of  these  fixed  "  landmarks "  of  the  sky. 

It  is  only  occasionally,  as  in  the  present  instance, 
that  one  of  these  points  of  reference  shows  any 
individual  motion  and  thereby  calls  attention  to  its 
unusual  nearness.  In  observing  the  stars  the  as- 
tronomers have  given  their  attention  first  to  the 
more  brilliant  and  conspicuous  stars.  The  fainter 
and  less  noticeable  stars  have  received  less  atten- 
tion and  have  largely  escaped  detailed  investiga- 
tion because  they  are  far  more  numerous  than  the 
brighter  stars  and  to  examine  them  with  anywhere 
near  the  same  degree  of  thoroughness  is  a  manifest 
impossibility. 

The  brighter  a  star  the  more  likely  it  is  to  be 
classified  and  studied.  It  is  only  in  recent  years 
with  the  advent  of  powerful  telescopes  and  photo- 
graphic methods  of  observations  that  the  careful 
study  of  the  fainter  stars  has  been  undertaken  at 
all  exhaustively.  Interesting  and  important  facts 
253 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


regarding  the  fainter  stars  are  now  being  slowly 
accumulated  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  their  numbers 
run  into  the  millions  and  they  are  observable  only 
with  the  larger  instruments. 

The  importance  of  the  discovery  of  all  facts 
possible  concerning  the  smaller  as  well  as  the 
larger  suns  of  the  universe  is  very  great,  since  by 
this  means  light  is  thrown  upon  many  puzzling 
problems  associated  with  the  origin  and  evolution 
of  the  stars,  the  source  of  their  energy  and  their 
varied  physical  characteristics  as  well  as  their  num- 
bers and  distribution  through  space. 

It  is  a  decided  addition  to  astronomical  knowl- 
edge to  know  that  it  is  possible  for  a  body  no 
larger  than  our  own  planet  Earth  to  maintain  a 
surface  temperature  far  hotter  than  the  sun, 
though  how  this  tiny  sun  keeps  up  its  tremendously 
high  temperature  is  inconceivable  unless  there  is 
assumed  to  be  some  unknown  source  of  the  radiant 
energy  of  the  stars. 


254 


CHAPTER   XXXIII 

PHOTOGRAPHY  OF  THE  HEAVENS 

photography  of  the  heavens  has  become  of 
such  importance  in  all  branches  of  astronomy 
that  there  is  hardly  an  observatory  to-day  that  is 
not  provided  with  facilities  for  carrying  on  this 
valuable  work. 

Every  year  hundreds  of  photographic  plates  are 
exposed  in  the  study  of  celestial  objects,  and  prob- 
ably not  a  day  passes  that  the  sun  is  not  photo- 
graphed at  a  number  of  observatories  all  over 
the  world.  The  discoveries  already  made  by  pho- 
tography have  more  than  repaid  the  efforts  thajb 
have  been  made  to  bring  celestial  photography  to 
the  highest  degree  of  efficiency.  Since  the  photo- 
graphic plate  is  particularly  sensitive  to  the  violet 
end  of  the  spectrum,  every  advantage  has  been 
taken  of  this  fact,  and  by  means  of  specially  dyed 
255 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


plates  it  has  also  been  possible  to  photograph  be- 
yond the  visual  limit,  even  in  the  red  end  of  the 
spectrum. 

In  astronomical  photography  the  telescope  takes 
the  place  of  the  camera  and  the  photographic  plate 
takes  the  place  of  the  observer  at  the  eye  end  of 
the  telescope. 

It  is  of  the  greatest  importance  in  such  photo- 
graphic work  to  accurately  compensate  for  the 
effect  of  the  earth's  rotation  on  its  axis,  and  this  is 
done  by  means  of  the  clockwork  that  is  connected 
with  all  large  telescopes,  so  that  the  axis  of  tho 
telescope  may  be  given  a  motion  opposite  to  the 
direction  of  the  earth's  rotation.  In  this  way  all 
objects  in  the  field  of  view  are  kept  immovable  with 
respect  to  the  eye  or  photographic  plate,  and  the 
telescope  "follows"  the  object  in  its  apparent  west- 
ward motion.  Anyone  who  has  looked  through  a 
telescope  when  the  clockwork  is  not  running  knows 
how  rapidly  an  object  will  drift  out  of  the  field  on 
account  of  the  earth's  rotation.  It  is  customary 
when  photographs  of  the  heavens  are  taken  to  fol- 
low the  object  with  the  eye  as  well,  by  means  of  a 
visual  telescope  attached  to  the  photographic  tele- 
scope. By  this  means  any  slight  irregularity  of 
256 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


motion  can  be  at  once  detected  and  corrected  for 
during  the  time  of  exposure.  In  exposures  of  sev- 
eral hours  *  duration  the  rate  of  the  clock  might 
affect  the  motion  of  the  telescope  sufficiently  to 
render  the  photograph  worthless.  Exposures  of 
four  or  five  hours  are  frequent,  and  in  the  photo- 
graphy of  a  magnificent  spiral  nebula  in  Canes 
Venatici,  made  at  the  Mount  Wilson  Observatory, 
an  exposure  of  more  than  ten  hours  was  given. 

In  photographing  comets  which  have  a  percep- 
tible motion  of  their  own  during  the  time  of  ex- 
posure the  telescope  is  made  to  ' '  follow ' '  the  comet, 
that  is  the  comet  is  held  immovable  in  the  field  of 
view  of  the  telescope,  and  star  images  in  the  field 
then  appear  as  short  trails  of  light  instead  of  the 
sharply  defined  round  dots  they  would  other- 
wise be. 

Excellent  comet  photographs  have  been  taken 
since  photography  of  the  heavens  has  become  gen- 
eral and  research  work  into  the  nature  of  comets  is 
done  now  almost  entirely  by  means  of  photography. 
A  large  number  of  plates  are  examined  and  com- 
pared and  the  entire  history  of  a  comet  can  be 
studied  in  this  way  from  the  time  when  it  appears 
as  a  faint  nebulous  object,  through  the  interesting 
257 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


phase  when  it  is  approaching  or  receding  from 
the  sun  and  developing  an  extensive  tail,  until  it 
again  departs  into  the  depths  of  space.  It  can  be 
detected  on  the  photographic  plates  long  after  it 
is  beyond  the  reach  of  the  most  powerful  tele- 
scopes visually. 

Many  comets  as  well  as  asteroids  and  faint  satel- 
lites are  now  discovered  by  photography.  Plates 
are  exposed  to  various  parts  of  the  heavens  where 
the  existence  of  such  objects  is  suspected  and  the 
earth's  motion  is  exactly  balanced  by  means  of  the 
siderial  clock  so  that  when  the  plates  are  devel- 
oped each  star  registers  its  position  by  a  clear, 
sharp  dot  proportional  to  its  brightness.  If  any 
moving  object  is  within  the  field  it  will  appear  on 
the  plate  as  a  short  trail  of  light  proportional  in 
length  to  its  motion  during  the  time  of  exposure. 
In  this  way  it  is  easily  distinguished  by  its  appear- 
ance. A  host  of  asteroids  have  been  discovered  by 
this  method  and  the  some  comets  are  found  in 
the  same  way.  Halley's  comet  at  its  return  in 
1910  was  first  detected  upon  the  photographic 
plates.  Objects  too  faint  to  be  seen  in  the  largest 
telescope  will  cast  enough  light  upon  a  photo- 
graphic plate  in  several  hours'  exposure  to  reveal 
258 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


their  presence  in  the  heavens.  Several  satellites  dis- 
covered photographically  have  never  been  seen  ex- 
cept on  photographic  plates. 

These  are  too  faint  to  be  visible  to  the  human 
eye  aided  by  the  most  powerful  telescope,  and  we 
owe  to  photography  alone  our  knowledge  of  their 
existence.  The  eye  surpasses  the  camera,  however, 
in  observation  of  the  finest  details  of  planetary 
and  lunar  phenomena,  and  it  has  been  said  that 
photographs  taken  with  powerful  telescopes  do  not 
show  the  detail  observable  visually. 

The  study  of  all  solar  phenomena  has  been  con- 
sidered of  such  importance  that  there  now  exist 
observatories  that  make  this  their  chief  work.  A 
noted  observatory  of  this  class  is  the  Mount  Wilson 
Observatory  at  Pasadena,  Cal.  Wonderful  progress 
has  been  made  here  photographically.  The  spectro- 
heliograph  was  invented  here  by  Dr.  Hale  and  is  a 
device  for  photographing  the  sun  by  the  light  of  a 
single  wave  length  such  as  a  calcium  or  hydrogen 
ray.  The  spectro-heliograph  acts  as  a  screen  to  cut 
off  all  light  except  that  of  a  certain  line  in  the 
spectrum,  and  extremely  valuable  and  interesting 
photographs  of  the  sun  have  been  obtained  by  this 
method. 

259 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


On  total  solar  eclipse  expeditions  the  photo- 
graphic outfit  is  of  prime  importance.  At  this 
time  only  is  it  possible  to  obtain  photographs  of 
the  mysterious  corona  that  is  only  one-tenth  as 
bright  as  full  sunlight  and  therefore  masked  at  all 
other  times  by  the  glare  of  the  sun. 

A  striking  instance  of  the  value  of  photography 
to  astronomy  is  the  discovery  made  by  Prof. 
Barnard  through  the  examination  of  photographic 
plates  of  a  star  of  the  eleventh  magnitude  in  the 
constellation  Ophiuchus  that  has  the  enormous 
motion  through  space  of  at  least  ten  seconds  of  arc 
a  year.  This  puts  it  first  in  the  class  of  ' '  runaway 
stars/'  which,  according  to  the  late  Prof.  New- 
comb,  have  a  motion  that  not  all  the  matter  in  the 
universe  could  control.  The  greatest  known  annual 
proper  motion,  as  it  is  called,  has  been  8.7  seconds 
until  the  discovery  of  this  star,  but  very  few  stars 
are  known  that  have  a  proper  motion  greater  than 
one  second,  and  the  average  is  far  below  one  sec- 
ond. This  discovery  was  confirmed  by  the  study 
of  photographic  plates  at  Lick  and  Harvard  dating 
back  as  far  as  1888.  We  have  here  a  specific  case 
of  the  value  of  photographic  records. 

The  astronomers  of  to-day  are  storing  away 
260 


si 

;  ? 

IP 

S   > 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


upon  photographic  plates  material  that  will  lead 
to  the  discoveries  of  the  future.  If  such  valuable 
records  could  have  been  left  to  us  by  our  ancestors 
the  knowledge  of  the  wonders  of  the  heavens  would 
be  advancing  to-day  by  leaps  and  bounds.  In  all 
research  work  into  the  nature  and  structure  of  the 
universe  photographic  records  are  invaluable.  By 
comparison  of  plates  taken  many  years  apart 
changes  become  evident.  It  is  believed  that  nebulae 
may  possibly  change  greatly  in  form  in  the  course 
of  a  few  hundred  years  and  that  the  brightness 
of  many  stars,  aside  from  the  class  of  variables, 
may  have  changed  appreciably  in  this  time. 
Photography  is  by  far  the  best  means  of  solving 
such  questions  as  well  as  many  others  of  a  similar 
nature.  Four-fifths  of  all  spectroscopic  work,  it  is 
estimated,  is  now  done  photographically  and  done 
far  better  than  it  would  be  possible  to  do  it  visu- 
ally, owing  to  the  light  gathering  power  of  the 
sensitive  plate.  Spectra  of  stars  that  would  never 
be  seen  otherwise  can  be  detected  by  this  means. 

Last  but  not  least  is  the  fact  that  the  wonders 
of  the  telescope,  the  nebulas,  star  clusters,  planetary 
markings,  corona  and  numerous  other  equally  inter- 
esting phenomena  would  never  be  seen  except  by 
261 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


a  few  if  it  were  not  for  photography.  At  the 
different  observatories  in  this  country,  Lick,  Har- 
vard, Yerkes,  Mount  Wilson  and  many  others,  not 
to  mention  those  abroad,  magnificent  photographs 
have  been  taken  which  are  at  the  disposal  of  all 
of  us  through  our  schools  and  libraries.  To  be 
sure  the  result  may  be  that  many  of  us  are  only 
the  more  desirous  to  see  for  ourselves  the  beauties 
of  the  heavens  and  to  explore  the  depths  of  space, 
and  it  is  to  l)e  hoped  that  the  day  may  come  when 
each  city  will  have  an  observatory  at  the  disposal 
of  all  who  may  care  to  use  it.  It  is  surprising 
what  even  a  six-inch  telescope  will  reveal  and  we 
do  not  need  a  40-inch  Yerkes  telescope  to  enjoy 
the  wonders  and  beauties  of  the  universe. 


262 


CHAPTER  XXXIV 

THE  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PLATE  —  THE  ASTRONOMER'S  EYE 


fT^HE  astronomer  of  to-day  spends  very  little 
•••  time  gazing  at  the  stars  through  the  telescope. 
His  place  at  the  eyepiece  has  been  taken  by  that 
silent  sentinel  of  the  sky,  the  photographic  plate, 
which  is  on  duty  in  some  instances  for  hours  at  a 
time  gathering  precious  rays  of  light  from  star 
or  nebula  that  the  human  eye  would  search  for  in 
vain.  We  find  the  modern  astronomer  oftener  in 
the  dark  room,  the  physical  research  laboratory, 
the  instrument  shop  or  the  computing  room  than 
at  the  telescope.  His  discoveries  are  now  rarely 
made  by  direct  observation  of  the  heavens.  They 
result  chiefly  from  careful  examination  and  meas- 
urement of  photographs. 

Photographs  taken  on  June  7,  1918,  at  the  Har- 
vard College  Observatory,  where  the  photography 

263 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  the  heavens  is  carried  on  regularly  and  systemat- 
ically every  clear  night,  show  that  the  initial  stages 
in  the  rapid  increase  in  brightness  of  the  magnificent 
new  star  of  1918,  Nova  Aquilae  No.  3,  were  recorded 
by  this  means  even  before  the  star  became  visible 
to  the  naked  eye.  When  the  brilliancy  of  the  nova 
on  the  night  of  June  8  amazed  all  observers  the 
astronomer's  first  thought  was  to  obtain  photo- 
graphs as  quickly  as  possible  of  both  the  star  and 
its  spectrum  and  then  examine  its  past  history. 
This,  it  was  found,  had  been  recorded  for  fully 
thirty  years  on  photographic  plates  stored  away  at 
the  Harvard  Observatory,  where  many  a  valuable 
astronomical  discovery  has  been  made  by  means  of 
photography. 

A  never  failing  eye  is  kept  on  the  heavens  in 
the  form  of  the  photographic  plate,  and  changes 
that  take  place  there  hour  by  hour,  day  by  day 
or  year  by  year  may  be  recorded  for  future  refer- 
ence. Photographs  taken  in  our  day  may  be  of 
priceless  value  to  future  generations  of  astrono- 
mers, for  by  comparison  of  photographs  taken  at 
intervals  of  ten,  fifty  or  one  hundred  years  impor- 
tant discoveries  may  be  made  concerning  the  mo- 
tions of  the  stars  through  space,  changes  in  the 
264 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


structure  of  the  nebulae,  the  appearance  and  dis- 
appearance of  temporary  stars,  and  all  the  varied 
and  wonderful  phenomena  of  a  universe  of  count- 
less suns  at  all  stages  of  development. 

Celestial  photography  is  beset  with  many  diffi- 
culties and  presents  many  problems,  some  depend- 
ent upon  the  nature  of  the  plate  and  its  develop- 
ment, others  upon  the  instrument. 

Photographic  plates  are  subject  to  many  imper- 
fections. False  stars  frequently  appear  after  ex- 
posure of  the  plate.  It  is  not  known  whether  these 
appear  in  the  process  of  development  or  are  due  to 
defects  in  the  plate  itself.  They  are  usually  easily 
distinguished  from  true  stars,  however.  In  a  few 
rare  instances  defects  in  the  plate  have  been  taken 
for  asteroids  or  comets,  which  usually  appear  as 
short  trails. 

The  photographic  discovery  of  an  asteroid  with 
a  satellite  by  Prof.  Wolf  of  Heidelberg,  announced 
in  the  spring  of  1918,  caused  considerable  interest 
nt  the  time,  as  it  was  most  unusual  and  unexpected. 
Diligent  search  by  other  astronomers  and  the  ex- 
amination of  additional  plates  taken  of  the  same 
^egion  failed  to  confirm  the  discovery,  and  it  was 
finally  decided  that  the  "satellite''  was  possibly 
265 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


an  imperfection  of  the  photographic  plate,  though 
the  discovery  of  the  asteroid  was  confirmed. 

The  photographic  images  of  the  stars  are  not  of 
uniform  shape  and  density  all  over  the  plate.  They 
are  usually  perfectly  round  and  of  even  density  in 
the  centre  of  the  plate,  Lut  near  the  edges  they  are 
elliptical  or  elongated  and  irregular  in  density,  a 
fact  that  makes  their  accurate  measurement  very 
difficult.  Star  images  are,  in  fact,  affected  by 
many  different  factors,  depending  upon  the  kind 
of  plate  used,  length  of  exposure,  temperature  and 
developer,  as  well  as  the  telescope  itself,  whether 
reflector  or  refractor,  of  short  or  long  focal  lengths. 

It  is  a  well  known  fact,  however,  that  the  sizes 
of  the  star  images  on  the  same  plate  vary  with  the 
brightness  of  the  stars  photographed.  The  brighter 
the  star  the  greater  the  diameter  of  its  image  on 
the  plate.  This  affords  a  method  of  determining 
the  relative  brightness  of  the  stars  photograph- 
ically that  is  more  accurate  than  the  visual  method. 
The  human  eye  is  more  liable  to  error  than  the 
photographic  plate,  since  the  individual  peculiari- 
ties of  the  eye  are  many  and  subject  to  great 
uncertainty.  Another  advantage  of  the  photo- 
graphic method  for  finding  the  relative  brightness 
266 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  the  stars  lies  in  the  fact  that  stars  too  faint 
to  be  seen  appear  on  the  photographic  plate  even 
with  an  exposure  of  short  duration,  while  a  longer 
exposure  brings  out  additional  stars. 

The  photographic  plate,  as  is  well  known,  is 
particularly  sensitive  to  rays  of  short  wave  length, 
the  blue  and  violet  rays,  while  the  eye  is,  on  the 
contrary,  susceptible  to  the  rays  of  long  wave 
"  ength,  the  red,  orange  and  yellow  rays.  A  very 
important  application  of  this  principle  is  made  in 
determining  the  color  of  stars  so  excessively  faint 
that  they  cannot  be  studied  with  the  spectroscope. 
The  physical  condition  and  stage  of  development 
of  a  star  are  closely  associated  with  its  color  and 
therefore  any  knowledge  that  may  be  gained  in 
regard  to  the  color  of  faint  stars  will  add  mate- 
•iially  to  our  knowledge  of  them. 

If  an  excessively  faint  star  appears  much 
brighter  photographically  than  it  does  visually 
it  is  evident  that  it  is  particularly  strong  in  blue 
or  violet  light ;  that  is,  it  is  an  early  type  or  young 
^tar.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  star  is  fainter 
photographically  than  it  is  visually  it  is  strong 
in  red  or  orange  light,  to  which  the  eye  is  par- 
ticularly sensitive.  Such  a  star  is  a  red  or  late 
267 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


type  star.  This  difference  between  the  visual  and 
photographic  brightness  of  a  star  is  called  its  color 
index,  and  it  is  of  great  value  in  classifying  faint 
stars,  the  only  clue  in  fact  that  the  astronomer 
possesses  to  their  age  and  physical  condition.  It 
indicates  the  relative  proportions  of  light  of  dif- 
ferent wave  lengths  emitted  by  the  star  and  the 
nature  of  its  atmosphere. 

By  the  use  of  specially  dyed  plates  or  color 
screens  it  has  become  possible  to  shut  off  the 
rays  of  violet  or  blue  light  from  the  photographic 
plate  and  make  it  sensitive  to  the  same  rays  that 
affect  the  eye.  In  this  way  the  photographic  plate 
becomes  the  equivalent  of  the  human  eye  with  the 
added  advantage  of  being  free  of  the  individual 
peculiarities  of  vision  that  make  visual  estimates 
of  the  relative  brightness  of  the  stars  so  uncertain. 
The  stellar  magnitudes  determined  with  these  spe- 
cially prepared  plates  are  spoken  of  as  photo-visual 
magnitudes. 

The  relative  magnitudes  of  the  stars  are  thus 
expressed  in  three  different  scales,  the  visual,  the 
photo-visual  and  the  photographic.  The  first  two 
should  be  approximately  equal.  The  photography 
of  the  heavens  with  the  photo-visual  rays  opens  a 
268 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


comparatively  new  field  of  investigation  and  ex- 
periments with  various  methods  of  dyeing  plates 
or  screening  off  certain  rays  may  yield  some  valu- 
able results  in  the  future. 


269 


CHAPTER  XXXV 

THE   STORY   OF   A   RUNAWAY  STAR 

^TT*HE  recent  discovery  of  a  rapidly  moving  star 
•*-  in  the  constellation  Ophiuchus  aroused  con- 
siderable interest  in  the  astronomical  world.  The 
unusual  motion  of  this  star  was  detected  by 
Prof.  Barnard  at  the  Yerkes  Observatory  in  1916 
from  a  comparison  of  a  series  of  photographs  taken 
at  Yerkes  and  reaching  back  as  far  as  1894.  It 
was  confirmed  by  numerous  plates  taken  at  Har- 
vard Observatory,  the  earliest  of  which  dates  back 
to  1888. 

In  one  year  this  star  moves  about  twice  as  far 
as  the  average  star  does  in  a  century.  It  has  the 
enormous  proper  motion,  that  is,  motion  perpen- 
dicular to  the  line  of  sight  or  across  the  sky,  of 
10.3  seconds  a  year.  If  a  star  moves  two-tenths  of 
270 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


a  second  a  year  it  is  considered  to  have  a  large 
proper  motion. 

So  slight  is  the  change  in  the  relative  positions 
of  the  vast  majority  of  stars  from  year  to  year 
that  after  the  lapse  of  a  thousand  years  the  skies 
are  practically  the  same  in  their  general  appear- 
ance. 

The  smallest  displacement  that  a  keen  eye  can 
detect  in  the  position  of  a  star  when  unaided  by  a 
telescope  is  three  minutes  of  arc,  and  the  average 
cross  motion  of  a  star  in  a  thousand  years  does 
not  exceed  one  minute. 

The  extremely  few  stars  that  form  notable  ex- 
ceptions are  generally  spoken  of  as  "  runaway 
stars. ' '  The  faint  star  in  the  southern  hemisphere 
known  only  by  its  catalogue  name  of  Cordoba  Zone 
5th  No.  243  formerly  headed  the  list  of  runaway 
stars  with  a  proper  motion  of  8.70  seconds,  and 
next  in  order  is  the  famous  runaway  star  Groom- 
bridge,  1830,  with  a  cross  motion  of  7.07  seconds. 

So  rapid  is  the  motion  of  Barnard's  star  that  it 
will  cover  an  arc  of  fully  three  degrees,  just  the 
length  of  the  belt  of  Orion,  in  a  thousand  years. 
If  the  majority  of  stars  had  a  motion  at  all  com- 
parable to  this  the  appearance  of  the  constella- 
271 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tions  would  be  entirely  changed  in  a  few  centuries. 
If  the  two  stars  spoken  of  as  the  "  Pointers "  in 
the  Great  Dipper  had  a  proper  motion  as  high  as 
ten  seconds  a  year  this  famous  constellation  would 
lose  its  distinctive  shape  in  considerably  less  than 
a  thousand  years. 

Many  stars  have  a  common  drift  through  space, 
but  it  is  very  rare  for  all  the  chief  stars  of  a  con- 
stellation to  share  the  same  direction  of  motion. 
Of  the  seven  stars  that  form  the  outline  of  the 
Great  Dipper  five  are  moving  in  the  same  direc- 
tion, but  the  brighter  star  of  the  Pointers  and  the 
star  at  the  end  of  the  handle  are  moving  in  an 
entirely  different  direction. 

In  the  short  time  that  has  elapsed  since  its  dis- 
covery determinations  of  the  parallax,  radial  ve- 
locity and  type  of  spectrum  of  the  new  star  have 
yielded  some  interesting  results.  As  seen  in  the 
36-inch  Lick  refractor  it  is  a  faint,  orange-colored 
star  of  the  1(%  magnitude,  and  it  has  the  type 
of  spectrum  that  is  characteristic  of  stars  far  ad- 
vanced in  evolution.  It  is  what  is  known  as  a 
"  dwarf "  star  of  the  type  M.  The  variable  star 
Alpha  Herculis  is  a  "  giant "  of  the  same  class. 
The  spectra  of  stars  of  type  M  are  strangely  fluted 
272 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


in  appearance,  because  of  the  presence  of  titanium 
oxide.  It  is  not  known  as  yet  why  stars  of  this 
type  show  spectra  so  dominated  by  this  one  sub- 
stance. 

The  shifting  of  the  lines  of  this  star's  spectrum 
toward  the  blue  indicates  that  it  is  approaching 
the  solar  system,  and  measurements  of  the  amount 
of  this  shift  indicate  a  rate  of  approach  in  the 
line  of  sight  of  about  sixty  miles  a  second.  It  is 
a  well  known  fact  that  if  a  star  is  receding  from 
the  earth  the  lines  of  its  spectrum  shift  toward  the 
red  end  of  the  spectrum  and  if  it  is  approaching 
they  shift  toward  the  blue.  So  it  is  by  the  meas- 
urement of  the  lines  in  this  star  '$  spectrum  that  we 
can  tell  it  is  coming  toward  us  at  the  rate  of  sixty 
miles  a  second. 

Some  determinations  of  the  parallax  of  this  star 
have  been  made,  and  apparently  it  is  the  largest 
known,  with  the  exception  of  the  parallax  of  Alpha 
Centauri,  the  nearest  star.  In  other  words,  Bar- 
nard's new  star  is  probably  our  second  nearest 
neighbor,  and,  its  brightness  is  found  to  be  five 
ten-thousandths  that  of  the  sun,  which  makes  it 
one  of  the  faintest  stars  so  far  known. 

It  seems  to  be  characteristic  of  " dwarf"  stars 
273 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  this  type  to  have  high  velocities.  There  is  a 
decided  tendency  for  stars  to  increase  the  speed  of 
their  journey  through  space  as  they  increase  in 
age,  although  such  a  velocity  as  this  star  possesses 
is  far  above  what  we  should  expect  of  a  star  of 
its  class.  It  seems  to  be  a  true  runaway  star. 
Since  faint  stars  have  not  yet  received  as  careful 
scrutiny  as  has  been  given  to  the  brighter  members 
of  the  stellar  system,  possibly  we  may  find  in  time 
that  there  are  faint  stars  nearing  extinction  that 
travel  through  space  with  a  velocity  far  exceeding 
any  to  which  we  have  been  accustomed. 

It  is  a  peculiar  fact  that  nearly  all  types  of 
stars  show  a  tendency  to  crowd  toward  the  plane 
of  the  Milky  Way.  Type  M,  to  which  the  newly 
discovered  star  belongs,  is  a  noted  exception  to 
this  rule.  Stars  of  this  type  show  a  spherical  dis- 
tribution of  space  and  are  just  as  likely  to  be 
found  at  the  poles  of  the  Milky  Way  as  in  its 
plane.  It  has  been  suggested  that  dwarfs  of  this 
type  with  extremely  high  velocities  such  as  Bar- 
nard's star  possesses  may  have  acquired  their  enor- 
mous speed  while  falling  in  toward  the  plane  of 
the  Milky  Way  from  great  distances  without. 

Runaway  stars  have  also  been  spoken  of  as 
274 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


visitors  passing  through  our  stellar  system  from 
regions  beyond.  It  has  been  said  on  good  authority 
that  there  is  not  sufficient  matter  in  our  stellar 
system  to  control  the  motion  of  such  a  runaway 
star  as  Groombridge,  1830. 

In  the  short  time  that  has  elapsed  since  the 
detection  of  the  enormous  proper  motion  of  the 
new  star  some  very  interesting  facts  have  been 
well  established.  This  star  is  in  all  probability  our 
second  nearest  neighbor  at  a  distance  of  about  six 
light  years.  Its  luminosity  is  five  ten-thousandths 
of  the  sun,  making  it  one  of  the  least  luminous  of 
all  stars  so  far  discovered,  and  it  is,  as  we  would 
expect,  a  star  of  most  advanced  type,  bordering 
close  upon  extinction. 


275 


CHAPTER  XXXVI 

MEASURING  STAR  DISTANCES 

>TpHE  parallax  of  a  star  is  its  apparent  displace- 
•-  ment  in  the  sky  due  to  the  change  in  the 
earth's  position  in  its  orbit.  It  is  the  angle  that 
93,000,000  miles,  the  distance  from  the  earth  to 
the  sun,  subtends  at  the  star.  Viewed  from  the 
vast  majority  of  the  stars  this  base-line  shrinks 
to  an  immeasurable  point. 

The  direct  measurement  of  the  parallax  of  the 
stars  by  the  triangulation  method,  by  which  the 
star's  displacement  at  different  times  of  year  is 
determined  either  photographically  or  visually 
with  reference  to  faint  stars  so  distant  as  to  have 
zero  parallax,  is  possible  only  for  a  few  stars  near 
the  solar  system.  The  distances  of  nearly  a  thou- 
sand stars  have  been  determined  with  more  or  less 
accuracy  by  this  method. 
276 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


The  astronomer  is  here  attacking  a  problem 
simple  in  principle  but  possessing  great  practical 
difficulties  due  to  the  minuteness  of  the  angle  to 
be  measured.  The  largest  known  parallax,  which, 
of  course,  belongs  to  the  nearest  star,  is  only  sev- 
enty-eight hundredths  of  a  second.  This  value  of 
the  parallax  corresponds  to  a  distance  of  about 
twenty-five  trillion  miles  from  the  earth. 

Since  to  express  the  distance  of  the  stars  in 
miles  would  be  as  cumbersome  and  meaningless 
as  to  express  the  distance  from  the  earth  to  the 
moon  or  neighboring  planets  in  inches,  a  new  unit 
for  the  measurement  of  stellar  distances  has  been 
found  in  the  velocity  of  light.  In  one  second  light 
travels  186,000  miles  j  in  one  year  it  travels  nearly 
six  trillion  miles.  The  distance  light  travels  in  one 
year  is  spoken  of  as  the  light  year.  The  distance 
of  over  twenty-five  trillion  miles  that  separates 
us  from  the  nearest  star  is  equal  to  four  and  one- 
third  light  years,  and  the  rays  of  light  leaving  this 
star  take  four  and  one-third  years  to  reach  the 
earth. 

There  are  about  twenty  stars  with  parallaxes 
exceeding  0."2.  A  parallax  of  0/2  corresponds  to 
a  little  over  sixteen  light  years.  There  are  about 
277 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


twenty  stars  known  to  be  within  this  distance  of 
the  sun,  and  their  distances  have  been  determined 
by  direct  measurement  of  their  parallaxes  with  an 
error  that  is  less  than  25  per  cent,  of  the  quantity 
measured. 

A  directly  measured  parallax  of  ".02  has  very 
little  value,  because  unavoidable  errors  of  in- 
struments may  be  nearly  as  large  as  the  quantity 
to  be  measured.  This  parallax  corresponds  to  a  dis- 
tance of  about  160  light  years,  and  the  tremendous 
extent  of  the  universe  can  be  judged  from  the 
fact  that  scarcely  one  hundred  stars  have  paral- 
laxes greater  than  ".02.  It  is  safe  to  say  that  no 
reliable  measures  of  the  distances  of  the  stars 
lying  beyond  this  point  can  be  made  by  direct 
measurements  of  their  parallaxes. 

The  triangulation  method  is  long  and  tedious 
and  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  systematic  as 
well  as  accidental  errors.  The  finally  determined 
parallaxes  are  usually  the  result  of  a  large  number 
of  independent  measurements. 

There  are  a  number  of  indirect  methods  of  find- 
ing the  parallax  of  the  more  distant  stars.  The 
most  important  of  these  is  probably  the  one  that 
deals  with  the  proper  motions  of  the  stars.  The 
278 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


stars  are  all  moving1  in  various  directions  and  at 
different  rates.  The  actual  motion  or  space  motion 
of  a  star,  as  it  is  called,  can  be  divided  into  two 
components.  One  is  the  motion  in  the  line  of 
sight  toward  or  from  the  observer.  This  is  called 
the  radial  velocity  and  can  be  determined  by  means 
of  the  spectroscope.  The  other  component,  the 
angular  motion  across  the  line  of  sight,  is  called 
the  proper  motion  of  the  star.  In  general  the 
nearer  a  star  is  to  the  earth  the  greater  will  be  its 
proper  motion. 

While  parallax  is  a  displacement  in  a  star's 
position  due  to  a  change  in  the  observer's  posi- 
tion as  the  earth  moves  around  the  sun,  proper 
motion  is  the  displacement  in  the  star's  position 
due  to  its  own  motion  across  the  line  of  sight, 
and,  of  course,  the  nearer  the  star  is  to  the  observer 
the  more  it  appears  to  be  displaced  and  the  greater 
its  proper  motion.  A  star  that  has  no  measurable 
proper  motion  is  at  great  distance  from  the  earth. 

"When  both  the  radial  velocity  and  the  proper 
motion  of  a  star  are  known  its  distance  from  the 
earth  can  be  determined,  for  its  cross-motion  then 
becomes  known  both  in  angular  measure  and  miles 
per  second.  Moreover,  the  distances  of  moving 
279 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


groups  of  stars  or  moving  star  clusters  can  be 
found  when  the  radial  velocity  of  any  one  star  in 
the  group  is  known,  since  the  stars  are  all  moving 
at  the  same  rate  in  the  same  direction.  The  extent 
of  the  group,  in  light  years,  the  distances  sepa- 
rating individual  stars,  as  well  as  the  distance  of 
the  group  from  the  earth,  become  known  as  soon 
as  the  common  proper  motion  of  the  stars  and  the 
radial  velocity  of  one  of  the  group  has  been 
determined. 

When  the  distance  of  a  star  is  known,  its  abso- 
lute magnitude  or  luminosity,  compared  with  the 
sun's  luminosity,  can  also  be  found  from  a  simple 
relation  between  the  parallax  and  the  apparent 
and  actual  brightness  of  the  star. 

Some  important  results  arising  from  investiga- 
tions of  the  proper  motions  and  radial  velocities  of 
stars  have  been  the  discovery  of  star  drift  or  star 
streaming,  and  the  direction  and  amount  of  the 
sun's  motion  through  space  as  well  as  actual  de- 
termination of  distances  in  light  years  for  indi- 
vidual types  or  groups  of  stars  such  as  the  Cepheid 
variables,  the  Orion  stars,  the  giant  red  stars,  the 
Pleiades,  the  Ursa  Major  group,  and  others. 

The  motion  of  the  sun  through  space  also  fur- 
280 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


nishes  a  valuable  base  line  for  the  determination 
of  the  distances  of  the  stars.  This  motion  amounts 
to  nearly  four  hundred  million  miles  a  year  and 
is,  of  course,  increasing  year  by  year.  If  the 
motion  in  one  year  gives  too  small  a  base  line  the 
motion  in  ten  years  or  one  hundred  years  can 
be  used.  In  applying  this  method  the  individual 
motions  of  the  stars  have  to  be  taken  into  account, 
but  it  is  customary  in  computing  the  average  dis- 
tance of  a  certain  class  of  stars  to  go  on  the  assump- 
tion that  the  sum  of  the  individual  motions  of 
stars  moving  in  all  directions  will  compensate  each 
other  and  the  result  will  be  the  same  as  if  all 
the  stars  were  at  rest. 

The  average  of  the  motions  of  a  large  number  of 
stars  across  the  line  of  sight  will  total  zero  and 
the  average  of  their  motions  in  the  line  of  sight 
will  be  made  up  of  their  own  motions  plus  the 
effect  of  the  sun's  motion,  which  is  spoken  of  as 
the  parallactic  drift,  since  it  is  used  to  obtain  the 
parallax  of  the  group  in  question.  When  the  sum 
of  the  radial  velocities  of  all  the  stars  in  the 
group  is  formed  the  individual  motions  of  the 
stars  cancel  each  other  and  the  value  remaining 
represents  the  effect  of  the  sun's  motion  on  the 
281 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


group.  The  amount  and  direction  of  the  sun's 
motion  is  known  and  so  the  result  gives  directly  the 
parallax  of  the  group. 

Photometry,  or  the  measurement  of  the  apparent 
brightness  of  the  stars,  is  becoming  more  and  more 
important,  since  it  has  now  become  possible  to 
find  the  absolute  magnitude  or  light-giving  power 
of  stars  of  certain  types  independently  of  their 
distances.  When  both  the  absolute  and  apparent 
brightness  of  a  star  are  known  the  star's  distance 
can  be  found,  just  as  when  we  know  the  candle 
power  of  a  given  light  we  can  find  the  distance 
at  which  it  will  have  a  certain  apparent  bright- 
ness. 

Absolute  magnitude  is  the  new  unit  for  measur- 
ing the  light-giving  power  of  suns,  just  as  candle- 
power  is  the  unit  for  measuring  the  light-giving 
power  of  terrestrial  lights.  It  is  defined  as  the 
apparent  brightness  a  star  would  possess  if  it 
were  at  a  distance  of  thirty-three  light  years  from 
the  earth,  which  is  the  distance  that  corresponds 
to  a  parallax  of  one-tenth  of  a  second  of  arc.  At 
this  distance  the  sun,  which  has  the  value  minus 
26.7  on  the  apparent  brightness  scale,  has  the 
value  5  in  absolute  magnitude.  That  is,  if  the 
282 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


sun  were  thirty-three  light  years  distant  it  would 
appear  to  be  only  a  fifth  magnitude  star. 

The  same  scale  of  relative  brightness  holds  for 
the  absolute  magnitudes  of  stars  as  for  the  ap- 
parent magnitudes,  each  unit  of  magnitude  rep- 
resenting a  change  in  intensity  in  the  ratio  of 
1  to  21/2-  A  change  of  five  magnitudes  means  a 
change  of  a  hundred  fold  in  brightness.  A  star 
whose  absolute  magnitude  is  ten  has  only  one- 
hundredth  of  the  light-giving  power  of  the  sun, 
but  if  the  absolute  magnitude  is  zero  the  star  is 
a  hundred  times  brighter  than  the  sun.  An  ab- 
solute magnitude  of  minus  five  means  the  object  is 
10,000  times  more  brilliant  intrinsically  than  the 
sun.  It  has  been  found  that  there  is  as  great  a 
range  in  the  actual  or  absolute  magnitudes  of  the 
stars  as  there  is  in  their  apparent  magnitudes. 

We  come  now  to  a  most  important  point,  upon 
which  depends  the  value  of  the  photometric  method 
of  finding  the  distances  of  star  clusters  thousands 
and  even  hundreds  of  thousands  of  light  years 
distant.  That  is,  there  appears  to  be  an  upper 
limit  to  the  light-giving  power  of  suns,  and,  more- 
over, certain  types  of  stars  possess  a  nearly  uniform 
luminosity,  the  various  stars  of  the  type  differing 
283 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


little  among  themselves  in  light-giving  power.  The 
brilliant  helium  stars  are  all  massive  stars  averag- 
ing one  hundred  times  brighter  than  the  sun.  The 
giant  red  stars  are  still  more  luminous.  The 
Cepheid  variables,  valuable  because  the  periods 
of  their  light  variations  depend  on  their  luminosity 
so  closely  that  their  absolute  magnitudes  can  be  de- 
termined when  their  periods  are  known,  are  also 
giant  stars.  The  Cepheids  with  periods  less  than 
a  day  average  one  hundred  times  brighter  than  the 
sun,  while  those  of  longest  period  are  rarely  sur- 
passed in  brightness  by  other  stars. 

These  facts  furnish  a  simple  accurate  method 
for  finding  the  distances  of  the  globular  star 
clusters  whose  brightest  stars  are  helium  stars, 
giant  red  stars  and  Cepheid  variables.  Measuring 
the  apparent  brightness  of  the  stars  in  various 
clusters  and  knowing  the  absolute  magnitudes  of 
these  same  stars,  the  distances  of  the  globular 
clusters  can  be  found  more  quickly  and  easily  than 
the  parallax  of  a  star  a  hundred  or  so  light  years 
from  the  earth  can  be  found  by  the  triangulation 
method  and  with  less  error.  The  average  absolute 
magnitudes  for  the  various  types  appearing  in 
clusters  were  obtained  originally  by  the  proper 
284 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


motion  or  parallactic  drift  method,  using  stars  of 
these  types  comparatively  near. 

It  has  been  found  by  this  simple  method  that 
the  globular  clusters  are  the  most  distant  celestial 
objects  known,  except  possibly  the  spiral  nebulae. 
The  only  limit  set  for  the  measurement  of  the  dis- 
tances of  those  objects  lies  in  the  limit  of  visi- 
bility of  the  telescope  used.  There  appears,  how- 
ever, to  be  a  thinning  out  of  these  objects  beyond 
a  distance  of  200,000  light  years,  and  it  is  possible 
that  all  the  globular  clusters  in  the  visible  universe 
are  within  the  reach  of  telescopes  now  in  use.  The 
60-inch  Mount  Wilson  reflector  shows  stars  down 
to  the  twentieth  apparent  magnitude.  The  most 
distant  globular  cluster,  which  represents  the 
greatest  distance  man  has  so  far  measured,  is 
200,000  light  years  distant  and  its  brightest  stars 
are  of  the  seventeenth  apparent  magnitude.  A 
margin  of  apparent  brightness  still  remains  for  the 
measurement  of  clusters  still  more  distant  if  they 
exist. 


285 


CHAPTER  XXXVI 

LAYING    STARS   IN    THE   BALANCES 

weighing  of  the  heavenly  bodies,  the  sun, 
the  planets  and  the  stars,  appears  a  stupen- 
dous problem,  beyond  solution,  and  so  in  truth  it 
was  until  Newton  discovered  that  the  law  of  gravi- 
tation is  universal  and  reaches  even  to  the  stars. 

The  same  force  that  holds  us  to  the  earth  holds 
the  earth  in  its  orbit  and  sways  the  components 
of  a  double  star  system.  Every  particle  of  matter 
in  the  universe  attracts  every  other  particle  with 
a  force  proportional  to  the  product  of  the  masses 
and  inversely  proportional  to  the  square  of  the 
distance  between  them.  The  greater  the  masses 
and  the  less  the  distance  between  them  the  stronger 
their  attraction  for  each  other.  It  is  upon  this 
principle  that  the  weighing  of  celestial  as  well  as 
terrestrial  objects  rests. 

286 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


If  an  object  were  not  subject  to  the  attraction 
of  neighboring  masses  it  would  travel  forever  in 
a  straight  line.  It  is  the  attraction  of  nearby 
objects  that  causes  the  path  to  deviate  from  a 
straight  line,  and  the  amount  of  the  deviation  is 
a  measure  of  the  attractive  force  of  the  disturbing 
body. 

In  travelling  eighteen  and  a  half  miles  in  its 
orbit,  the  distance  passed  over  in  one  second,  the 
earth  falls  about  one-ninth  of  an  inch  from  a 
straight  line  in  the  direction  of  the  sun,  and  this 
is  a  measure  of  the  sun's  attraction  for  the  earth. 

The  earth's  attraction  for  an  object  at  its  sur- 
face has  been  determined  from  observation,  and 
since  it  is  also  equal  to  the  earth's  mass  divided  by 
the  square  of  its  radius  it  is  possible  to  find  the 
mass  of  the  earth  in  terms  of  some  known  mass  at 
its  surface. 

This  has  been  done  a  number  of  times,  but  the 
experiment  is  a  very  delicate  and  troublesome  one, 
since  the  attraction  between  bodies  at  the  earth's 
surface  is  so  small  that  it  is  measured  with  great 
difficulty. 

A  large  metal  ball  or  a  mountain  of  known 
mass  is  usually  chosen,  and  its  attraction  for  some 

287 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


object  near  by  at  a  measured  distance  is  deter- 
mined observationally.  This  attraction  is  propor- 
tional, according  to  the  law  of  gravitation,  to  the 
mass  of  the  body,  which  is  known  in  this  case, 
divided  by  the  square  of  its  distance  from  the 
object  attracted. 

Comparing  this  attraction  of  one  known  mass  for 
another  on  the  earth's  surface  with  the  attraction 
of  the  earth  for  objects  at  its  surface  the  ratio  of 
the  earth's  mass  to  the  known  mass  is  obtained.  It 
has  been  found  in  this  way  that  the  earth's  weight 
is  about  five  and  a  half  times  that  of  an  equal 
volume  of  water. 

This  also  gives  the  earth's  density,  which  is 
simply  its  mass  divided  by  its  volume,  the  standard 
of  comparison  being  the  density  of  water. 

Since  the  total  weight  of  the  earth  averages 
much  more  than  the  weight  of  the  earth's  crust 
it  is  evident  that  the  material  near  the  earth's 
centre  is  much  more  compressed  and  heavier  than 
at  its  surface,  due  to  the  tremendous  pressure  of 
the  overlying  strata  of  the  earth. 

Knowing  the  weight  of  the  earth  and  its  distance 
from  the  sun,  we  are  in  a  position  to  find  the  sun 's 
mass  in  terms  of  the  earth's  mass.  It  follows  from 
288 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  law  of  gravitation  that  the  mass  of  a  body 
with  a  satellite  is  proportional  to  the  cube  of  the 
distance  of  the  satellite  divided  by  the  square  of 
the  satellite's  period  of  revolution. 

This  will  apply  to  the  planet 's  revolution  around 
the  sun  and  that  of  the  moon  around  the  earth. 
So  if  we  find  the  cube  of  the  earth's  distance  from 
the  sun  and  divide  it  by  the  square  of  the  earth's 
period  of  revolution,  three  hundred  and  sixty- 
five  and  a  quarter  days,  we  have  a  number  that 
is  proportional  to  the  mass  of  the  sun. 

It  comes  out  that  this  number  is  about  three 
hundred  and  thirty  thousand  times  larger  than 
the  number  proportional  to  the  earth's  mass  found 
by  dividing  the  cube  of  the  moon's  distance  from 
the  earth  by  the  square  of  its  period  of  revolution 
around  the  earth,  so  it  is  concluded  that  the  mass 
of  the  sun  is  three  hundred  and  thirty  thousand 
times  as  great  as  the  mass  of  the  earth. 

To  find  its  density  compared  with  the  earth's 
density  we  simply  divide  its  mass  compared  with 
the  earth's  by  its  volume  compared  with  the  earth's 
volume,  and  we  find  that  has  only  one-quarter  of 
the  density  of  the  earth  or  about  one  and  a  half 
times  the  density  of  water.  The  sun  therefore 

289 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 

weighs  only  one  and  a  half  times  as  much  as  an 
equal  bulk  of  water  would  weigh. 

Just  as  we  have  found  the  numbers  proportional 
to  the  earth's  mass  and  the  sun's  mass  so  we  can 
find  the  numbers  proportional  to  the  masses  of  all 
the  other  planets  attended  by  satellites  simply  by 
dividing,  as  before,  the  cube  of  the  distance  of  the 
satellite  from  the  planet  by  the  square  of  its  period 
of  revolution  around  the  planet. 

Both  of  these  quantities,  the  distances  and 
periods,  can  be  determined  from  observations  of 
the  satellites.  Comparing,  then,  the  values  for 
each  planet  with  the  number  proportional  to  the 
sun's  mass,  the  mass  of  every  planet  that  has 
satellites  is  found  in  terms  of  the  sun's  mass  and 
also  of  the  earth's  mass.  The  mass  of  Jupiter  and 
also  of  Saturn  has  been  found  with  great  accuracy, 
as  both  of  these  planets  have  a  large  number  of 
satellites. 

Mercury  and  Venus,  on  the  other  hand,  are  the 
most  difficult  to  weigh,  for  they  have  no  satellites. 
Their  masses  have  been  found  by  observing  their 
attractions  for  comets  and  near-by  planets  which 
produce  "perturbations"  in  the  motions  and  posi- 
tions of  the  attracted  bodies.  These  perturbations 
290 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


are,  according  to  the  law  of  gravitation,  propor- 
tional to  the  masses  of  the  two  bodies  and  inversely 
proportional  to  the  square  of  the  distance  between 
the  bodies  affected. 

The  most  difficult  body  to  deal  with  in  the  solar 
system  is  the  moon.  The  problem  of  two  attracting 
bodies  is  easily  solved  mathematically,  or  even  three 
bodies  if  one  of  them  is  comparatively  very  small 
or  very  remote,  but  in  the  case  of  the  moon  we 
have  a  satellite  that  is  very  large  compared  to  its 
primary. 

As  a  result  there  is  a  problem  of  three  attract- 
ing bodies,  the  sun,  the  earth  and  the  moon,  to 
consider.  The  laws  controlling  the  motions  of 
three  bodies  are  as  infallible  as  in  the  case  of  two 
bodies,  but  the  changes  in  the  relative  motions  and 
distances  of  the  three  bodies  are  so  complex  that 
it  lies  beyond  the  power  of  mathematics  to  solve 
the  problem  completely,  and  only  approximations 
to  the  complete  solution  are  possible. 

One  method  for  obtaining  the  mass  of  the  moon 
is  to  compare  the  tide-raising  force  of  the  sun 
with  the  tide-raising  force  of  the  moon.  Another 
is  to  measure  the  apparent  displacement  of  the 
sun  in  the  heavens  at  half  moon  due  to  the  fact 
291 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


that  it  is  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  earth  and 
moon  that  revolves  around  the  sun  under  the  laws 
of  gravitation  and  not  the  centre  of  the  earth. 

This  centre  of  gravity  lies,  it  has  been  found, 
within  the  earth's  surface  and  2,880  miles  from 
its  centre,  and  it  follows  as  a  result  of  this  that 
the  earth's  mass  must  be  eighty-one  and  a  half 
times  the  moon's  mass. 

Knowing  the  relative  masses  of  the  members  of 
our  own  solar  system,  how  can  we  find  the  masses 
of  the  stars  ?  In  the  case  of  single  stars  this  cannot 
be  done.  All  the  stars  are  apparently  moving 
through  space  in  straight  lines.  Up  to  the  present 
time  no  curvature  in  the  paths  of  isolated  stars  has 
ever  been  observed.  If  we  were  able  to  trace  back 
the  orbits  of  the  stars  for  some  hundreds  of  thou- 
sands of  years  we  might  make  some  interesting  dis- 
coveries concerning  stellar  motions;  but  so  far  as 
we  know  now  the  stars  are  travelling  in  streams 
or  groups  along  parallel  lines  to  and  fro  under 
the  general  attraction  of  the  entire  system  of  the 
stars,  no  star  appreciably  deflecting  the  motion 
of  any  other. 

There  are,  however,  many  stars  that  are  not 
single  but  consist  of  two  or  three,  rarely  more, 
292 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


components  revolving  around  a  common  centre  of 
gravity.  These  are  known  as  binary  or  multiple 
stars,  either  visual  or  spectroscopic,  and  it  is  pos- 
sible to  determine  their  combined  mass  in  terms 
of  the  sun's  mass  provided  the  distance  of  the 
binary  star  from  us  is  known. 

This  is  done  in  the  same  way  that  we  compute 
the  mass  of  a  planet  that  has  a  satellite.  The  dis- 
tance of  the  companion  star  from  its  primary  star 
is  found  by  observation,  also  the  period  that  the 
satellite  requires  to  make  a  revolution  around  the 
primary  star.  Then  by  the  same  law  of  gravita- 
tion the  cube  of  the  distance  of  the  satellite  divided 
by  the  square  of  its  period  gives  the  combined 
mass  of  the  star  system  in  terms  of  the  sun 's  mass. 

In  case  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  system  can 
be  found  observationally  the  comparative  masses 
of  the  two  stars  become  known  also.  Only  the 
masses  of  the  nearest  stars  can  be  determined, 
since  the  distance  of  the  star  system  from  the  earth 
is  needed  to  solve  the  problem.  The  masses  of 
about  ten  or  twelve  stars  have  been  determined  by 
this  method,  and  though  it  is  rather  unsafe  to 
generalize  from  such  a  small  number  of  stars  the 
results  seem  to  indicate,  what  there  is  reason  to 
293 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


suspect  from  other  investigations  of  a  different 
nature,  that  the  masses  of  the  stars  average  about 
the  same  as  the  mass  of  our  own  sun. 

To  weigh  the  heavenly  bodies  is  not  a  simple 
matter.  Many  observations  and  computations  are 
necessary.  Since  the  discovery  of  the  universality 
of  the  law  of  gravitation  astronomers  have  been 
working  on  the  problem  and  improving  results,  and 
they  are  not  yet  at  the  point  where  they  are  satis- 
fied with  their  results  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  the 
error  in  the  value  of  the  sun's  mass  is  less  than 
one  per  cent,  of  the  value  given.  The  task  of  im- 
proving the  values  of  the  masses  and  positions  of 
the  heavenly  bodies  falls  upon  the  theoretical 
astronomer  and  is  usually  undertaken  by  the 
National  observatories  or  under  special  grants  to 
individuals  fitted  to  cope  with  this  arduous 
problem. 


294 


CHAPTER  XXXVIII 

WONDERS   OF    OEION 

ORION,  the  most  magnificent  of  all  the  con- 
stellations, is  visible  throughout  the  greater 
part  of  the  night  in  winter.  The  three  bright  stars, 
evenly  spaced  in  a  straight  line,  that  mark  the 
warrior's  belt  and  the  four  brilliant  stars  in  the 
form  of  a  huge  quadrilateral  that  outline  his  body 
are  the  most  distinctive  stars  of  the  constellation. 
They  are  among  the  first  stars  to  shine  forth  after 
sunset,  appearing  higher  and  higher  in  the  eastern 
sky  on  each  successive  evening. 

In  addition  to  forming  the  most  impressively 
beautiful  of  all  the  constellations,  the  stars  of 
Orion,  with  the  exception  of  Betelgeuse,  the  deep 
red  star  that  marks  the  giant's  right  shoulder,  all 
belong  to  a  connected  system  of  inconceivably  great 
extent  associated  with  one  vast  enveloping  nebula. 
295 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


The  denser  portion  of  this  nebula  is  known  as  the 
" Great  Nebula  in  Orion/7  considered  by  many  to 
be  the  most  beautiful  telescopic  object  in  the 
heavens.  It  covers  a  square  degree  in  the  sky  and 
is  associated  with  the  central  star  in  the  "  sword 
of  Orion, ' '  which  is  formed  by  a  row  of  faint  stars 
extending  in  a  southerly  direction  below  the  belt. 

In  the  midst  of  the  great  nebula  glows  an  ex- 
quisite little  trapezium  of  stars,  two  of  which  are 
attended  by  extremely  faint  companions.  It  is 
known  as  the  sextuple  star,  Theta  Orionis.  Not 
far  away,  connected  with  the  central  nebula  by  a 
faint  nebulous  extension,  is  the  triple  star  Iota 
Orionis,  and  the  entire  constellation  abounds  in 
double  and  multiple  stars,  many  of  which  are  sur- 
rounded by  nebulous  haze. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  helium  stars,  the  type 
to  which  the  Orion  stars  belong,  are  not  univer- 
sally distributed  in  space.  They  favor  certain 
regions  and  occur  in  loosely  formed  groups  or 
clusters,  usually  attended  by  nebulosity.  They  are 
the  most  massive  and  the  hottest  of  all  the  stars, 
and  they  are  never  to  be  found  far  from  the  plane 
of  the  Milky  Way. 

Prof.  W.  H.  Pickering  has  made  recent  investi- 
296 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Cations  of  the  distance  of  the  great  Orion  nebula, 
and  the  size  and  luminosity  of  the  Orion  stars. 
According  to  his  results,  this  glorious  constellation 
is  constructed  on  a  plan  of  inconceivable  grandeur. 
The  distance  of  the  great  Orion  nebula  he  has 
found  to  be  a  little  over  sixteen  hundred  light 
years,  corresponding  to  a  parallax  of  ".002.  If 
we  desired  to  express  this  distance  in  miles 
Ave  would  have  to  multiply  sixteen  hundred  by 
Hie  value  of  one  light  year  in  miles,  or  63,000 
limes  the  distance  from  the  earth  to  the  sun,  re- 
membering that  the  distance  from  the  earth  to  the 
sun  is  93,000,000  miles.  According  to  this  same 
estimate  the  luminosity  of  the  brilliant  blue-white 
star  Rigel,  the  brightest  star  in  the  constellation, 
is  nearly  ninety  thousand  times  that  of  our  own 
sun,  while  the  triple  star  Iota  Orionis  mentioned 
above  is  fifteen  thousand  times  more  luminous  than 
our  sun. 

Another  estimate  of  the  distance  of  the  Orion 
nebula  made  recently  by  Kapteyn  places  it  at  a 
distance  of  six  hundred  light  years,  corresponding 
to  a  parallax  of  ".0054,  and  gives  the  light- 
'^iVing  power  of  Rigel  as  nearly  twelve  thou- 
sand times  that  of  the  sun  and  the  light-giving 
297 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


power  of  Iota  as  two  thousand  times  that  of  the 
sun.  If  Prof.  Pickering's  estimate  gives  approxi- 
mately the  true  distance  of  this  wonderful  con- 
stellation then  its  brightest  star  Rigel  is  a  super 
giant  among  the  stars,  unsurpassed  in  brilliancy 
by  any  other  star  unless  we  make  an  exception  of 
giant  Canopus,  the  magnificent  star  of  the  South- 
ern Hemisphere. 

Astronomers  have  long  held  the  theory  that  the 
helium  stars  associated  with  the  great  irregular 
nebulae,  such  as  the  stars  of  Orion  and  the  Pleiades, 
are  being  condensed  from  the  nebulae  with  which 
they  are  associated.  The  order  of  evolution  has 
always  been  assumed  to  be  from  nebula  to  star.  In 
light  of  more  recent  knowledge  the  idea  is  grad- 
ually and  persistently  growing  that  in  some  in- 
stances the  evolution  may  be  progressing  toward 
the  nebula  instead  of  away  from  it.  In  other 
words,  the  nebulosity  surrounding  the  Pleiades  and 
many  of  the  stars  of  Orion  may  have  been  thrown 
off  from  the  surfaces  of  these  stars.  In  the  solar 
corona  and  the  zodiacal  light  and  the  tails  of 
comets,  it  has  been  suggested,  we  may  see  in  a 
slight  degree  the  laws  that  govern  the  repulsion 
of  matter,  under  light  pressure  and  possibly  elec- 
298 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


tro-magnetic  forces,  at  work  in  our  own  solar 
system. 

The  characteristics  of  the  novae  or  temporary 
stars  also  give  support  to  this  view.  Novae  have 
been  seen  to  change  from  helium  type  stars  to 
bright  line  stars  and  then  to  planetary  nebulae, 
exactly  reversing  the  accepted  order  of  develop- 
ment. 

In  his  discussion  of  the  great  nebula  and  helium 
stars  in  Orion  Prof.  Pickering  says:  "It  was 
formerly  universally  supposed  that  the  nebulae 
iv^ere  condensing,  but  ...  an  appearance  some- 
what similar  to  the  nebula  was  produced  by  photo- 
graphing an  explosion  of  flash  powder."  C.  D. 
Perrine,  writing  in  the  Astro-physical  Journal, 
Fays:  "The  dark,  finely  divided  matter  which  is 
believed  to  exist  in  the  distant  galactic  regions 
may  be  none  other  than  condensed  nebulosity;  in 
place  of  the  early  Orion  stars,  for  example,  being 
wholly  in  the  process  of  condensing  from  their 
inclosing  nebulous  envelope,  this  nebulosity  is,  in 
fact,  largely  the  result  of  a  great  catastrophe,  the 
nebulosity  having  been  thrown  off  in  the  process." 
He  asks :  "Is  this  also  true  of  the  nebulosity  in  the 
Pleiades  with  the  difference  that  in  the  Pleiades 
299 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  stars  are  slightly  *  older'  in  type  and  the  nebu- 
losity not  self-luminous  ?  Has  this  nebulosity 
frozen  from  a  gaseous  state?" 

It  is  possible,  according  to  Perrine,  that  the 
Orion  or  helium  type  stars  are  extremely  massive 
and  hot  and  confined  to  certain  regions  as  a  result 
of  varying  external  conditions  existing  in  different 
parts  of  the  universe.  Where  cosmic  matter  is 
dense  stars  of  great  mass  and  high  temperature 
would  be  found.  The  energy  obtained  from  the 
material  gradually  swept  up  by  these  stars  would 
exceed  the  energy  lost  by  radiation.  Their  mass 
and  temperature  would  increase  while  light 
pressure  and  electro-magnetic  forces  would  drive 
from  these  stars  the  lighter  gases  that  form  the 
nebulosity  enveloping  them. 

In  parts  of  the  universe  where  the  cosmic  matter, 
either  meteoric  or  gaseous,  is  less  plentiful,  the 
evolution  of  the  stars  would  be,  on  the  contrary, 
away  from  the  nebula  and  toward  the  later  and 
cooler  type  stars,  culminating  in  extinct,  dark  stars 
following  after  the  dwarf  red  type  stars  in 
evolution. 


300 


CHAPTER  XXXIX 

THE  CONSTELLATIONS  OF   WINTER 

A  MONG  the  sparkling  brilliants  of  midwinter 
•*  *•  skies  are  three,  Betelgeuse  in  Orion,  Sirius  in 
Canis  Major,  the  Greater  Dog,  and  Procyon  in 
Canis  Minor,  the  Lesser  Dog,  that  outline  in  the 
heavens  a  huge  equilateral  triangle  that  is  as  con- 
spicuous a  figure  in  the  winter  as  the  Great  Square 
in  Pesagus  is  in  early  fall. 

During  the  early  evening  hours  of  February  this 
massive  triangle  of  first  magnitude  stars  will  be 
found  not  far  from  the  meridian,  the  two  Dog  Stars 
following  closely  at  the  heels  of  the  warrior  Orion 
as  with  uplifted  club  he  pursues  Taurus,  the  Bull, 
across  the  heavens  to  the  westward. 

Ruddy  Betelgeuse  is  in  the  right  shoulder  of 
Orion,  and  not  far  away  to  the  west  glows  Alde- 
baran,  the  brightest  star  in  the  V-shaped  group  of 
301 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  'SKY 


the  Hyades,  also  deeply  red,  representing  the  bale- 
ful light  in  the  eye  of  the  Bull  as  he  charges  with 
lowered  head  at  the  warrior  Orion. 

At  no  other  season  is  there  presented  so  finely  to 
view  such  an  impressive  assemblage  of  first  magni- 
tude stars.  Eight  of  the  twenty  brightest  stars  in 
the  heavens  are  now  visible  in  our  latitudes  in  the 
early  evening. 

If  we  are  south  of  the  thirtieth  parallel  we  may 
also  see  Canopus  of  the  Southern  Hemisphere,  sec- 
ond only  to  Sirius  in  apparent  brightness,  the  star 
of  immeasurable  distance  and  unimaginable  size 
and  splendor  that  in  actual  luminosity  makes  Sir- 
ius appear  but  a  dwarf.  Ten  thousand  times  the 
light-giving  power  of  the  sun  is  the  lowest  limit 
that  can  be  set  for  the  light-giving  power  of  this 
supergiant,  and  it  may  far  exceed  this  amount. 

Sirius,  at  the  southeastern  vertex  of  the  tri- 
angle, is  one  of  our  nearest  neighbors  in  space,  and 
is  only  surpassed  in  brightness  by  the  planets  Jup- 
iter and  Venus  and  occasionally  Mars.  Its  light 
takes  between  eight  and  nine  years  to  reach  our 
solar  system,  however,  and  its  distance,  if  we  wish 
to  express  it  in  miles,  amounts  to  about  550,000 
times  the  distance  from  the  earth  to  the  sun. 
302 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


Sirius  is  attended  by  a  companion  that  is  one  of 
the  most  feebly  luminous  bodies  known.  Though 
its  mass  is  about  one-half  that  of  Sirius,  it  would 
take  20,000  such  companions  to  equal  Sirius  in 
brightness.  The  two  stars  are  separated  from  each 
other  by  a  distance  of  1,800,000,000  miles,  which  is 
the  same  as  the  distance  of  the  planet  Uranus  from 
the  sun.  Though  the  light  of  the  two  stars  com- 
bined is  forty-eight  times  that  of  our  own  sun, 
their  combined  mass  is  only  between  three  and 
four  times  the  sun's  mass,  so  low  is  their  density. 
Procyon,  at  the  northeastern  vertex  of  the  triangle, 
is  another  neighbor  of  the  solar  system,  being  only 
ten  light  years  distant.  It  also  is  attended  by  a 
companion  star. 

The  two  combined  radiate  about  six  times  as 
much  light  as  our  own  sun,  but  are  only  one  and 
one-third  times  more  massive.  Were  our  own  sun 
as  far  from  us  as  Procyon  it  would  appear  to  be 
only  one-sixth  as  bright  as  this  first  magnitude  star. 
Euddy  Betelgeuse,  the  third  star  in  the  triangle, 
presents  a  strong  contrast  to  the  other  two  in  every 
way. 

It  is  in  the  first  place  so  distant  that  it  gives  no 
measurable  parallax.  In  comparison  to  Betel- 
303 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


geuse,  Sirius  and  Procyon  are  dwarfs.  Like  Rigel 
and  Canopus,  Betel  geuse  is  one  of  the  supergiants 
of  the  universe.  Though  one  of  the  stars  in  Orion 
it  is  not  physically  associated  with  the  great  con- 
stellation and  its  enveloping  nebulosity.  It  is  trav- 
elling in  a  different  direction  and  simply  chances 
to  lie  in  such  a  position  as  to  complete  the  quad- 
rangle that  roughly  outlines  the  form  of  the  war- 
rior. 

Betelgeuse  is  not  only  far  more  distant  and 
far  more  luminous  than  Sirius  and  Procyon, 
but  also  radically  different  in  its  physical  con- 
dition. 

These  three  stars  represent  three  distinctive 
types  and  three  widely  different  stages  of  evolu- 
tion. Sirius  is  a  star  of  the  hydrogen  type,  which 
is,  in  fact,  sometimes  referred  to  as  the  Sirian  type 
after  this  illustrious  member.  Next  to  the  helium 
stars,  of  which  nearby  Rigel,  the  brightest  star  in 
Orion,  is  an  example,  these  hydrogen  stars  are  the 
hottest  of  all  the  stars. 

Their  brilliant  surfaces  are  not  veiled  by  cooler 
enveloping  layers  of  metallic  vapors  such  as  sur- 
round the  photosphere  of  our  own  sun  and  stars 
still  more  advanced  in  type.  Intense  absorption 
304 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


lines  of  hydrogen  in  the  spectrum  give  them  their 
characteristic  name  and  prove  that  they  are  sur- 
rounded by  glowing  hydrogen  gas. 

The  intense  blue-white  and  white  light  of  the 
helium  and  hydrogen  stars  respectively  is  an  in- 
dication of  their  great  heat,  for  the  hotter  a  body 
the  more  intense  are  its  radiations  in  the  violet  and 
ultra  violet  end  of  the  spectrum. 

As  a  body  cools  the  maximum  intensity  of  its 
radiations  shifts  toward  the  red  end  of  the  spec- 
trum. 

Fully  half  of  all  the  stars  so  far  examined  have 
proved  to  be  either  helium  or  hydrogen  stars.  This 
may  be  due  to  the  fact  that  these  intensely  brilliant 
stars  may  be  seen  to  a  far  greater  distance  than 
less  luminous  stars. 

Procyon  stands  between  the  hydrogen  and  solar 
stars  in  type,  and  more  closely  approaches  our 
own  sun  in  its  physical  condition.  Strong  lines 
of  calcium  are  one  of  the  most  distinctive  features 
of  the  spectra  of  such  stars,  though  the  hydrogen 
lines  are  still  very  conspicuous,  as  they  are  also  in 
the  spectrum  of  our  own  sun. 

Stars  such  as  Procyon  are  usually  spoken  of  as 
calcium  stars,  owing  to  the  prominence  of  the  lines 
305 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


of  this  element  in  their  spectra.  Other  metallic 
lines  also  begin  to  appear  faintly  at  this  stage  of 
evolution  and  such  stars  are  slightly  tinged  with 
yellow  as  their  atmospheres  become  charged  with 
the  vapors  of  the  denser  gases. 

Compared  to  Sirius,  Procyon  is  noticeably  yel- 
lowish and  this  tinge  is  still  further  deepened  in 
the  solar  stars  to  which  our  own  sun  belongs.  Bril- 
liant Capella,  also  visible  at  this  time,  due  north  of 
Betelgeuse  and  midway  between  it  and  the  pole,  is 
a  typical  solar  type  star  in  which  the  metallic  lines 
so  faint  in  Procyon  have  increased  in  strength 
until  they  equal  the  hydrogen  lines  in  intensity. 
Such  stars  are  decidedly  cooler  than  the  hydrogen 
and  helium  stars  and  the  more  deeply  they  are 
tinged  with  yellow  the  more  are  their  atmospheres 
charged  with  the  heavier  metallic  vapors. 

A  still  later  stage  in  the  evolution  of  the  stars  is 
typified  in  the  orange-colored  star  Aldebaran  in 
the  Hyades  just  to  the  northwest  of  Orion.  In 
stars  of  this  class  the  metallic  lines  have  increased 
in  strength  until  they  have  become  stronger  than 
the  lines  of  hydrogen.  The  rays  from  the  blue  end 
of  the  spectrum  have  become  absorbed  more  and 
more  in  an  increasingly  dense  atmosphere  and  for 
306 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


this  reason  such  stars  are  reddish  orange  in  ap- 
pearance. 

We  now  arrive  after  all  these  gradual  changes 
at  the  type  of  the  giant  red  star  Betelgeuse  that  is 
so  radically  different  from  the  types  of  the  two 
stars  Sirius  and  Procyon.  Betelgeuse  is  an  irregu- 
larly variable  red  star. 

The  majority  of  stars  of  this  class  are  variable 
in  their  radiations  for  some  reason  not  clearly  un- 
derstood. Any  one  observing  this  interesting  red 
star  from  season  to  season  will  readily  note  its  pe- 
culiar fluctuations  of  brightness. 

At  times  it  is  only  a  shade  brighter  than  Alde- 
baran,  a  convenient  star  with  which  to  compare  it. 
Again  it  will  be  equal  in  brightness  to  Rigel, 
diagonally  opposite  to  it  in  the  quadrilateral  of 
stars. 

The  spectrum  of  Betelgeuse  is  that  of  a  typical 
giant  "M"  star,  as  it  is  called  astronomically.  It 
is  beautifully  fluted  in  appearance,  due  to  the  pres- 
ence of  the  compound  known  as  titanium  oxide. 
The  presence  of  oxides  in  the  atmosphere  of  a  star 
indicates  a  decided  drop  of  temperature,  for  no 
such  compounds  could  exist  unless  the  temperature 
were  comparatively  low.  Why  titanium  oxide 
307 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


should  so  completely  dominate  the  spectra  of  such 
stars  is  one  of  the  unsolved  mysteries  of  the  stars. 
It  is  also  one  of  the  compounds  that  appear  in  the 
spectra  of  the  sun  spots.  The  temperature  of  sun 
spots,  it  is  well  known,  is  decidedly  below  that  of 
the  surrounding  solar  surface.  Only  a  few  hundred 
stars  of  the  same  type  as  Betelgeuse  are  known  and 
they  are  all  believed  to  be  at  great  distances  and 
at  least  several  thousand  times  more  luminous  than 
our  own  sun. 

The  cause  of  the  irregular  fluctuations  of  bright- 
ness of  these  stars  is  believed  to  lie  within  the 
stars  themselves.  No  law  or  order  in  its  workings 
can  be  detected  as  yet,  however.  Betelgeuse  usually 
goes  through  its  irregular  variations  of  light,  which 
amount  to  about  half  a  magnitude  at  most,  within 
a  year  or  two. 

There  is,  at  the  greatest,  a  change  of  more  than 
forty  per  cent,  in  the  intensity  of  the  radiations 
of  this  star.  Its  sudden  and  unexpected  increases 
of  luminosity  may  possibly  occur  when  its  dense 
atmosphere  of  metallic  vapors  is  temporarily 
rent  by  the  pressure  of  pent-up  forces  within 
a  highly  heated  interior.  To  live  upon  planets 
encircling  such  suns  would  appear  to  us  extremely 
308 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


hazardous  and  no  more  to  be  relished  than  exist- 
ence near  an  active  volcano. 

An  outburst  of  activity  that  would  rapidly 
change  the  intensity  of  the  radiations  of  such  a 
star  nearly  fifty  per  cent,  would  have  a  most  dis- 
astrous effect  upon  organisms  with  which  we  are 
familiar.  And  yet  adaptations  to  conditions  under 
the  sway  of  such  an  erratic  ruler  might  be  such 
that  the  life  process  would  continue  there  no  more 
disturbed  than  it  is  on  our  own  planet  when  pass- 
ing clouds  temporarily  conceal  the  face  of  the 
sun. 


309 


CHAPTER  XL 

THE  CONSTELLATIONS  OP  SPRING 

TT  IS  not  difficult  to  locate  all  the  constellations 
*•  for  a  certain  season  of  the  year  if  we  once  fix  in 
our  minds  the  positions  of  two  or  three  of  the 
more  prominent  groups.  Let  us  consider  first  the 
two  constellations  known  as  Ursa  Major,  "The 
Great  Bear, ' '  and  Leo,  ' '  The  Lion. ' '  Both  are  con- 
spicuous in  the  spring,  and  we  should  have  no 
trouble  in  locating  them  readily. 

At  nine  o'clock  on  the  first  of  April  these  two 
groups  are  almost  directly  on  the  meridian.  A 
month  later  they,  as  well  as  all  the  other  constel- 
lations, have  apparently  shifted  about  thirty  de- 
grees westward.  The  winter  constellations  have 
disappeared  below  the  western  horizon  and  the  con- 
stellations that  are  overhead  in  summer  evenings 
are  now  appearing  on  the  eastern  horizon.  Taking 
310 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


as  our  time  of  observation  May  first,  about  nine 
o'clock  in  the  evening,  we  find  in  the  north,  just 
west  of  the  meridian,  the  seven  stars  of  the  Big 
Dipper,  or  Great  Bear,  and  south  of  it  Leo  facing 
westward. 

The  head  of  Leo  is  outlined  by  a  sickle-shaped 
group  of  stars,  six  in  all,  with  the  bright,  white  star 
Regulus  in  the  end  of  the  handle.  To  the  eastward 
we  see  the  other  stars  that  outline  the  body.  Dene- 
bola,  a  star  of  the  second  magnitude,  marks  the 
tail  and  is  about  twenty-five  degrees  east  of  Regu- 
lus. With  these  reference  points  we  can  easily  lo- 
cate other  conspicuous  constellations.  Southeast 
of  Leo  is  Virgo,  a  large  Y-shaped  constellation, 
which  contains  the  beautiful  white  star  Spica,  and 
again  southeast  from  Virgo  is  the  small  constella- 
tion Libra,  marked  by  four  rather  faint  stars.  To 
the  southwest  of  Spica  is  a  more  conspicuous  group 
of  stars  of  the  second  and  third  magnitude  in  the 
form  of  a  quadrilateral.  This  is  the  constellation 
Corvus,  and  just  west  of  Corvus  is  the  less  conspic- 
uous group  known  as  Crater.  In  the  southern  skies 
we  also  have  the  long  constellation  of  Hydra,  which 
extends  from  a  point  a  little  southwest  of  Regulus, 
where  a  small  group  of  faint  stars  mark  the  head, 
311 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


to  a  point  in  the  southeast,  where  the  fiery  Antares 
will  soon  rise  in  the  constellation  Scorpio.  Hydra 
contains  one  second  magnitude  star  known  as  Al- 
phard  or  Cor  Hydrae,  standing  very  much  alone. 
It  is  about  twenty  degrees  south  of  Regulus  and  a 
little  to  the  westward.  This  long,  but  rather  faint 
constellation  of  Hydra  extends  nearly  ninety  de- 
grees across  the  southern  sky  below  Leo,  Virgo, 
Crater,  Corvus  and  Libra.  Let  us  return  now  to 
the  Great  Bear,  which,  by  the  way,  is  a  much  more 
extensive  constellation  than  the  part  which  forms 
the  Big  Dipper,  or  the  tail  and  body  of  Ursa  Major. 
A  considerable  portion  of  the  space  south  and  east 
of  the  configuration  known  as  the  Big  Dipper  be- 
longs to  Ursa  Major.  It  is  occupied,  however,  by 
inconspicuous  stars.  On  a  line  between  the  ena 
star  in  the  handle  of  the  Dipper  and  Denebola  in 
Leo  are  situated  two  very  interesting,  though  small, 
constellations;  Canes  Venatici,  the  more  northerly 
one,  is  marked  by  two  stars,  the  Hunting  Dogs, 
with  which  Bootes  the  Herdsman  is  chasing  the 
Great  Bear  around  the  pole.  The  northern  of  the 
two  dogs  is  Asterion,  the  southern  Chara.  Be- 
tween Denebola  and  Canes  Venatici  is  the  constel- 
lation, almost  directly  overhead  at  this  time,  known 
312 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


as  Coma  Berenices.  In  this  constellation,  it  is  esti- 
mated, over  a  hundred  nebulae  are  gathered  in 
a  space  no  greater  than  that  covered  by  the  full 
moon.  This  little  constellation  also  contains  a 
great  number  of  fifth  and  sixth  magnitude  stars 
and  many  interesting  doubles.  Canes  Venat- 
ici  also  contains  some  fine  doubles  and  a  beautiful 
star  cluster,  as  well  as  the  noted  "  Whirlpool  Neb- 
ula." Both  constellations  offer  a  fine  field  for  the 
telescope. 

If  we  now  turn  to  the  western  sky  we  can 
trace  out  a  bright  arc  of  first  and  second  mag- 
nitude stars  beginning  with  Capella,  the  yel- 
lowish star  in  the  northwest  in  the  constella- 
tion Auriga.  We  can  distinguish  Capella  also 
by  the  group  of  three  stars  about  five  degrees 
to  the  southwest,  known  as  the  "Kids."  Fol- 
lowing this  arc  from  Capella  southward  we  come 
first  to  Beta  Aurigae,  then  in  order,  Castor  and 
Pollux  in  Gemini  and  finally  Procyon  in  Canis 
Minor. 

In  the  east  we  now  see  the  large  constellation 

of  Hercules.    Hercules  contains  no  star  of  the  first 

or  second  magnitude,  but  many  of  the  third.     It 

contains  one  of  the  finest  star  clusters  in  the  heav- 

313 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ens,  seen  on  a  clear,  dark  night  as  a  patch  of 
white  light.  The  telescope  dissolves  it  into  a 
magnificent  cluster  of  over  5,000  stars.  Northeast 
of  Virgo  and  southeast  of  Ursa  Major  is  the  large 
constellation  of  Bootes,  a  kite-shaped  configuration 
of  stars  whose  principal  star  is  the  ruddy  Arcturus. 
Almost  overhead  now  is  the  conspicuous  equilateral 
triangle  formed  by  the  three  bright  stars,  Dene- 
bola  in  Leo,  Spica  in  Virgo  and  Arcturus  in  Bootes. 
Once  located  in  the  heavens  it  will  never  be  forgot- 
ten, and  when  we  see  it  high  in  the  heavens  in  the 
evening  we  know  that  spring  has  come  once  more, 
for  it  is  known  as  the  characteristic  configuration 
of  spring.  Between  Hercules  and  Bootes  is  the 
Northern  Cross,  a  beautiful  little  semicircle  of  six 
small  stars.  It  was  in  this  constellation  that  the 
"blaze  star,"  or  Nova,  of  1866  appeared.  In  the 
northeast  is  the  small  constellation  of  Lyra,  iden- 
tified at  once  by  the  brilliant  blue- white  star  Vega. 
Directly  east  of  Vega  is  the  constellation  Cygnus, 
known  as  the  Northern  Cross,  now  coming  into 
view  low  in  the  northeast. 

Bootes,  Corona  Borealis,  Hercules,  Lyra  and  Cyg- 
nus are  all  in  a  line  across  the  heavens  and  Arc- 


314 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


turus,  in  Bootes,  Alphacca,  the  brightest  star  in 
Corona;  Vega  in  Lyra  and  Deneb  in  Cygnus  are 
on  a  diagonal  line  directed  toward  the  north- 
east. 


315 


CHAPTER  XLI 

THE  CONSTELLATIONS   OF  SUMMER 

THE  constellations  that  are  most  noticeable 
during  the  summer  months  are  Scorpio  in  the 
south,  Hercules  and  Corona  Borealis  directly  over- 
head at  nine  o'clock  the  middle  of  July  and  Ophiu- 
chus  and  Serpens  between  these  two  constellations 
and  Scorpio. 

In  the  northwest  can  be  seen  the  Big  Dipper, 
which  never  sets  in  our  latitudes,  but  is  best  seen 
in  the  spring  and  summer  months.  In  the  fall  and 
winter  it  appears  to  rest  upon  the  horizon  and  is 
too  low  to  be  well  seen.  The  head  of  Draco  is  now 
nearly  on  the  meridian  and  just  north  of  Hercu- 
les. It  is  marked  by  a  group  of  four  fairly  bright 
stars,  and  from  there  the  neck  and  body  can  be 
traced  first  eastward,  then  curving  northward  and 
bending  sharply  westward,  so  that  the  body  lies 
316 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


between  the  creature's  head  and  the  Little  Dipper, 
and  twines  around  between  the  two  Dippers.  The 
tip  of  the  tail  lies  at  the  middle  of  the  line  between 
the  Pointers  and  the  Pole  Star.  The  Pointers,  we 
remember,  are  the  two  stars  farthest  from  the 
handle  of  the  Big  Dipper  that  outline  the  outer 
edge  and  a  line  drawn  through  them  and  extended 
northward  a  distance  about  equal  to  the  whole 
length  of  the  Big  Dipper  brings  us  to  the  Pole 
Star,  which  is  a  second  magnitude  star  at  the  end 
of  the  handle  of  the  Little  Dipper. 

The  Northern  Cross,  in  Cygnus,  is  now  conspic- 
uous in  the  northeast.  The  brightest  star,  Deneb, 
or  Arided,  as  it  is  better  called,  for  there  are  sev- 
eral Denebs  in  different  constellations,  is  situated 
at  the  northern  end,  or  top,  of  the  Cross  and  Albireo, 
the  noted  double  at  the  bottom.  Arided,  or  Deneb, 
lies  in  a  line  with  Vega  in  Lyra,  the  next  constella- 
tion west  of  Cygnus,  Alphacca  in  Corona  and  Arc- 
turus  in  Bootes,  which  is  now  west  of  the  meridian. 

Spica,  in  Virgo,  sparkles  brilliantly,  low  in  the 
southwest.  Vega  still  remains  the  most  brilliant 
star  visible,  although  ruddy  Arcturus  is  of  the  same 
magnitude.  We  include  in  our  list  of  bright 
stars  Antares  in  Scorpio,  which  is  on  the  meridian 
317 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


well  to  the  southward  at  this  time,  and  Altair,  in 
Aquila,  a  yellow  star  of  the  first  magnitude,  which 
is  well  up  in  the  eastern  sky.  It  is  readily  found 
from  the  fact  that  it  is  attended  by  two  fainter 
stars  exactly  in  line  with  it  and  at  nearly  equal 
distances  on  either  side.  In  the  constellation  of 
Aquila,  about  twenty  degrees  southwest  of  Altair, 
appeared  the  brilliant  Nova  of  1918,  known  as  Nova 
Aquilae  No.  3,  since  it  was  the  third  Nova  to  ap- 
pear in  this  constellation.  About  fifteen  degrees 
northeast  of  Aquila  is  the  little  diamond-shaped 
group  of  third  magnitude  stars,  known  as  Del- 
phinus  and  often  called  "  Job's  coffin." 

Vega,  as  well  as  Altair,  is  accompanied  by  two 
fainter  stars.  They  form  a  small  equilateral  tri- 
angle with  it,  whose  sides  are  only  two  and  one- 
half  degrees  long.  A  sahrp  eye  will  detect  the  fact 
that  Epsilon  Lyrae,  the  northernmost  of  the  two 
stars,  is  double,  and  a  small  telescope  will  show  that 
the  star  is  really  quadruple,  each  of  the  two  com- 
ponents of  the  wide  double  being  also  double.  It  is 
the  finest  example  we  have  of  a  quadruple  star. 
All  four  stars  are  physically  connected  and  form 
one  mighty  system.  Beta  Lyrse,  which  lies  about 
eight  degrees  southeast  of  Vega,  is  both  a  variable 
318 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


and  double  star.  In  the  short  period  of  thirteen 
days  its  brightness  fluctuates  nearly  a  magnitude. 
Its  change  in  brightness  is  due  to  the  fact  that  it 
has  a  companion  star  that  intercepts  at  times  part 
of  the  light  from  the  brighter  star. 

It  requires  considerable  stretch  of  imagination 
to  trace  some  of  the  mythical  and  legendary  figures 
that  have  been  mapped  out  in  the  heavens.  It  is 
rather  difficult  to  see  that  Lyra  is  a  harp  or  Her- 
cules and  Ophiuchus  heroes  performing  wonder- 
ful feats  with  serpents.  Bootes  is  a  hunter  pur- 
suing the  Great  Bear  around  the  Pole,  accompan- 
ied by  the  two  hounds,  Canes  Venatici,  though  ac- 
cording to  some  legends  he  is  represented  as  a 
herdsman  driving  the  seven  plough  oxen,  the  stars 
that  form  the  Big  Dipper.  The  giant  Hercules 
stands  with  his  foot  on  the  head  of  Draco  and  his 
body  is  marked  by  a  quadrilateral  of  four  stars 
midway  between  Lyra  and  Corona  Borealis,  or  the 
Northern  Crown.  The  latter  constellation  is  one 
of  the  few  that  really  resembles  the  object  for 
which  it  is  named,  as  it  consists  of  a  nearly  perfect 
semicircle  of  six  stars.  The  brightest,  Gamma  or 
Alphacca,  is  the  gem  in  the  crown. 

Alpha  Hercules,  which  marks  the  head  of  Eer- 
319 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


cules,  is  a  variable  star  which  changes  irregularly 
in  brightness  from  the  third  to  the  fourth  magni- 
tude. It  is  also  a  beautiful  orange  and  blue  double. 
One  can  easily  find  it  in  connection  with  Alpha 
Ophiuchi,  which  is  about  six  degrees  east  of  it  and 
which  forms  with  Vega  and  Altair  a  nearly  equi- 
lateral triangle.  Alpha  Hercules  is  the  fainter  of 
the  two  stars.  The  large  constellations  of  Ophiu- 
chus  and  Serpens  lie  west  of  Aquila  and  south  of 
Hercules  and  Corona.  The  head  of  Serpens 
lies  about  ten  degrees  south  of  Corona  Borealis  and 
is  marked  by  a  group  of  small  stars ;  from  there  a 
line  of  bright  stars  can  be  traced  first  to  the  south- 
west for  a  few  degrees,  then  south  and  eastward 
almost  to  Aquila.  Ophiuchus,  the  serpent  bearer, 
is  another  mythological  figure  represented  by  a  con- 
siderable number  of  fairly  bright  stars  grouped  in 
rather  indefinite  forms.  The  hero  is  represented 
with  his  feet  on  Scorpio  and  his  head  very  close  to 
Hercules,  while  he  grasps  Serpens  with  both  hands. 
Scorpio  is  directly  south  of  Ophiuchus.  Fiery  An- 
tares  marks  the  creature 's  heart  and  his  tail  is  a 
long  line  of  stars  reaching  nearly  to  the  southern 
horizon.  The  constellation  is  of  peculiar  shape  and 
easily  recognized.  The  two  bright  stars  in  Libra, 
320 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


the  next  constellation  westward,  marked  the  crea- 
ture's claws  according  to  some  ancient  maps,  but 
there  is  considerable  confusion  as  to  the  exact 
boundary  between  the  two  constellations.  Antares 
is  a  most  interesting  object  in  the  telescope,  as  it  is 
a  double  star  with  a  small  green  companion.  As 
its  name  indicates  it  is  the  * '  Rival  of  Mars ' '  and  to 
the  naked  eye  shows  a  strong  resemblance  to  the 
ruddy  planet. 

Sagittarius  is  now  visible  in  the  southeast, 
its  little  inverted  milk  dipper  outlined  by  five  stars. 
A  little  southwest  of  the  star  in  the  end  of  the 
handle  is  a  small  triangle  of  stars,  making  a  no- 
ticeable group  of  eight  stars  in  all.  Sagittarius 
and  Scorpio  mark  one  of  the  most  interesting  re- 
gions of  the  sky,  as  the  Milky  Way  is  particularly 
dense  and  bright  here,  and  very  peculiar  in  struc- 
ture. According  to  the  most  recent  researches  it  is 
in  this  general  direction  that  the  center  of  the 
sidereal  universe  is  located. 


321 


CHAPTER  XLII 

THE  CONSTELLATIONS  OP  AUTUMN 

ACH  season  of  the  year  brings  its  character- 
istic  configuration  of  stars  in  the  heavens. 
The  magnificent  constellation  of  Orion  is  always 
associated  with  winter  months.  The  great  triangle 
formed  by  Spica,  Denebola  and  Arctums  appears 
in  spring  and  early  summer,  while  the  Scorpion 
with  red  Antares  glowing  in  its  heart  is  seen  in 
southern  skies  on  midsummer  nights.  In  Autumn 
we  have  the  Great  Square  in  Pegasus,  visible  in  the 
east  in  September,  overhead  in  October. 

At  nine  o'clock  the  middle  of  September  the 
Northern  Cross  of  the  constellation  Cygnus  is  di- 
rectly in  the  zenith,  while  Altair  in  Aquila  is  just 
west  of  the  meridian.  Altair  can  always  be  recog- 
nized by  the  two  fainter  stars  that  are  in  line  with 
it  at  nearly  equal  distances  on  either  side.  Del- 
322 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


phimis,  the  Dolphin,  is  a  little  diamond-shaped 
group  of  third  magnitude  stars  commonly  spoken 
of  as  Job's  Coffin,  that  now  can  be  found  on  the 
meridian  south  of  Cygnus  and  about  twenty  de- 
grees to  the  northeast  of  Altair.  It  contains  a  few 
other  faint  stars  visible  to  the  naked  eye,  in  addi- 
tion to  those  that  form  the  diamond.  Vega  in 
Lyra  is  the  most  brilliant  star  visible  and  is  just 
west  of  the  meridian. 

In  western  skies  the  extensive  constellation  of 
Hercules  is  still  in  view  and  south  of  it  Ophiuchus 
and  Serpens.  Bootes  and  Scorpio  are  now  at  the 
western  horizon  and  the  Dipper  is  far  over  to  the 
northwest. 

Turning  to  the  eastern  half  of  the  heavens,  we 
cannot  fail  to  discover  the  Great  Square  in  Pe- 
gasus. It  is  best  considered  in  connection  with 
Andromeda,  as  the  star  in  the  northeast  corner  of 
the  square  does  not  belong  to  the  constellation 
Pegasus,  but  is  Alpha  Andromedaa,  one  of  the  three 
stars  in  a  curved  line  that  belong  to  the  constel- 
lation Andromeda,  which  is  now  in  the  northeast 
just  south  of  the  peculiar  W-shaped  group  of  stars 
that  forms  the  constellation  of  Cassiopeia.  An 
imaginary  line  drawn  from  Polaris,  the  Pole  Star, 
323 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


through  the  star  in  the  W  that  is  farthest  west, 
known  as  Beta  Cassiopeiae,  and  extended  as  far 
again,  brings  us  to  Alpha  Andromedae  in  the  corner 
of  the  Great  Square.  About  fifteen  degrees  due 
west  is  Beta  Pegasi,  an  irregularly  variable  star 
that  marks  the  northwestern  corner  of  the  square. 
Near  this  star  is  a  group  of  three  fainter  stars  that 
also  belong  to  the  constellation  Pegasus.  The  star 
that  marks  the  southwestern  corner  is  about  fifteen 
degrees  due  south  of  Beta  Pegasi,  and  is  known  as 
Markab.  A  line  from  Alpha  Andromedae  drawn 
diagonally  across  the  square  to  this  star  and  ex- 
tended as  far  again  passes  through  the  neck  and 
head  of  the  Winged  Horse.  His  hindquarters  are 
missing  on  star  maps  that  show  the  mythological 
figures,  but  his  forelegs  are  marked  by  four  faint 
stars  northwest  of  the  square  and  just  east  of  Cyg- 
nus.  About  fifteen  degrees  due  south  of  Alpha 
Andromedae  is  the  second  magnitude  star  that  com- 
pletes the  Great  Square.  The  entire  constellation 
of  Pegasus  covers  an  extensive  region  in  this  por- 
tion of  the  heavens. 

The  Great  Nebula  in  Andromeda,  visible  even  to 
the  naked  eye,  can  be  found  about  ten  degrees 
northwest  of  the  middle  star  in  the  line  of  three 
324 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


stars  that  characterizes  the  constellation  of  Andro- 
meda, It  forms  a  little  triangle  with  two  faint 
stars  near  it. 

Just  east  of  the  meridian  at  this  time  and  above 
and  west  of  the  W-shaped  group  of  stars  in  Cas- 
siopeia is  the  constellation  Cepheus,  which  con- 
tains very  few  bright  stars.  The  remarkable  va- 
riable star  Delta  Cephei,  which  changes  more  than 
a  magnitude  in  brightness  in  about  five  days,  is 
one  of  the  stars  in  a  little  triangle  that  marks  the 
king's  head.  Cepheus  is  represented  as  sitting 
behind  his  wife,  Cassiopeia,  with  his  feet  on  the 
tail  of  the  Little  Bear.  Andromeda,  the  daughter, 
is  represented  with  her  head  resting  upon  the 
shoulder  of  Pegasus,  the  winged  horse,  that  brought 
Perseus  to  rescue  her  from  Cetus,  the  sea  monster, 
lying  far  to  the  south  beyond  the  constellations 
Aries  and  Pisces.  Perseus  is  the  brilliant  constel- 
lation just  east  of  Andromeda  crossed  by  the  Milky 
Way. 

The  Milky  Way  is  now  a  beautiful  sight  upon 
clear  nights.  It  passes  from  Cassiopeia  across  the 
shoulder  of  Cepheus,  through  Cygnus  in  the  zenith 
and  thence  divides  into  two  branches,  one  passing 
through  Aquila  and  Sagittarius,  and  the  other 
325 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


through  Ophinchus  to  Scorpio.     Near  this  point 
the  two  branches  again  meet. 

Of  the  zodiacal  constellations  now  visible  Sagit- 
tarius is  readily  found  in  the  southwest  by  its 
peculiar  configuration  of  eight  bright  stars, 
five  in  the  shape  of  a  little  dipper  inverted  toward 
the  southern  horizon  and  three  forming  a  tri- 
angle southwest  from  the  star  at  the  end  of  the 
handle. 

East  of  Sagittarius  come  in  order  the  three 
zodiacal  constellations,  Capricornus,  Aquarius,  and 
Pisces.  Capricornus,  the  sea  goat,  represented  with 
the  head  and  body  of  a  goat  and  tail  of  a  fish,  has 
few  bright  stars.  It  contains,  however,  one  of  the 
few  double  stars  visible  to  the  naked  eye,  Alpha 
Capricorni. 

A  line  drawn  from  Albireo  at  the  bottom  of  the 
northern  cross  through  Altair  and  extended  about 
as  far  again,  brings  us  to  this  double.  Three 
degrees  further  south  is  Beta  Capricorni,  the 
brightest  star  in  the  constellation. 

Aquarius,  the  water  bearer,  is  east  and  north  of 
Capricornus  and  southwest  of  Pegasus.    The  char- 
acteristic configuration  of  this  constellation  is  the 
little  Y  of  third  and  fourth  magnitude  stars  about 
32G 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


20  degrees  southwest  of  the  square  in  Pegasus. 
This  is  supposed  to  represent  the  water  jar  from 
which  Aquarius  pours  the  stream  of  water  out- 
lined by  many  faint  stars  lying  to  the  southwest 
and  south.  At  the  southern  end  of  this  stream  is 
Piscis  Austrinus,  the  Southern  Fish,  which  con- 
tains one  first  magnitude  star,  Fomalhaut,  just 
visible  above  the  southern  horizon  at  this  time  of 
year.  It  is  in  line  with  the  western  edge  of  the 
•square  in  Pegasus,  but  fully  45  degrees  south. 
Directly  south  of  the  Great  Square  in  Pegasus  is  a 
little  polygon  of  faint  stars  which  marks  the  head 
of  one  of  the  two  fish  in  the  zodiacal  constellation 
Pisces.  A  line  of  faint  stars  runs  from  here  east- 
ward to  meet  another  line  of  stars  extending  in  a 
northerly  direction  toward  the  constellation  And- 
romeda. This  second  line  of  stars  represents  the 
second  fish  in  the  constellation,  and  contains  no 
bright  stars.  Part  of  the  large  constellation  of 
Cetus,  the  Whale,  is  directly  south  of  Pisces 
and  Beta  Ceti,  which  stands  entirely  alone,  is 
the  brightest  star  in  this  part  of  the  heavens. 
The  Chaldeans  called  this  region  the  Sea,  and 
it  is  not  strange,  for  we  have  here  Cetus,  the 
Whale,  the  two  fish  in  Pisces  and  Pisces  Aus- 
327 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


trinus,  the  Southern  Fish,  as  well  as  Aquarius, 
the  Water  Bearer,  Capricornus,  the  Sea  Goat,  and 
Delphinus,  the  Dolphin,  quite  an  aquatic  collec- 
tion! 


328 


CHAPTEB  XLIH 

BRILLIANT  STARS  OF  THE  SOUTHERN  HEMISPHERE 

QTAR  gazers  of  northern  lands  often  overlook 
^  the  fact  that  some  of  the  most  brilliant  and 
beautiful  stars  and  finest  nebulae  and  star  clusters 
in  the  heavens  belong  to  the  southern  hemisphere 
a  ad  are  not  visible  in  our  latitudes. 

The  brilliant  first  magnitude  star  Formalhaut 
that  culminates  in  the  zenith  in  thirty  degrees 
south  latitude  comes  about  twenty  degrees  above 
oar  southern  horizon  in  late  summer  and  autumn 
months  to  give  us  a  hint  of  the  beauties  of  the 
southland,  and  if  our  view  of  the  southern  horizon 
is  not  obstructed  by  houses,  trees  or  mountains,  as 
in  so  often  the  case,  we  may  then  see  this  interest- 
ing star  of  the  south.  Stars  are  never  seen  at  their 
best  when  near  the  horizon,  however,  for  we  then 
view  them  through  denser  layeri  of  atmosphere 
329 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


than  if  they  were  nearer  the  zenith.  All  ce- 
lestial bodies  shine  brightest  when  they  are  over- 
head. 

Magnificent  blue-white  Canopus,  the  second 
brightest  star  in  the  heavens,  lies  just  below  our 
southern  horizon  in  the  large  and  important  south- 
ern constellation  of  Argo  Navis,  named  for  the  fa- 
mous ship  of  the  Argonauts.  It  is  usually  divided 
into  three  constellations — Puppis,  Carina  and  Vela. 
Canopus  was  the  chief  pilot  of  the  Argonauts,  but 
the  star  was  known  and  worshipped  on  the  banks 
of  the  Nile  long  before  it  received  its  name  from 
the  Greeks  and  it  has  been  called  the  Star  of  Egypt. 
It  has  also  been  a  guide  to  many  tribes  in  Africa, 
South  America  and  Australia  in  their  journeys 
through  pathless  wilds. 

Although  Sirius  appears  nearly  twice  as  brilliant 
as  Canopus,  this  is  due  only  to  the  fact  that  Sirius 
is  comparatively  near  to  us,  not  quite  nine  light 
years  distant,  while  no  accurate  measurement  of 
the  distance  of  Canopus  has  yet  been  made.  It  is, 
as  far  as  we  know,  the  greatest  of  all  the  giant 
suns  and  its  light-giving  power  has  been  estimated 
as  high  as  fifty  thousand  times  that  of  our  own 
sun.  Sirius,  with  a  brilliancy  estimated  at  forty- 
330 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


eight  times  that  of  the  sun,  shrinks  into  a  pygmy 
when  compared  with  Canopus. 

Other  brilliant  first  magnitude  stars  in  southern 
nkies  that  are  invisible  to  us  are  Alpha  Centauri, 
the  nearest  of  all  the  stars  and  one  of  the  finest 
doubles  in  the  heavens ;  Beta  Centauri,  a  beautiful 
white  star  near  Alpha — the  two  reminding  us  of 
the  twins  in  Gemini;  Achernar,  far  south  in  the 
river  Eridanus,  and  the  beautiful  bluish-white 
double  star,  Alpha  Crucis,  the  brightest  of  the  four 
stars  that  form  the  Southern  Cross. 

The  constellation  of  the  Southern  Cross  is  the 
most  noted  of  all  the  southern  constellations.  It 
nerves  as  a  timepiece  for  the  southern  hemisphere, 
;just  as  the  Great  Dipper  does  for  northern  lands. 
It  stands  in  a  nearly  upright  position  when  cul- 
minating or  passing  the  meridian. 

Early  Spanish  conquerors  of  Mexico  and  South 
America  regarded  this  cross  as  a  token  of  heaven's 
approval  of  their  attempt  to  plant  the  Christian 
faith  in  the  wilds  of  the  New  World.  Upon  the 
first  maps  of  the  southern  hemisphere  South  Amer- 
ica appeared  as  "Terre  Sancte  Crucis,"  the  Land 
of  the  Holy  Cross. 

The  southern  constellations  Argo  Navis,  Crux 
331 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


and  Centaurus,  are  all  traversed  by  the  Milky 
Way. 

The  galaxy  in  Argo  Navis  is  crossed  by  many 
dark  bars,  and  near  the  Southern  Cross  is  the  pe- 
culiar pear-shaped  hole  known  as  the  Coal  Sack. 
One  of  the  most  peculiar  stars  in  the  heavens  is 
situated  in  southern  skies  and  is  invisible  in  our 
latitudes.  This  is  Eta  Argus,  which  lies  in  the 
midst  of  a  nebula  and  possesses  most  unusual  and 
irregular  fluctuations  of  light  which  distinguish  it 
from  various  classes  of  variable  stars  or  temporary 
stars. 

As  far  back  as  the  year  1677  this  star  was  ob- 
served to  fluctuate  in  brightness.  Between  that 
date  and  1800  records  show  a  great  range  of  bright- 
ness. In  1843  it  became  brighter  than  any  other 
star  except  Sirius.  At  present  it  is  barely  visible 
to  the  naked  eye.  When  at  its  brightest,  in  1843, 
it  gave  25,000  times  the  amount  of  light  that  it 
does  now. 

Far  to  the  south  in  the  circumpolar  constellation 
Tucana  is  to  be  found  the  finest  of  all  globular  star 
clusters  and  in  Argo  Navis  there  is  the  finest  ir- 
regular star  cluster  in  the  heavens.  Two  splendid 
globular  star  clusters,  located  in  this  large  and 
332 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


noted  constellation,  are  visible  even  to  the  naked 
<}ye.  In  Argo  we  also  find  the  largest  and  brightest 
of  the  naked  eye  nebulae. 

Of  unusual  interest  in  the  southern  hemisphere 
are  the  Lesser  and  Greater  Magellanic  Clouds. 
They  look  very  much  like  small  star  clouds  de- 
tached from  the  girdle  of  the  galaxy  which  en- 
eircles  the  heavens. 

The  Magellanie  Clouds  are  rich  in  nebulae,  va- 
riable stars  and  star  clusters  and  the  Greater  Cloud 
has  a  decidedly  spiral  form.  It  has  been  suggested 
that  our  own  stellar  system,  with  its  millions  of 
stars,  its  galactic  star  clouds,  its  nebulae,  variable 
stars  and  star  clusters  would  present  very  much 
the  same  appearance  that  the  Greater  Magellanic 
Cloud  does  to  us  if  it  were  transported  to  a  dis- 
tance of  a  hundred  thousand  light  years. 

Those  who  travel  to  the  southern  hemisphere  are 
impressed  by  the  fact  that  no  bright  star  marks 
the  south  pole  of  the  heavens.  To  locate  the  north 
pole  we  have  the  bright  second  magnitude  star, 
Polaris,  at  the  end  of  the  handle  of  the  Little  Dip- 
per, and  the  two  stars  that  outline  the  front  of  the 
bowl  of  the  Big  Dipper  act  as  pointers  to  the  pole 
atar. 

333 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


The  seven  stars  of  the  Big  Dipper  are  familiar 
to  nearly  every  one  in  northern  latitudes.  As  we 
pass  southward  the  pole  star  sinks  lower  and  lower 
toward  the  northern  horizon,  for  its  altitude  above 
the  horizon  always  equals  the  latitude  of  the  ob- 
server. At  the  equator  the  north  pole  lies  in  the 
horizon,  as  does  also  the  south  pole.  The  belt  of 
Orion  crosses  the  meridian  in  the  zenith.  The  view 
of  the  heavens  from  the  tropics  is  probably  unsur- 
passed, for  we  see  from  here  the  finest  constella- 
tions of  both  hemispheres. 

As  we  pass  into  the  Southern  Hemisphere  the 
Big  Dipper  gradually  sinks  below  the  northern 
horizon  and  we  turn  our  eyes  toward  the  unfamiliar 
constellations  surrounding  the  south  pole,  which 
rises  higher  and  higher  in  the  sky  as  we  go  south- 
ward. Canopus  in  Argo  Navis,  brilliant  Achernar 
and  the  four  stars  of  the  Southern  Cross  now 
mount  high  into  the  heavens  and  the  dearth  of 
bright  stars  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  south  pole 
is  very  evident. 

We  miss  the  familiar  Dippers  of  northern  lands 

encircling  the  north  pole  of  the  heavens  and  find  it 

hard  to  accustom  ourselves  to  circumpolar  regions 

so  different.    Toward  the  northern  horizon  we  now 

334 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


see  the  familiar  star  groups  that  passed  through 
our  zenith  in  middle  northern  latitudes,  the  North- 
ern Cross,  Lyra,  and  the  Northern  Crown,  Bootes, 
Hercules,  Perseus  Andromeda  and  Pegasus  usher- 
ing in  the  different  seasons. 


335 


CHAPTER  XLIV 

THE  ONE-HUNDRED  INCH  TELESCOPE  OF  THE  MT. 
WILSON  OBSERVATORY 

>TpHE  100-inch  mirror  for  the  greatest  reflecting 
-••  telescope  in  the  world  arrived  safely  at  the 
summit  of  Mount  Wilson,  Cal.,  5,700  feet  above 
sea  level,  in  July,  1917. 

The  new  reflector  has  a  light  gathering  power 
three  times  as  great  as  that  of  the  five-foot  reflector 
of  the  Mt.  Wilson  Observatory,  which  shows  stars 
as  faint  as  the  twentieth  magnitude.  It  will,  there- 
fore, show  stars  one  magnitude  fainter. 

It  is  estimated  that  fully  one  hundred  million 
additional  faint  stars  are  within  reach  of  this  great 
reflector.  Some  of  these  stars  may  be  comparatively 
near  to  us,  their  feeble  luminosity  being  due  to  the 
fact  that  they  are  dwarf  suns ;  others  may  be  faint 
only  because  they  lie  on  the  outskirts  of  the  uni- 
336 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


verse.  In  actual  luminosity  such  stars  would  equal 
or  surpass  our  own  sun. 

Next  to  the  100-inch  reflector  in  size  comes  the 
72-inch  reflector  of  the  Dominion  Astrophysical 
Observatory  which  started  on  its  observing  career 
in  the  spring  of  1918.  The  greatest  refractor  is 
the  40-inch  telescope  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory. 
Reflecting  and  refracting  telescopes  differ  radically 
in  their  treatment  of  the  light  received  from  the 
stars.  In  a  refractor  the  rays  of  light  pass  through 
the  lens  at  the  upper  end  of  the  telescope  tube 
and  travel  down  the  tube,  coming  to  a  focus  at  a 
point  within.  They  are  then  examined  by  the  ob- 
server by  means  of  the  eye-piece  at  the  lower  end  of 
the  telescope  tube.  In  the  reflecting  type  of  tele- 
scope the  mirror  is  placed  at  the  lower  end  of  the 
tube  and  reflects  the  incident  ray  back  through  the 
tube  to  a  secondary  mirror  placed  so  as  to  receive  it 
before  it  reaches  a  focus  and  to  reflect  it  in  turn  to 
the  observer  or  photographic  plate  placed  at  one 
side. 

It  is  possible  to  make  reflectors  much  larger 
than  refractors,  since  it  is  not  essential  that 
the  glass  be  absolutely  pure.  In  a  reflecting  tele- 
scope the  function  of  the  mirror  is  merely  to  act 
337 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


as  a  support  for  a  thin  silver  coating  which  is 
deposited  upon  its  upper  concaved  surface.  Twice 
a  year  this  silver  coating  must  be  renewed. 
Arrangements  have  been  made  to  have  this  quickly 
and  easily  done  in  case  of  the  new  reflector.  The 
mirror  will  be  removed  by  means  of  an  electric 
elevator  to  the  resilvering  room  in  the  same  build- 
ing. Since  light  does  not  penetrate  the  mirror,  but 
is  reflected  from  its  highly  polished  surface  to  a 
secondary  mirror  and  thence  to  the  photographic 
plate  or  eye  of  the  observer,  it  is  not  necessary  that 
the  glass  entering  into  its  composition  have  the 
high  degree  of  perfection  essential  to  the  lens  of  a 
refracting  telescope.  The  reflector  is  unsurpassed 
for  photographic  or  spectroscopic  work  inasmuch 
as  the  quality  of  the  light  received  is  unchanged. 
In  a  refracting  telescope  the  rays  are  always  to 
some  extent  broken  by  passage  through  the  lens. 
Perfect  achromatism  is  the  strongest  point  in  favor 
of  the  reflector. 

The  field  of  good  definition  for  the  great  reflector 
is  small,  however,  only  equalling  in  area  one-half 
the  disk  of  the  moon.  This  is  a  restriction  placed 
by  the  necessity  for  rapid  photographic  action. 

Work  upon  the  great  reflector  began  in  1906, 
338 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


when  the  St.  Gobain  glass  works  in  France  under- 
took to  manufacture  a  block  of  glass  large  enough 
and  perfect  enough  for  a  telescope  of  this  size. 
After  many  attempts  covering  an  interval  of  three 
years  a  satisfactory  piece  of  glass  for  the  great 
mirror  was  finally  obtained  and  delivered  at  the 
optical  shops  of  the  Mount  Wilson  Observatory  in 
Pasadena,  Cal.,  twelve  miles  from  the  summit  of 
Mount  Wilson. 

Here  for  seven  years  it  was  to  undergo  a  long 
process  of  grinding,  polishing  and  figuring.  All 
of  this  work  was  done  by  Prof.  George  Ritchey,  a 
member  of  the  staff  of  the  observatory.  In  its  fin- 
ished condition  the  mirror  weighs  four  and  a  half 
tons  and  is  nearly  thirteen  inches  in  thickness. 
This  thickness  is  essential  to  prevent  the  mirror 
bending  of  its  own  weight.  It  has  been  subjected 
to  many  tests,  increasing  in  refinement  as  the  work 
progressed,  and  is  now  considered  to  be  practically 
perfect. 

On  July  1,  1917,  it  was  packed  in  an  octagonal 
shaped  box  lined  with  paraffin  to  keep  out  the  dust 
and  taken  up  the  narrow  winding  mountain  road 
six  miles  in  length  on  a  truck  geared  to  a  maximum 
speed  of  two  miles  an  hour.  Another  truck  pre- 
339 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


ceded  it,  also  a  gang  of  workmen  with  tools  to  re- 
pair any  defect  in  the  road.  The  great  sections  of 
the  casting  were  made  at  the  Fore  River  Shipyards 
at  Quincy,  Mass.,  and  shipped  around  Cape  Horn, 
because  they  were  refused  as  shipments  by  rail- 
roads, being  too  wide  for  flat  cars  and  too  high 
for  tunnels.  All  parts  of  the  great  instrument  that 
were  not  of  unusual  size  and  that  required  careful 
workmanship  were  designed  and  made  at  the  in- 
strument shops  of  the  observatory  in  Pasadena. 

The  instrument  is  housed  in  a  steel  building  with 
a  100-foot  dome  weighing  500  tons  that  revolves 
easily  and  rapidly  by  means  of  electrical  ap- 
pliances. The  moving  parts  of  the  great  reflector, 
which  weigh  about  100  tons,  are  also  electrically 
controlled.  Every  detail  upon  which  the  success- 
ful operation  of  the  huge  instrument  depends  has 
been  carefully  worked  out  by  opticians  and  instru- 
ment makers  connected  with  the  observatory. 

The  problems  that  the  new  instrument  will  assist 
in  solving  will  be  chiefly  of  an  astrophysical  nature 
in  keeping  with  the  lines  of  research  undertaken  by 
this  observatory,  such  as  the  form  and  extent  of 
the  universe,  the  nature  of  star  clusters  and  neb- 
,  the  origin  and  evolution  of  stars  and  their 
340 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


physical  properties,  streaming  tendencies  and  ve- 
locities. Most  of  all  this  work  will  be  done  by 
means  of  photographic  and  spectroscopic  attach- 
ments and  not  by  direct  observations. 

At  the  present  time  special  attention  is  being 
given  to  the  red  stars  as  bearing  upon  the  question 
of  the  scattering  of  light  in  space.  It  has  been  ob- 
served that  among  stars  fainter  than  the  eighteenth 
magnitude  there  are  few,  if  any,  whiter  than  our 
own  sun,  which  is  classed  as  a  yellow  star,  although 
faint  white  stars  are  present  in  the  star  clouds  of 
the  Milky  Way. 

This  preponderance  of  red  stars  among  the 
faint  stars,  which  are  on  the  whole  the  most  dis- 
tant, has  led  to  the  belief  that  minute  particles  of 
matter,  cosmic  dust,  may  scatter  the  light  of  dis- 
tant stars  and  give  them  a  red  tinge,  just  as  the 
rays  of  the  setting  sun  have  a  reddish  tinge  due 
to  their  passage  through  the  dense,  low-lying  strata 
of  the  atmosphere.  It  is  known,  on  the  other 
hand,  that  stars  also  acquire  a  reddish  tinge  with 
advancing  age  and  a  lower  temperature,  and  also 
that  as  a  star  advances  in  age  its  velocity  increases, 
and  so  the  question  arises  whether  these  faint  stars 
may  not  be  reddish  because  they  are  advanced  in 

341 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


type,  and  distant,  because  they  have  travelled  far. 
It  is  one  of  the  questions  that  the  new  instrument  is 
well  qualified  to  attack,  since  it  is  particularly 
adapted  to  a  study  of  faint,  distant  stars. 

It  is  also  peculiarly  fitted  to  investigate  the  mys- 
terious spiral  nebulas,  especially  the  smaller  mem- 
bers of  the  class.  Are  they  " island  universes," 
faint  because  of  great  distance,  or  do  they  repre- 
sent the  first  stages  in  the  birth  of  star  systems 
comparatively  near  and  small?  There  are  spirals 
of  all  degrees  and  magnitudes,  from  the  Great 
Spiral  in  Andromeda,  visible  to  the  naked  eye,  to 
the  faintest  specks  of  spiral  form  visible  in  the 
large  telescopes.  What  will  the  great  reflectors 
have  to  tell  of  these  wonderful  formations? 

The  feelings  of  the  explorer  must  come  to  those 
first  privileged  to  guide  this  mighty  instrument 
and  penetrate  into  regions  of  space  hitherto  unex- 
plored. Man  stands  upon  his  tiny  planet,  which 
is  but  an  atom  in  the  universe,  and  tries  to  extend 
his  vision  further  and  further  into  the  eternity  cf 
life  that  flows  in  a  ceaseless  cycle  of  change  before 
his  eyes.  Very  slowly  and  laboriously  and  heavily 
handicapped  he  tries  to  solve,  step  by  step,  the 
mighty  riddle  of  creation. 
342 


SPLENDORS  OF  THE  SKY 


One  more  step  forward  will  be  taken  when  this 
noble  instrument  is  turned  toward  the  heavens  and 
those  who  have  labored  long  and  tirelessly  to  make 
it  worthy  of  its  task  begin  to  gather  the  precious 
fruits  of  their  labors. 


343 


CO 


CO 
CO 


•pj 

I 


0> 
H 

p 


University  of  Toronto 
Library 


DO  NOT 

REMOVE 

THE 

CARD 

FROM 

THIS 

POCKET 


Acme  Library  Card  Pocket 

Under  Pat.  "Ref.  Index  File" 

Made  by  LIBRARY  BUREAU